QX Series System

Software User Guide

Notice
The QX Series Inspection software is intended for use with the QX Series System. The QX Series System is a
measuring device intended for use in an industrial or a laboratory environment. Use of this equipment in a
manner not specified in the operating instructions may impair safe operation.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice. CyberOptics Corporation may make
improvements or changes in the products described in this publication at any time.

Trademarks
The following are trademarks or registered trademarks in the United States: CyberOptics, Statistical
Appearance Modeling (SAM), QX Series System are owned by CyberOptics Corporation; Microsoft and
Windows are owned by Microsoft Corporation; MicroLYNX is owned by Intelligent Motion Systems, Inc.;
FireWire is owned by Apple Corporation, Inc.

Warranty, License, and Terms of Sale

The warranty, software license and other terms and conditions of sale covering CyberOptics products are set
forth in CyberOptics Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale and License available at www.cyberoptics.com or by
calling CyberOptics at 1-800-746-6315 and requesting a copy.

Product Naming Convention

In this document, QX Series denotes the AOI products, QX100, QX100i, QX500, QX500-L and QX600 System.
Unless specified, otherwise information in this manual refers to the QX Series of products.

QX Series System Software User Guide

Part Number 8020156, Revision E
June 2013
©2013 CyberOptics Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Contents

1 Getting Started 1
Overview 2
Prerequisite Knowledge 2
Documentation 2
Common QX Series System Toolbar Buttons 3
QX Series System Directory Structure 5
Logging on to the QX Series System 8
Using The Launch Pad 9
Showing and Hiding the Launch Pad Text Labels 9
Accessing Online Help 10
Managing User Accounts 11
Setting Up New Users 11
Changing User Passwords or Barcode Use 12
Changing User Names 13
Deleting User Accounts 14
Setting Display Properties 15
Configuring the system 17
Setting Default Folders 19
Setting the System Repository Location 20
Setting Default Model Properties 21
Setting up Sampling Inspections 22
Setting Options for Failed Panels 22
Setting Responses to Events 23
Configuring Responses to System Events 23
Configuring Alarm Patterns for Hardware Events 24
Scanning images from right to left 25
Setting Data Output Options 28
Setting up XML or Process Insight/Process Monitor Data Output 29
Setting up Custom Data Output 30
Setting up RS232 Data Output 31
Setting General Barcode Properties 32
Loading Assemblies by Barcode 34

CyberOptics Corporation
 Setting up Dual – Stage Rework Stations 37
Defect Review Settings 38
Installing Asian Languages 40

2 Basic Programming Steps 41

QX Series System Basic Programming Flowchart 42
Files Needed for Programming 44
CyberOptics default component library 44
Create the Assembly 45
Stitch the Image 46
Import CAD Data 47
Import CAD and BOM Data 48
Import SRFF Data 50
Panelize Assembly 51
Define Fiducials 52
Define Components Using Component Library 54
Importing component from the default Component Library 57
Auto collecting first batch of example(s) 59
Add Composite Tasks 60
Add Pin Tasks 60
Add Text Tasks 61
Add Missing Tasks 61
Mark Component Templates Defined 62
Fit Components to Layers 63
Final Steps 63
Creating a new component in the component library 64

3 Creating Assemblies 65
Assembly Data 66
Opening an Assembly 67
Loading Mounter Information from Assembly Editor 69
Capturing Image Data 71
Define the Panel Size and Image Overlaps 72
Capture Images 75
Creating an Image Sequence File (Optional) 76
Loading Images into the Assembly Editor 77
Stitching the Image 78
Auto stitching 79
Stitch patches manually 80
Stitch Patch Recommendations 91

iv QX Series System Software User Guide

 Stitch Points Results 92
Moving Stitch Patches 93
Resizing Stitch Patches 93
Specifying Limits on Stitching Motion 95
Reducing Stitcher Errors 96
Stitching and Inspecting Simultaneously 97
Selecting Surface Models 98
Creating Surface Plots
(Measurement Systems Only) 99
Importing CAD Data 100
Overview 102
Running the CAD Importer 103
Importing CAD and BOM Data 106
Importing SRFF Data 108
Aligning the Root Task with the Panel Image 113
Panelizing a Board 115
Saving, Moving, and Deleting Assemblies 117
Creating a Variation of an Assembly 119
Componentizing an Assembly 121
Finding Tasks 123

4 Defining Fiducials 125

Overview 126
Defining a Fiducial Template 128
Seeding a Model 131
Inspecting Fiducials in the Assembly Editor 135
Editing a Fiducial Template 138
Editing a Fiducial Model 139
Viewing a Model Example 139
Changing Model Geometry 140
Editing the Examples in the Model 141
Defining Active and Inactive Areas for the Model 142
Adding a Failed Example to a Model 144
Locating Fiducials within an Assembly 145
Changing Unit Tasks to Locators 146
Reducing Fiducial Errors 146

5 Programming Components 147

Assigning Part Types to Layers 148
About Templates 150
Working With Unit Templates 151
Opening Existing Unit Templates 151

CyberOptics Corporation v
 Saving Unit Templates 152
Deleting Templates 153
Loading Stored Images in the Unit Template Editor 153
Creating Unit Templates 154
Adjusting Search Areas and Tolerances 157
Setting Search Levels 159
Correcting for Height During Inspections
(Measurement Systems Only) 160
Aligning Tasks and Images 161
Centering Templates around Task Icons 162
Resizing Unit Task Icons 163
Viewing Undefined Templates 164
Cloning Templates 165
Uncloning Templates 166
Working with Models 167
Creating a Component Model 168
Creating Models Manually 170
Opening Existing Models 171
Loading Images in the Model Editor 171
Saving Models 172
Deleting Models 173
Editing Model Geometry 174
Positioning Model Task Icons 175
Defining Active Areas for Component Models 176
Sizing Active Areas 180
Defining Inactive Areas 181
Reusing Model Geometries 182
Changing Grid Settings 183
Working With Examples 184
Viewing Examples 184
Setting the Maximum Number of Examples for a Model 185
Automatically Seeding the Model 186
Adding Examples from the Model Editor 187
Adding Individual Examples to a Model 188
Adding Failed Examples to a Model 189
Deleting Examples from a Model 190
Aligning Examples 191
Automatically Aligning Examples 193
Editing the Examples in the Model 197
Working with Training Sets 198
Advanced Editing 202
Adding Tasks Manually 202
Loading Properties From an Existing Template 202
Defining a Symmetrical Model 203
Enabling OR Logic for Unit Template Inspections 205
Enabling AND Logic for Unit Template Inspections 206
Switching Templates 207

vi QX Series System Software User Guide

 Associating Models with Templates 208
Removing Models From Templates 208
Disabling Models within a Unit Template 209
Defining Inspection Properties for Multiple Models 210
Defining Model Discrimination 211
Setting Search Levels for Models 213
Exporting Examples 214
Importing Examples 215
Explicitly Selecting the Camera Images 216

6 Defining Composite Templates 217

Understanding Composite Templates 218
Defining Composite Templates 220
Creating Composite Templates Manually 220
Converting a Unit Template to a Composite Template 221
Adding Tasks Manually 222
Adding Tasks for Component Bodies 223
Adding Pin Tasks for Dual In-Line Packages 224
Adding Tasks for Grid Arrays 225
Adding Tasks for Quad Flat-Pack Pins 226
Adding Gap Tasks 227
Adding Single Tasks 228
Adding Tasks for Text 229
Adding Barcode Tasks 231
Adding Skip Mark Tasks 233
Adding Tasks for Component Library 234
Component Library UI improvement 235
Editing Composite Templates 236
Centering Templates Around Task Icons 236
Resizing Composite Task Icons 237
Loading Properties for a Composite Template 237
Editing Unit Templates 238
Positioning Unit Tasks 239
Inspecting Composite Tasks 241
Defining Inspection Logic 242
Disabling Tasks 243
Disabling Operator Disagree Option 243
Defining Voting Composites 244
Rejecting Outliers 245
Reporting Composite Inspection Results 245

7 Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results 247

Inspecting Images in the Assembly Editor 248
Inspecting Stored Images 248
Inspecting Live Images 249
Inspecting Image Sequences 249

CyberOptics Corporation vii

 Analyzing Inspection Results 250
Sorting Results 251
Failure Causes and Corrective Action 252
Editing Barcodes and Lot Codes 253
Defining Permitted Board Warp and Stretch 254
Using Statistician 255
Getting Started 255
Opening an Assembly in the Statistician 255
Displaying Inspection or Stitching Task Data 256
Filtering Data 256
Selecting Items 257
Sorting the Instances List 257
Viewing Clones of Master Templates 257
Viewing Task Details 258
Selecting Results in the Statistician 259
About Measurement Frames 261
Selecting Measurement Frames 262
Plotting Statistics 263
Saving Statistics 263
Creating Height Maps
(Measurement Systems Only) 264
Generating Hotspot Images 265
Performing Repeatability Studies - Overview 266
Defining Fiducials for Repeatability Studies 267
Testing the Stitching Task and Fiducials 269
Defining Components for Repeatability Studies 270
Analyzing the Data in Repeatability Studies 272
Exporting Repeatability Data
(Measurement Systems Only) 273

8 Synchronizing Data 275

About the System Repository 276
Synchronizing Assemblies 277
Synchronizing Individual Models and Templates 279
Overriding the Synchronization Process 281
Viewing All Unsynchronized Objects 282
Viewing Active Objects 282

9 Improving Discrimination 283

Testing a Changed Template for Discrimination 284
Running Blank Board Studies 285
Running a Study on One Blank Board 285
Running a Study on a Sequence of Blank Boards
(post-reflow) 286

viii QX Series System Software User Guide

 Analyzing the Reasons for Poor Discrimination 288
Editing the Stitching Task to Improve Discrimination 290
Checking the Height Map for Problems
(Measurement Systems Only) 290
Verifying That the Fiducial Stitch Patches Are Locating Correctly 292
Using Reset Models in the Stitcher Editor 294
Populating the Stitching Task 294
Verifying that the Fiducials Are Locating Correctly 295
Editing a Model to Improve Its Discrimination 296
Viewing Model Diagnostics 296
Deciding Which Examples to Delete from the Model 299
Editing a Template to Improve Its Discrimination 300

10 System Administration 303

Using the Inspection Cell Editor 305
Saving and Loading Images 306
Viewing Images in the Inspection Cell Editor 307
Viewing Camera Properties 308
Loading Firmware Files 309
Adjusting Conveyor Width 310
Adjusting the Conveyor Width Automatically 310
Adjusting the Conveyor Width Manually 311
Calibrating the Conveyor Width Adjuster 311
Homing the Conveyor 312
Setting the Conveyor Speed 314
Setting the Conveyor Direction 315
Configuring SMEMA 316
Calibrating the Cameras 317
Aligning the Cameras 318
Setting the Home Offset 319
Setting Up Cameras 320
Calibrating the QX Series System 321
Calibrating the distance between the two SIMs 323
Saving an Image of the Calibration Target 324
Enabling and saving lighting calibration 325
Changing the Task Visibility 326
Testing the Inspection Cell Settings 327
Testing the System Barcode Reader 328
Testing Hardware Signals 328

CyberOptics Corporation ix
 Configuring tower light and upstream SMEMA control 329
Configuring and deleting full results 332
Configuring shop floor 333
Enabling clone functionality 334
Using an NG Stacker 335
Using Existing Assemblies on QX600 337
Generating .R file for pass board 338
Exporting Assembly into XML file format 339
Automatically releasing a panel 340
Configuring pause time in the Rework Station 341

A Detailed Component Settings 343

IPC Class 344
Pre-Reflow Inspections 344
Passive Components 344
Plastic 2-pin Devices 345
SOTs 346
SOIC / TSOP / SSOP (SOPs in general) 347
SOJs 349
QFP 350
PLCC/CLCC 351
Post-Reflow Inspections 352
Passive Components 352
Plastic 2-pin Devices 353
SOTs 354
SOIC / TSOP / SSOP (SOPs in general) 355
SOJs 359
QFP Bodies 360
QFP Joints 361
PLCC/CLCC 363
Post-Wave Solder Joint Inspections 364
Passive Components 364
Plastic 2-pin Devices 365
SOTs 366
SOIC / TSOP / SSOP (SOPs in general) 367
SOJs 371
QFP Bodies 371
QFP Joints 372
PLCC/CLCC 372
Through-Hole Joints 373
Through Hole Component Inspections (Top Side) 374
Default conveyor speed for SIM120/QX600 375
Camera lighting calibration settings 376

x QX Series System Software User Guide

 B Glossary 377

C For More Information 385

Technical Support 386
Copyright and Terms of Use 387

Index 389

CyberOptics Corporation xi
xii QX Series System Software User Guide
 1 Getting Started

Overview 2

Logging on to the QX Series System 8

Using The Launch Pad 9

Accessing Online Help 10

Managing User Accounts 11

Setting Display Properties 15

Configuring the system 17

Setting Default Folders 19

Setting the System Repository Location 20

Setting Default Model Properties 21

Setting up Sampling Inspections 22

Setting Options for Failed Panels 22

Setting Responses to Events 23

Setting Data Output Options 28

Setting General Barcode Properties 32

Loading Assemblies by Barcode 34

Setting up Dual – Stage Rework Stations 37

Defect Review Settings 38

Installing Asian Languages 40

CyberOptics Corporation
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Overview
The QX Series System Software User Guide is designed to guide you through the process of
inspecting, programming, and debugging an assembly on a new system. Chapter 2 provides an
overall basic programming flow that guides you through the major steps required to create an
assembly. Each aspect of this process is described in more detail following Basic Programming
Steps on page 41 in separate sections of the manual.

The steps required to program and debug an assembly are shown in a flow chart in Basic
Programming Steps on page 41. If you follow these steps using the information provided in this
manual, you should have a working production assembly that you can easily maintain and update.

Prerequisite Knowledge
Users of the QX Series System should have the following skills:
● Moderate Microsoft® Windows® experience
● Knowledge of the component placement process

Documentation
Documentation for the QX Series System consists of the following information:
● QX500/QX500-X System Hardware Manual
Provides an overview of QX500 System components, instructions for how to install and maintain
the QX500 System, parts replacement information, and system specifications.
● QX600/QX600-L System Hardware Manual
Provides an overview of QX600 System components, instructions for how to install and maintain
the QX600 System, parts replacement information, and system specifications.
● QX600-D System Hardware Manual
Provides an overview of QX600-D System components, instructions for how to install and
maintain the QX600-D System, parts replacement information, and system specifications.
● Flex Ultra™High Resolution Hardware Manual
Provides an overview of Flex Ultra System components, instructions for how to install and
maintain the Flex Ultra System, parts replacement information, and system specifications.
● QX100 System Hardware Manual
Provides an overview of QX100 System components, instructions for how to install and maintain
the QX100 System, parts replacement information, and system specifications.
● QX Series System Software User Guide and Online Help
Provides task-based, step-by-step procedures and descriptions of the software controls for the
Programmer application.
● QX Series System Inspection and Rework User Guide and Online Help
Provides task-based, step-by-step procedures and descriptions of the software controls for the
Operator and Reworker applications.

2 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Overview

Common QX Series System Toolbar Buttons

The following table describes some of the toolbar buttons common throughout the QX Series System
software.
Note: The system should always be run with the Display Theme set to Windows Classic theme
i (Control Panel> Display Options> Themes tab). When the Windows XP theme is used, some
buttons may appear black or be obscured by black boxes.

Table 1. Common Toolbar Buttons

Tool Name Description

Open Open an assembly, unit template, composite template, or model in the

associated Editor.

Save Save changes to the current assembly, unit template, composite template,
or model and leave the active editor open.

Save and Exit Save changes to the current assembly, unit template, composite template,
or model and close the active editor.
Note: This button does not appear on the Assembly Editor toolbar.

Properties Edit properties of an assembly, unit template, composite template, or

model in the associated editor.

Display Adjust the brightness, contrast, and other display properties of the image.
Properties

Select Select an object. Click this button and then click an object to select it. The
selected object turns yellow.
Clicking a composite task selects the composite task and its unit tasks. To
select more than one object, click this button and drag a box around the
objects. Or press and hold the SHIFT key while you click each object in
turn. To deselect all selected objects, click in any part of the image area
that is not part of a task icon or a task name.

Zoom Magnify or reduce the size of the displayed image. Click this button and
then click in the image area to magnify (left-click) or reduce (right-click) the
displayed image. You can also drag a box around part of the image to
enlarge just that part of the image.

Move Move an object. Click this button and then click and drag an object to move
the object.
Moving a composite task moves both the composite task and its unit tasks.
To move more than one object as a group, select the objects using the
Select tool, click the Move button, and drag any of the selected objects.

Rotate Rotate an object. Click this button and then click and drag a corner of an
object to rotate the object.
Rotating a composite task rotates the composite task and its unit tasks. To
rotate more than one object as a group, select the objects using the Select
tool, click the Rotate button, and drag any corner of any selected object.

Move/Rotate Move or rotate a task. Click this button and then click and drag the center
cross-hair of the task icon to move the icon, or click and drag a corner of
the task rotate the task. Moving or rotating a composite task moves or
rotates the composite task and its unit tasks.
To move more than one object as a group, select the objects using the
Select tool, click the Move button, and drag the center cross-hair of any of
the selected objects. To rotate more than one object as a group, select the
desired objects using the Select tool, click the Rotate button, and drag
any corner of any selected object.
Note: This button appears only on the Model Editor toolbar.

CyberOptics Corporation 3
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Tool Name Description

Resize Resize an object. Click this button and then click and drag a corner of an
object to proportionally resize the object. Click and drag a side of the object
to resize only that side of the object. To resize more than one object
proportionally as a group, select the desired objects using the Select tool,
and then click this button and drag any corner of any selected object.

Zoom Out Reduce the size of the image in the Zoom pane with a single click. If the
Zoom pane is hidden, clicking this button reduces the size of the image in
the Panel Layout pane.

Zoom In Magnify the size of the image in the Zoom pane with a single click. If the
Zoom pane is hidden, clicking this button magnifies the size of the image in
the Panel Layout pane.

Reset View Reset the magnification of the Panel Layout pane so that the entire task is
visible in the pane.

4 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Overview

QX Series System Directory Structure

All of the information necessary to inspect boards on a QX Series System is contained within the
QX Series system directory. Files used by the Rework station are shared between the two systems.
Table 2. QX Series system Directory Structure

CyberOptics Corporation 5
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Assemblies Contains assembly files created using QX Series System

AssemblyVariants Contains variations defined for assemblies that are

similar, but have slight configuration differences.

BarcodeToAssembly Contains customer-configured barcode-to-assembly

mapping files and a backup of the files.

CAD Contains CAD data from circuit board manufacturers. These

files are used to program the assembly for QX Series System.

CADFormats Contains CAD format files are created during programming.

They contain information about how the CAD data is
structured.

Calibration Contains SIM files.

Collections Contains collections created or used on this system. Each

collection folder contains models and templates specific to that
collection.

Config Contains system, camera, and controller configuration files.

CyberOptics Contains pre-defined templates with read-only access.

da-DK Contains program files needed to support Danish language.

ErrorReports Contains logged error reports.

Failed Task Files Contains files of failed tasks saved during inspection for review
on the Rework station.

FullResults Contains all inspection results.

History Contains records of the last 5 inspections performed; one text

file for each inspection.

Images Contains images captured by the cameras in the QX Series

System.

InspectionCells Contains Inspection Cell configuration settings files.

JA Contains program files needed to support Japanese language.

KO Contains program files needed to support Korean language.

LotInfo Contains lot information for each assembly in an xml file.

Models Contains legacy model libraries used on this system.

MounterData Contains mounter data file which includes mounter

information for all components on the panel.

OUI Framework Contains program files needed to run the QX Series System
Inspection program.

OutputObjects Contains data formats created in the Output Types

section of the Results Storage tab in System
Properties.

Results Inspection results.

Server Logs Contains ChangeLog.txt file which lists all programming

activity.

Templates Contains legacy unit and composite templates.

Utils System files not used during normal operation.

6 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Overview

ZH-CHS Contains program files needed to support simplified Chinese

language.

ZH-CHT Contains program files needed to support traditional Chinese

language.

CyberOptics Corporation 7
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Logging on to the QX Series System

The QX Series System keeps a record of users who log on to the system. The records are written to
the logfile.txt file, which is located in the QX Series System software directory.

➢ To log on to the QX Series System as a programmer

To create assemblies for the QX Series System, you must have access to the software as a
Programmer. See Managing User Accounts on page 11 for more information about setting up
individual User Accounts.
1. On the Windows desktop, double-click the following icon.

The Login dialog box opens.

2. In the User Name text box, type kestra.

3. In the Password text box, type ISITE.

i Note: Both the user name and password are case-sensitive.

4. Click OK.
The Login dialog box closes and the Launch Pad appears.

➢ To log on as a different user

1. On the Launch Pad, click Log Off.
2. In the Login dialog box, type the user name and password.
3. Click OK.

8 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Using The Launch Pad

Using The Launch Pad

The Launch Pad gives Programmers access to all areas of the QX Series System software. Associate
Programmers and Lead Operators have limited access to the QX Series System software. Operators
and reworkers do not have access to the Launch Pad.

Click the Information button to access product information, the Programmer Online Help, or to
show/hide the text labels on the Launch Pad.

Showing and Hiding the Launch Pad Text Labels

By default, the system displays the text labels associated with the buttons on the Launch Pad. You
can hide these labels to reduce the size of the Launch Pad. If the labels are hidden, this option shows
the labels on the Launch Pad.
● On the Launch Pad, click the Information button and select Show Labels.

CyberOptics Corporation 9
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Accessing Online Help

The Programmer Online Help provides how-to instructions for programmers, and descriptions of
the controls and interface for a specific window or dialog box.

➢ To launch the Online Help

● On the Launch Pad, click the Information button and select Help Contents.
- or -
From any window menu bar, select Help > Help Contents.
● In a linked window or dialog box, press F1 or click Help.
The system displays the online Help description for the current window or dialog box.

➢ To navigate the Programmer Online Help system

1. Launch the Programmer Online Help.
2. On the Programmer Online Help toolbar, click to display the navigation pane.

If the navigation pane is already displayed, the toolbar has a button instead.
Click the Hide button to hide the navigation pane. Only one of these buttons is visible at a time.
3. In the navigation pane of the Programmer Online Help, click the appropriate tab as described in
the following table.

Click this tab To

Contents View the contents of the Help file. To expand a closed book, double-click the plus
sign (+) next to the book title. To display a page in the Help window, click the page
title.

Index View the index for the Help file. To display a page in the Help window, double-click
the index entry. If the entry has more than one page associated with it, the system
displays a list of pages for you to choose from. Select the desired topic and click
Display.

Search Search the Help file for a specific topic. Type the word or words to search for in the
Search text box and then click List Topics. The system displays the list of topics
containing the search word. To display a page in the Help window, double-click the
topic.

10 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Managing User Accounts

Managing User Accounts

The User Manger provides tools to set up user accounts, change user names and passwords, and
deleted users from the system. Make sure that you set up all system properties before adding user
accounts.

Setting Up New Users

Access to QX Series System features is controlled through the following User Types in the User
Manager:
● Programmers: Calibrate the system, program new assemblies, maintain existing assemblies, and
control user access to the QX Series application. Given full access to the QX Series software.
● Associate Programmers: Same access as Lead Operators, but can also use the QX Series
application to add or remove examples from models and to turn tasks on or off.
● Lead Operators: Same access as Operators, but can also use the QX Series application to set
system properties, edit the stitching task, calibrate the machine, set up cameras, and use
Statistician. Lead Operators are also given access to the Calibrator, Inspection Cell Editor, and
Rework Station. Lead Operators can show/hide columns in the Panel Selection window.
● Operators: Ensure that the correct inspection assembly is loaded and working correctly.
Depending on the system configuration and installation options, operators may also perform
rework duties. Given access to the QX Series Inspection and Defect Review applications.
● Reworkers: Review failures and rework defects. Given access to Offline Defect Review.
● Hardware Engineers: Calibrate the system, test the hardware, reset the software, eject boards,
and load new firmware. Given access to the Calibrator and Inspection Cell Editor only.

➢ To set up new users

1. On the Launch Pad, click User Manager.
The User Manager dialog box opens.

CyberOptics Corporation 11
Chapter 1: Getting Started

2. In the User Group list box, select the type of user to add: Programmers, Operators, Reworkers,
or Hardware Engineers.
3. Click Add.
The Add <UserType> dialog box opens.

4. In the User name text box, type the user name.

5. In the Password text box, type a password.
6. In the Confirm password text box, retype the same password.
7. If the Barcode box is present, enter a barcode verification for the user. This option is present only
if you select Reworker Verification Mandatory check box on the Inspection & Rework
Stations tab of the System Properties dialog box.

8. Click OK.
The system adds the user name to the user accounts. The user can now access the QX Series
application using the specified user name, password, and barcode.
9. In the User Manager dialog box, click Close.

Changing User Passwords or Barcode Use

Programmers can change user passwords or barcode verification codes through the User Manager.

➢ To change user passwords

1. On the Launch Pad, click User Manager.
2. In the User Manager dialog box, from the User Group list, select the type of user account to
edit: Programmers, Operators, Reworkers, or Hardware Engineers.
3. In the Name list, select the user name to edit.
4. Click Edit.
5. In the Edit UserType dialog box, change the password and/or barcode verification. The barcode
verification option is present only if you select Reworker Verification Mandatory check box on
the Inspection & Rework Stations tab of the System Properties dialog box
6. Click OK.
7. In the User Manager dialog box, click Close.

12 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Managing User Accounts

Changing User Names

To change user names, add the new user name and delete the existing name through the User
Manager.

➢ To change user names

1. On the Launch Pad, click User Manager.
2. In the User Manager dialog box, from the User Group list, select the type of user account:
Programmers, Operators, Reworkers, or Hardware Engineers.
3. Click Add.
4. In the Add UserType dialog box, enter the new name and additional information for the user.
Then click OK.
5. In the User Manager dialog box, select the original name for the user.
6. Click Delete.
7. In the User Manager dialog box, click Close.

Note: The delete confirmation message appears only if you select the Display Delete Confirmation
i Dialog check box on the Miscellaneous tab in the System Properties dialog box.

CyberOptics Corporation 13
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Deleting User Accounts

Programmers can delete user accounts through the User Manager.

➢ To delete user accounts

1. On the Launch Pad, click User Manager.
2. In the User Group list, select the user type associated with the user account to delete.
The system populates the Name list with the names of the users who belong to the selected user
group.
3. Select a user from the Name list.
4. Click Delete.
A message appears asking if you want to delete this user.

5. To delete the user and close the message box, click OK.
6. In the User Manager dialog box, click Close.

14 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Setting Display Properties

Setting Display Properties

Use the display properties to control the brightness, contrast, and smoothness of the image shown on
the screen. Changing the display settings only affects the appearance of the image on the computer
screen; it does not change the saved image.

To access the Display Properties dialog box:

● From most windows click in the Toolbar.
● If the button is not available, select Properties> Display.

For more detail about each option, click Help in the Display Properties dialog box.

➢ To set basic properties

● For Brightness and Contrast drag the slider control to adjust for the proper appearance.
● By default, Deblurring, Gamma correction, and Smooth Resampling are selected.
– Deblurring: Sharpens the image.
– Gamma Correction: Adjusts the image to make the color model more linear. The effect of
gamma correction appears in the brightness and contrast of the image. You may need to also
adjust the brightness or contrast after gamma correction is applied.
– Smooth Resampling: Enables interpolation for the image.

➢ To use Bayer Interpolation properties

Bayer Interpolation uses a specific set of red, green, and blue color filters to create the image. The
options provided in this section determine how the filtered image is interpolated to reconstruct a
sharp, true-color image.
● Gaussian: Gaussian interpolation smooths the image with a Gaussian kernel to eliminate the
Bayer pattern. It can leave colored artifacts along sharp edges and blurs the image significantly.
● Malvar: Malvar interpolation is a linear method that uses larger smoothing kernels to preserve
image sharpness. The resulting image is sharp, but can result in a serrated edge.
● Pixel Grouping: Pixel grouping creates new pixels based on the assumption that pixels in the
same group are approximately the same brightness and color. It reduces common Bayer
interpolation artifacts such as serrated edges and isolated dots.
● Gradients: Gradient interpolation evaluates the gradients of surrounding pixels and calculates a
threshold gradient from which the new pixel color is determined.
● LumEval: LumEval interpolation produces the sharpest image. This option is selected by default.

CyberOptics Corporation 15
Chapter 1: Getting Started

➢ To use Enhancement mode

Enhancement mode highlights feature edges to give a more clear determination as to whether a
defect appears in the image. You can turn on Enhancement mode and cycle through the options
without opening the Display Properties dialog box. These controls are also available from the View
menu.
1. Press Ctrl+T to toggle the Enable Enhancement option on or off.
2. Press Ctrl+N to cycle through the Enhancement options:
● None: Turns off edge enhancements.
● Black & White Edges: Shows black and white gradient image.
● Color Edges: Shows color gradient images
Inverse Video: Can be used with any of the three options above to show the image in inverse
video, where bright areas become dark and dark areas become bright.
When cycling through the enhancement options using Ctrl+N, the system turns on an option
with inverse video, then turns off inverse video, turns on the next option in inverse video, etc. so
that first you see the enhancement option in inverse video, then you see just the enhancement
option.

16 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Configuring the system

Configuring the system

Use the System Properties dialog box to customize your QX Series System. Because some system
properties affect the way users access the system, CyberOptics recommends that you set up all
system properties before adding the user accounts. Most changes made to the system properties take
effect immediately. If not, you are prompted to restart the application.

➢ To use system Properties

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties.
2. In the System Properties dialog box, select a tab and change the settings as desired. For
complete information about each of the settings, click Help.

● Use the System Properties - Barcode tab to customize how the system reads the barcodes
on the boards as they enter the machine.
● Use the System Properties - File Storage tab to change the default libraries for your
images and CAD data, to change the location of the system repository, and to enable
automatic saving of assemblies.
● Use the System Properties - Inspection & Rework Stations tab to customize the
Inspection Station and Rework Station interfaces and to decide on data storage options.
● Use the System Properties - Result Storage tab to specify how to save inspection results.

CyberOptics Corporation 17
Chapter 1: Getting Started

● Use the System Properties - Miscellaneous tab to assign the minimum number of
examples allowed in a model, assign a value for calibration precision, control the display of
warning and confirmation messages, define tilt estimation parameters, define the default
templates to use for creating new unit and composite templates, enable camera selection,
define good examples ratio, and enable mounter information update.
● Use the System Properties - Hardware tab to view the configuration of your QX Series
machine. The parameters on the Hardware tab should not be changed.
● Use the System Properties - Debug tab to view the debugging information of your QX
Series machine. The settings on the Debug tab should not be changed.

18 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Setting Default Folders

Setting Default Folders

In most cases, when you open a dialog box that allows you to load an image or a CAD file, the
dialog box defaults to the directory that was opened the last time you opened the dialog box. For the
Save Image Sequence feature in the Assembly Editor, however, the system saves the sequence in the
default image folder assigned here.

For CAD data, the folder must be set relative to the folder where the QX Series software is installed.
Do not use absolute paths (for example, D:\Path).

➢ To set default folders

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then select the File Storage tab.
2. In the Images text box, type the name of the default folder for storing images.
3. In the CAD text box, type the name of the default folder for storing CAD data, relative to the
folder where the QX Series software is installed.
4. Click OK.

CyberOptics Corporation 19
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Setting the System Repository Location

The system repository is a common network storage location for assemblies, templates, and models.
Using a network connection enables all users of the QX Series application to have access to the same
set of files. Users can thus contribute to models from any product or assembly that uses that
particular part and make updated models available to all inspection stations.

You can also maintain separate template and model versions specific to certain products or
assemblies by not committing them to the system repository. This helps prevent users from
unintentionally mixing models with product-specific variations.

➢ To set the system repository location

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then select the File Storage tab.
2. In the Location of System Database section, set the path and server where the system
repository resides.
For networked machines that use the system repository, the inspection and rework machines
must share the same common file space for assembly, model, and template libraries as well as for
training assemblies or failed task information.
3. Click OK.

20 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Setting Default Model Properties

Setting Default Model Properties

Default properties can be set for models in a specific library using the System Properties dialog
box. These default properties apply only to models added using the Composite Template Editor, not
to models added using CAD data import.

➢ To set default properties for models

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then select the Miscellaneous tab.
2. In the Defaults for New Models section, set the initial values for Discrimination and Active
area size.
● Discrimination: Select the level of discrimination to use for new models: Low, Medium, or
High. The higher the level of discrimination, the more successfully the model will
discriminate between acceptable and unacceptable components.
– Low discrimination typically results in better accuracy and repeatability on pre-reflow
boards.
– High discrimination is best for models used in solder joint inspections and is also used
for models used in post-reflow inspections.
● Active area expansion: Enter the number of millimeters by which to expand the active area
from the SAM icon in the X and Y directions by default.
3. Click Model Defaults.
4. In the Model Defaults dialog box, select an existing library or click New to create a new library.
The default properties will be applied to all models associated with the selected library.
5. Set properties as needed in each of the four tabs: General, Inspection, Symmetry, Auto-
Alignment. Press F1 in the tab for descriptions of each option.
6. Click OK to apply your changes and close the Model Defaults dialog box.
7. Click Apply and OK to apply your changes and close the System Properties dialog box.

CyberOptics Corporation 21
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Setting up Sampling Inspections

Use the Inspection and Rework Stations properties to set up your inspection process to sample
panels moving through the system, rather than inspect each panel.

➢ To set up sampling inspections

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then select the Inspection & Rework
Stations tab.

2. At the bottom of the General section, select Enable sub-sampled board inspection.
3. In the Inspect 1 of every x boards field, enter the number corresponding to the required
sample rate.
4. Click OK.

Setting Options for Failed Panels

Use the Inspection and Rework Stations properties to set up the system response to a panel failure.

➢ To set up system response to failed panel

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties and select the Inspection & Rework Stations tab.
2. To pass failed panels downstream, select the Pass Failed Boards Downstream check box.
If this check box is selected and a board fails inspection, no operator intervention is required;
the board is automatically released to the downstream conveyor with a “bad board” signal.
Typically, you would select this option if the board-handling for the rework solution is automatic
or semi-automatic; in this case, the “good board” or “bad board” signal determines the routing of
the board.
3. To hold a failed panel in the system and sound an alarm, clear the Pass Failed Panels
Downstream check box and select the Sound Alarm on Failure check box. The Sound Alarm
on Failure option is enabled only if the Pass Failed Boards Downstream option is not selected.
When the Sound Alarm option is used and a board fails inspection, the red light on the signal
tower turns on and an alarm sounds to indicate that the board inside the QX Series machine has
failed and that operator intervention is required. The system waits for the operator to press the
Reset/Start button on the QX Series machine to acknowledge that the board has failed and
should be released. When the operator presses Start, the light and alarm turn off and the board
is released when the downstream conveyor is ready to receive it.
If the Sound Alarm on Failure option is not selected, the panel is held and the amber light
flashes, but no audio indication is given.
4. Click OK.

22 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Setting Responses to Events

Setting Responses to Events

Using the system Properties, you can configure specific system and hardware related events and
specify how you want the system to respond when these event(s) occur.

You can trigger responses such as turning on/off a light or sounding a horn whenever a specific
event occurs.

Configuring Responses to System Events

You can configure the QX Series System to perform an action when key system events occur. For
example, you can have the system turn on an alarm when an SPC alarm event occurs.

➢ To add events and responses

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then select the Inspection & Rework
Stations tab.

2. In the System Event Settings area, click Set system events.

The System Event Settings dialog box opens.
3. Right-click System Event Group in the tree view, point to Add Event, and then select an event
to add.
● SPC Alarm 1: Activates a response when a high-priority SPC alarm event occurs.
● SPC Alarm 2: Activates a response when a medium-priority SPC alarm event occurs.
● SPC Alarm 3: Activates a response when a low-priority SPC alarm event occurs.
4. Right-click the event in the tree view, point to Add Response, and then select a response to add.
● Alarms Response: To turn on/turn off a pole light or horn. (The flash response is not
implemented)
● Pause Response: To pause the machine when an SPC alarm event occurs.
5. Select the response in the tree view and specify the details of the response on the right side of
the dialog box.
6. Click OK.

➢ To delete events or responses

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then select the Inspection & Rework
Stations tab.

2. In the System Event Settings area, click Set system events.

The System Event Settings dialog box opens.
3. Right-click the event or response you want to delete and click Delete Event or Delete
Response.

4. Click OK.

CyberOptics Corporation 23
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Configuring Alarm Patterns for Hardware Events

You can configure the QX Series System to perform an action when a pre-defined hardware event
occurs. For example, you can have the system turn on the amber light when a panel fails to arrive
from upstream. The alarm responses can be re-configured at any time and shared between systems
by copying the AlarmPatterns.ini file located in the Config folder in your QX Series installation
directory.

Note: The following section is applicable only for the QX Series System.

➢ To configure alarm responses

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then select the Hardware tab.
2. In the Controller area, click Configure Alarm Patterns.
The Configure Alarm Patterns dialog box opens.
3. Select a specific event from the Alarm List for which you want to configure an alarm response.
4. Choose the type of response you want to set for the selected event by clicking On/Off under the
following alarm response types:
– Red Light
– Amber Light
– Green Light
– Blue Light
– Horn - You can define the duration of the horn by entering the Horn On Time and Horn Off
Time in seconds.

5. Click Apply.
6. Select another event from the Alarm List for which you want to configure an alarm response or
click OK to close the dialog box.

24 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Setting Responses to Events

Scanning images from right to left

This is a production line requirement for scanning images from right to left.

When the images are scanned from right to left,

● the board is transferred from right to left,
● the conveyor then moves the board from right to left and scans the image when the board moves.
● the board moves from right to left and the board is ejected out of machine from the left side.
● the process is repeated for one cycle and the board moves from right to left, which takes about
four seconds for completion.

This one-time scanning method improves the cycle time.

Note:

The QX100 and FlexHR are not supported and there is no plan for supporting these two types of
machines.

QX500-L and QX600-L are not supported in 6.5.

Prerequisites

Since, the position of the camera changes, the assembly used for Left to Right cannot be used for
Right to Left scanning without any changes. Ensure that you make the following changes before
using an assembly.
● Calibrate by using the left-to-right scanning method. The calibration file will be shared by right-
to-left inspection and left-to-right inspection.
● Adjust the trigger sensor position to the right side of the SIM and trigger sensor offset
● If the user wants to keep same board orientation, the user needs to rotate the panel 180 degree in
Assembly. Or else user needs to rotate the board physically 180 degree.
● Recapture the image.
● Restitch the newly captured image. If using manual stitching method, you must reteach the
stitcher, because of the change of the image position.
● Realign the panel due to the introduction of offset in the X direction (along camera).
● Ensure that the following PLC Firmware are installed
– QX500 System inspecting by using 8016538.obj file, upgrade the PLC Firmware version to
5.3.0.606.x onwards.

CyberOptics Corporation 25
Chapter 1: Getting Started

– QX500-D System inspecting by using 8017055.obj file, upgrade the PLC Firmware version to
5.3.0.426.0 onwards.

➢ Scanning images from right to left

1. Adjust the trigger sensor.
2. Navigate to Inspection Cell Editor > Test > Hardware.
3. Click Conveyor Settings.

26 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Setting Responses to Events

4. Select Conveyor right-to-left.

5. Click OK.

CyberOptics Corporation 27
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Setting Data Output Options

Use the Result Storage properties to specify how to save inspection results for the Rework station.

➢ To set the data output options

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties and select the Result Storage tab.
The tab contains three sections of options:
● Defect Review– these settings determine how much data to store for review using the
Rework station or Defect Review. You can also choose to save scaled-back versions of data for
passed boards (skeleton results).
● Save Options – these settings determine when to save images for review.
● Output Types – this section allows you to set up specific data formats that can be reviewed
using applications other than the QX Series System such as Process Insight, or other XML-
based or RS232-based applications.
For a description of each option, click Help in the System Properties tab, or see page 29
through page 31 for specific instructions for using the options.
2. Click Apply and OK to save your changes and close the window.

28 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Setting Data Output Options

Setting up XML or Process Insight/Process Monitor Data

Output
The QX Series System can output inspection results in XML format to a location that you specify.
This option is also used to output data for Process Insight version 3.0 or later. You can specify only
one type of XML data output.

➢ To set up data for XML output or for Process Insight

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then select the Result Storage tab.
2. In the Output Types section near the bottom of the tab, click Add.
The Output Configuration Wizard opens, showing the format types that can be used.
3. On the Choose Type page, select Standard XML/Process Insight and click Next.
4. On the Set Name page, enter a name for the format and click Next.
5. On the Defect Images page, select Export Defect Images and then click to navigate to and
select the folder where the images should be stored. If you are saving data for Process Insight,
you must select this option and designate the image folder.
6. Click Next.
7. On the File name and Location page, specify the File Name Format by clicking the element
names in the order you wish for them to appear in the filename.
● Each element can only be used one time, after which the button is disabled.
● Click Clear to clear the preview string and start over.
8. In the Directory Structure section, click to navigate to and select the root folder for the XML
data.
9. You can further define the folder structure by clicking Add. The first item you add creates a
subfolder under the root directory, the next folder creates a subfolder under the first subfolder, etc.
so that subsequent folders are appended to the folder path.
● Click Clear to clear the preview structure and start over.
10. Click Finish to create the output type and the subfolder.

Tips
● To change an output format: on the Result Storage tab, select the format from the list and click
Edit.
● To remove an output format: on the Result Storage tab, select the format from the list and click
Remove.

CyberOptics Corporation 29
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Setting up Custom Data Output

The QX Series System can output inspection results for use with a custom XSLT to a location that
you specify. You can specify any number of XSLT output types. The XSLT must exist and be in a
location accessible by the QX Series System; this file is not provided by CyberOptics. You must create
separate output formats for the Inspection Station and for Defect Review.

➢ To set up a custom XML output

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties and select the Result Storage tab.
2. In the Output Types section near the bottom of the tab, click Add.
The Output Configuration Wizard opens, showing the format types that can be used.
3. On the Choose Type page select Custom Output and click Next.
4. On the Set Name page, enter a name for the format and click Next.
5. On the Choose Scope page, select whether the data output is for Inspection results or for Defect
Review and click Next.
6. On the XSLT Location page, click and navigate to and select the XSLT file and click Next.
7. On the File name and Location page, specify the File Name Format by clicking the element
names in the order you wish for them to appear in the filename.
● Each element can only be used one time, after which the button is disabled.
● Click Clear to clear the preview string and start over.
8. Click Finish to create the output type and the subdirectory.

Tips
● To change an output format: on the Result Storage tab, select the format from the list and click
Edit.
● To remove an output format: on the Result Storage tab, select the format from the list and click
Remove.

30 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Setting Data Output Options

Setting up RS232 Data Output

The QX Series System can output system events in RS232 format to the COM port.

➢ To set up RS232 data output

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties and select the Result Storage tab.
2. On the Output Types section near the bottom of the tab, click Add.
The Output Configuration Wizard opens, showing the format types that can be used.
3. On the Choose Type page select RS232 Event Log and click Next.
4. On the Set Name page, enter a name for the format and click Next.
5. In the Events section, select the events to include in the RS 232 data.
6. In the Destination section, select the COM port to use, and set the baud rate. To log the
information to a CSV file, enter the file name.

i Note: The QX Series System COM port parameters are: even parity, one stop bit, and 7 data bits.

7. Click Finish to complete the setup and close the Output Configuration Wizard.

Tips
● To change an output format: on the Result Storage tab, select the format from the list and click
Edit.
● To remove an output format: on the Result Storage tab, select the format from the list and click
Remove.

CyberOptics Corporation 31
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Setting General Barcode Properties

Use the Barcode properties to customize how the QX Series System reads barcodes on boards. The
General properties on the Barcode tab are used to read barcodes from panels to include the
information in the result data.

➢ To set up general barcode properties

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then select the Barcode tab.
2. In the General section, select options for using barcodes:
● Use Grayscale for Decoding: By default, the system reads barcodes using color images. If
the system does not read the barcode correctly, select this option to convert the barcode to
grayscale images. The conversion can increase inspection time slightly.
● Grayscale image generated by: Select a single channel option from the list to improve the
quality of the converted color images.
● Invert Color for Second Try: Select this option to scan the barcode a second time if it fails,
using inverted color values on the second pass.
Note: Use Grayscale for Decoding, Grayscale image generated by and Invert Color for Second
Try are now moved into the barcode template properties. When using an v6.3 Release or prior
assembly, once the software is upgraded to v6.3.1 and above Releases, all the settings in the
System Properties are automatically copied into the barcode template.
● Force Barcodes to be Upper Case: The barcode reader in the QX Series machine always
scans the barcodes as uppercase letters. Select this option to convert the barcodes scanned
with a handheld barcode reader to uppercase letters.
● Read-On-The-Fly: Select this option to read the barcode without stopping. By default, this
option is turned on and helps reduce cycle time.
If you clear this option, the board stops and the system attempts to read the barcode 3 times.
If the system cannot read the barcode even at the third attempt, it proceeds with no barcode
information. This increases the cycle time but enhances reliability.
● Barcode Mandatory: Select this option to force the reworker to enter a barcode before
reworking a panel. (If the QX Series machine has successfully scanned a barcode in the
Inspection Station, the reworker does not have to re-enter the barcode.) If mandatory barcodes
are required, select whether to have the reworker or inspection operator enter the barcode.
Note: Barcode pattern is defined to validate the barcode read with camera. If the barcode read
does not match the pattern, then it is considered invalid and a dialog box appears to allow the
rework/operator to edit the barcode.
● Relay Barcode to COM 2 on Commit: Select this option to relay the mandatory barcode
entered by the reworker or operator to COM port 2 after the reworker or operator commits the
results. This allows external systems to receive the barcode for a given board.
● Sound alarm on barcode failure: Select this option to trigger an alarm whenever a barcode
failure occurs.
● Concatenate all barcode into the panel barcode: Select this option to concatenate all
barcodes into the panel barcode.
● Display panel barcode for training sets: Select this option to view the barcode information
of the panel image in the Unit Template Editor. The barcode information is displayed
preceding the Details Pane.
3. In the Filter Option list, select one of the following filters to apply to the barcode. As you specify
filter options, the Filtered box in the Example section shows the effects of your selections.

32 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Setting General Barcode Properties

● No Filter: The remainder of the filter options are unavailable, and all barcode characters are
included.
● Skip Start: The system skips the first n characters before starting to read the barcode. If you
also select a maximum number of characters to include, the system will skip the designated
number of characters at the start of the barcode, count forward the maximum number of
characters to include, and then stop.
● Skip End: The system skips the last n characters before starting to read the barcode. If you
also select a maximum number of characters to include, the system will skip the designated
number of characters at the end of the barcode, count backward the maximum number of
characters to include, and then stop.
4. If you selected either Skip Start or Skip End in the Filter Option list, do the following:
● To skip characters at the beginning or end of the barcode, enter the Number of Characters
to Skip.
● To limit the number of characters in the barcode, select the Limit Number of Characters to
Include check box and enter the maximum number of characters to include in the string.

5. Click OK.

CyberOptics Corporation 33
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Loading Assemblies by Barcode

The QX Series System can be set up to receive a panel barcode from an in-line barcode reader and
load the assembly file for the panel without operator intervention. This option requires:
● A barcode reader installed outside the QX Series machine
● Hardware SMEMA controller hardware and software setup
● Setting up the Load Assembly by Barcode option
● Mapping barcodes to QX Series assembly files

Contact CyberOptics for more information about the hardware required for this option.

i Note: This option is not intended for use with a hand held barcode reader.

➢ To set the hardware properties

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then select the Hardware tab.
2. In the Serial Ports section, select options for using barcodes. Use the WIndows Device Manager
to see a list of the available COM ports.
● Barcode Reader: Select the COM port used for the external in-line barcode reader
(typically COM2).
● Inspection SMEMA: Select the COM port used for SMEMA control. When a port is selected,
the system will monitor the port for a Board Available signal from the upstream conveyor.
– Upstream BA (load assembly): Select this option to load the assembly file at the
Inspection station that correlates to the barcode read when the Board Available signal is
detected.

Note: Barcodes must be mapped to assembly names from within the Barcode tab as described in
i To map barcodes to assembly names on page 36.

● Rework SMEMA: Select the COM port used for SMEMA control. When a port is selected,
the system will monitor the port for a Board Available signal coming from a third-party
repair table.
– Upstream BA (load results): Select this option to load the results file at the Rework
station that correlates to the barcode read when the Board Available signal is received
from the repair table.
– Unload: Select this option to have the Rework station monitor the reset signal from the
repair station. The reset signal indicates that the operator removed the panel from the
conveyor. When the reset signal is detected, the Rework station will unload the results for
that panel.
– Downstream BA: Select this option to have the Rework station send a Board Available
signal downstream, which means that the repair is complete and the panel is ready to exit
to the repair table. The system will wait for a Not Busy SMEMA signal from the repair
table to release the panel.

34 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Loading Assemblies by Barcode

➢ To set the barcode properties

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then select the Barcode tab.
2. In the Load Assembly by Barcode section, select options for using barcodes:
● Enabled: Select to use the load the assembly by barcode function.
● Fixed-width Line: Select this option if you will be inspecting panels of the same width.
When selected, the conveyor auto-width adjustment is disabled.
● Auto-load Top/Bottom Side: Select to load the assembly files for both the top and the
bottom side of the assembly into memory, and to open the assembly which correlates to the
barcode read.
● Cache Assemblies at Inspection Station: Select to keep both the top and bottom
assemblies open during inspection, regardless of which side is being inspected.
● Auto-load product variants: Select to provide a list of the variants for the assembly from
which to choose when the assembly file opens for inspection. This applies only when
Assembly Variants have already been created for the assembly.
● Barcode to assembly table: Select this check box to create a cross-reference table that
correlates barcodes to panel assemblies.
● Edit table: Click to open the Barcode to Assembly Name Manager to map barcodes to
assembly files. This step is mandatory as the QX Series software will not recognize the raw
barcodes alone. (See To map barcodes to assembly names on page 36.)
3. In the Filter(s) section, select the filtering options to apply to the barcode. As you specify filter
options, the Filtered box in the Example section shows the effects of your selections.
● Filter refers to: Select whether the filter is used to describe the product code or the top/
bottom side.
● Filter Option
– No Filter: The remainder of the filter options are unavailable, and all barcode characters
are included.
– Skip Start: The system skips the first n characters before starting to read the barcode. If
you also select a maximum number of characters to include, the system will skip the
designated number of characters at the start of the barcode, count forward the maximum
number of characters to include, and then stop.
– Skip End: The system skips the last n characters before starting to read the barcode. If
you also select a maximum number of characters to include, the system will skip the
designated number of characters at the end of the barcode, count backward the maximum
number of characters to include, and then stop.
4. If you selected either Skip Start or Skip End in the Filter Option list, do the following:
● To skip characters at the beginning or end of the barcode, enter the Number of Characters
to Skip.
● To limit the number of characters in the barcode, select the Limit Number of Characters to
Include check box and enter the maximum number of characters to include in the string.

5. Click OK.

CyberOptics Corporation 35
Chapter 1: Getting Started

➢ To map barcodes to assembly names

1. Set up the hardware and barcode properties as described above.
2. Click New.
3. In the Details dialog box, in the Product section:
● Enter the assembly barcode in the Code field.
● In the Assembly field, click and navigate to the assembly file that correlates to the
barcode.
4. In the Variant section:
● Enter the variant barcode in the Code field (if applicable).
● In the Variant field, click and select the variant file that correlates to the barcode.
5. In the Top/Bottom section, enter the code that designates whether the assembly file is for the Top
or Bottom of the panel.
6. Click OK.

Barcode-to-assembly name mappings are saved in a text file in the BarcodeToAssembly folder
located in the QX Series directory. A backup copy is also saved, which can be restored if the original
file is lost.

36 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Setting up Dual – Stage Rework Stations

Setting up Dual – Stage Rework Stations

If you have a separate Repair station, you can set up the QX Series System so that the review and
repair operations are done in separate stages. In the first stage, an operator reviews defects found
during inspection and determines whether they are considered defects and classifies them
accordingly. All defects that the reviewer agrees are genuine defects are passed to the Repair station,
any defects that the reviewer disagrees with are deleted. In the second stage, only actual defects are
viewed on the Repair station.

May be on the same system or on separate systems

Inspection Review Repair

(Stage 1) (Stage 2)

Inspection Station Rework Station

➢ To set up results folders

The Inspection and Rework stations must share the same results folder. When QX Series software is
installed on the Inspection station, the FullResults folder is created in the QX Series installation
directory.
● On the Review and Repair stations, create shortcuts to the FullResults folder present in the QX
Series directory on the Inspection station.

➢ To set system properties

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties and select the Inspection & Rework Stations tab.
2. In the Rework section, in the Configuration field, select the type of station:
● For the first stage Review station select Stage 1: Review for repair station. This sets up the
current station as a Review station where defects can be evaluated.
– On the Review station, all defects are listed in the Panel Selection window with reviewed
results indicated by a check mark. All unreviewed results can be viewed using Defect
Review.
– When you commit results in Defect Review, all defects reviewed that are identified as
disagreed are deleted from the system.
– Only results that the reviewer agrees are defects are viewable on the Repair station.
● For an offline Repair station select Stage 2: Offline repair station. This sets up the current
station as a Repair station, which will only show results designated as genuine defects by the
Review station operator.
– On the Repair station, all defects that have been reviewed and identified as defects
(agreed) are listed in the Panel Selection window.
– When you commit results in Defect Review, the full results are deleted from the system.
– For an offline Repair station, remove the rework categories and enter names that apply for
repair, such as Completed.
3. Select other properties in the General and Rework sections to customize your setup. Click Help
in the System Properties dialog box for a description of each field.

CyberOptics Corporation 37
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Defect Review Settings

The Inspection & Rework Stations tab in system Properties contains options that affect Defect
Review operation. This section describes some commonly-used options.

Automatically Load Results

Use the Inspection and Rework Stations properties to set up your inspection process to load results
automatically into Offline Defect Review for the operator to review. When selected, the results are
loaded every five seconds. The operator can use the keyboard Pause button to stop or start result
automatically loading.

➢ To automatically load results in Offline Defect Review

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties and select the Inspection & Rework Stations
tab.
2. In the Rework section, select Automatically load result.
3. Click OK.

Showing/Hiding Child Tasks

The option “use Is a component flag” is used to turn on/off child tasks. When checked (default
setting) child tasks are not shown, which reduces the amount of data shown in the results window.
To show all tasks, clear the checkmark.

To allow child tasks to be toggled on and off within the Defect Review application, clear this
checkbox

➢ To allow child tasks to be toggled on and off

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties and select the Inspection & Rework Stations
tab.
2. In the Rework section, clear the Use Is a component flag check box.
3. Click OK.

Showing Agree All Buttons

Agree All and Disagree All buttons categorize all uncategorized defects in the current defect list as
failed (agree) or passed (disagree). By default, these buttons do not appear, but you can turn them
on using system Properties.

➢ To show Agree All and Disagree All buttons

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties and select the Inspection & Rework Stations
tab.
2. In the Rework section, select Show Agree All.
3. In the Show If More than n Failures box, specify the number of failures allowed on a board
before the Agree All and Disagree All buttons appear.
4. Click OK.

38 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Defect Review Settings

Showing Reference Image

Use the Inspection & Rework Stations properties to display a full panel image in the Rework Station
instead of reference patches. After you select this option in system Properties, you must manually
save the panel image at the following location: <QX500 installation directory>\Images\Reference
Images\<Assembly Library>. Make sure that the panel image name is the same as the selected
assembly name.

If this option is turned off or the QX Series System fails to locate the panel image, only reference
patches will be displayed in the Rework Station.

➢ To show reference image

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then click the Inspection & Rework
Stations tab.

2. In the Rework section, select the Show reference image check box.
3. Click OK.

Changing settings for Japanese Localization

Use the following procedure to set the QX Series System display to Japanese language. To set the
option, do the following:

Prerequisites
● Ensure Asian Languages is installed on the OS before you change the settings for Japanese
language.
For more information on installing the asian languages, see Installing Asian Languages on page
40.
1. In Control Panel, click Regional and Language Options.
2. From the Current format list, choose Japanese (Japan).
Note: If Japanese is not listed, then CyberOptics recommends that, you install Asian Languages
on the OS.
3. Click Location tab.
4. From the Current location list, select Japan.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click Advanced tab.
7. From the Current system locale list, choose Japanese (Japan).
8. Click Ok.
Note: You require administrator rights to change this settings. Restart the system for changes to
take effect.

CyberOptics Corporation 39
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Installing Asian Languages

To install the Asian Languages, do the following:
1. Select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Regional and Language Options.
2. Click Languages tab.
3. Select Install files for East Asian languages.
4. Click Apply.
5. Insert the Windows XP Professional x64 Edition CD-Rom.
6. Click OK.

40 QX Series System Software User Guide

 2 Basic Programming Steps

QX Series System Basic Programming Flowchart 42

Files Needed for Programming 44

Create the Assembly 45

Stitch the Image 46

Import CAD Data 47

Import CAD and BOM Data 48

Import SRFF Data 50

Panelize Assembly 51

Define Fiducials 52

Define Components Using Component Library 54

Creating a new component in the component library 64

Importing component from the default Component Library 57

Add Composite Tasks 60

Mark Component Templates Defined 62

Final Steps 63

CyberOptics Corporation
Chapter 2: Basic Programming Steps

QX Series System Basic Programming

Flowchart
To inspect boards in the QX Series System, you must program an assembly for each board type.
This chapter describes the basic steps required to program a panel. The QX Series System software
contains many advanced features that are described in subsequent chapters.

The following flowchart illustrates the old method of programming the QX Series System.

Set up the
Stitch
hardware
the assembly

On the QX Create new

Import CAD
Series assembly
System

Panelize
Capture
Assembly
image data

Define
components
using library

Define No Yes
Is the component Refine layer settings Refine task icon
fiducials
found in library? of components

Add pin tasks Save the model Build the

model Refine search
using library Add text tasks & template area & tolerances

Add missing
components Refine search
and tasks from Define task icon area & tolerances
library

Define and teach missing

components
Save the model
Build the model
& template

On the QX Series
System

Train Assembly Debug Synchronize assembly

Assembly and release to
production

42 QX Series System Software User Guide

 QX Series System Basic Programming Flowchart

The following flowchart illustrates the new method of programming the QX Series System.

Import AOI
SRFF

Open Assembly
Editor

Edit image
position

Capture image
data
You need to switch on Auto
Stitch in Assembly
Properties to bypass manual
stitching step
Import CAD

Panelize
Assembly

Teach fiducial

Import component from

Cyber Library

Edit Layers and define Components that does not

components for exist in the library, follow the
components that does not step, “Define and teach
exit in the library missing components” from
the old flow chart

Collect first
example

Auto update to Synchronize

collect more the library
examples

CyberOptics Corporation 43
Chapter 2: Basic Programming Steps

Files Needed for Programming

When you create assemblies and capture images on the QX Series System, the system saves the
assembly files to the C:\QX500\Assemblies folder and you save the images to the
C:\QX500\Images folder.

For most efficient programming, you should have the CAD data for the panel that contains the
information listed below for each component on the panel. Copy the CAD data to the
C:\QX500\CAD folder.
● Reference designator
● Part type
● X coordinate
● Y coordinate
● Angle

Optional
● Side (top/bottom)
● Part number

CyberOptics default component library

The QX Series System software includes cyberoptics default component library, which is located at
collections/CyberLibrary_SAM and collections/CyberLibrary_AI2. These two libraries include
the composite template for component and package. The package in turn includes the component
geometry, template, models template and model libraries along with the model geometry. You can
use the default component library to quickly program standard parts.

More detailed information about programming parts without using the library is provided in the
subsequent chapters.

44 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Create the Assembly

Create the Assembly

First create the assembly and capture images of five to ten boards that will be inspected. After the
images are captured, you can move to an offline programming station to program the assembly,
freeing up the QX Series System for inspections.

Note: These instructions provide basic steps for creating an assembly. For detailed information about
i working with assemblies, see Creating Assemblies on page 65.

1. Calibrate the system.

See Calibrating the QX Series System on page 321.
2. Adjust the conveyor width.
See Adjusting Conveyor Width on page 310.
3. Create a new assembly.
a. In the Assembly Editor, select File > Open Assembly (or click Open Assembly on the
Launch Pad.)
b. In the Assembly Selector dialog box navigate to the Library in which to store the assembly
and click New.
c. Type a name for the new assembly and click Open.
4. The Active Collection dialog box appears. Select an existing collection from the list or click
New and type a name for the new active collection. Then, click OK.
5. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly > Edit Image Positions.
6. In the Image Position Editor, resize the board outline to match the size of the panel. This can be
adjusted after capturing an image.
7. Capture a panel image.
a. In the Image Position Editor, select Image > Capture Live Image. If necessary, adjust the panel
size outline.
b. Place the panel on the conveyor from right side, and press the Reset/Start button.
c. After the image appears, Save the image to the QX500:\Images folder.
d. Remove panel from conveyor.
8. Repeat Step 7 for 5-10 panels.

CyberOptics Corporation 45
Chapter 2: Basic Programming Steps

Stitch the Image

CyberOptics recommends that you do not stitch images unless auto stitching fails for a particular
assembly. For more detailed information about auto stitching, see Auto stitching on page 79.

In special cases where stitching the image is recommended, see Stitch patches manually on page 80.

46 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Import CAD Data

Import CAD Data

Note: These instructions provide basic steps for importing CAD data. For detailed information
i about using and importing CAD data, see Importing CAD Data on page 100.

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly>Import CAD.

Follow the instructions in the CAD Import Wizard; click Help in the wizard for information
about each step.
2. After importing the CAD data, align the CAD data frame (root task) to the image.
a. Right-click the CAD data frame and select Task properties.
b. Set the Task Angle to rotate the CAD data frame to the proper orientation.
c. Use the move tool to move the entire frame as necessary to align the CAD fiducials
with the image fiducials.

Caution: Make sure that you move the entire frame (root task) and not individual fiducials or
components.

CyberOptics Corporation 47
Chapter 2: Basic Programming Steps

Import CAD and BOM Data

Note: These instructions provide basic steps for importing CAD data. For detailed information
i about using and importing CAD data, see Importing CAD and BOM Data on page 106.

Importing CAD
1. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly>Import CAD+BOM.
2. From Merge CAD data with BOMs dialog, click Load CAD.
3. In the File name field, click and choose a CAD file.
4. From select the correct data sheet here list, choose a CAD tab.
Note: This step is optional. The number of tabs that appear in the list depends on the number of
tabs present in the Excel sheet. However, if the CAD is in the .txt format, then step 4 is not
applicable.
5. Set the CAD data to the following.
– From Ref. Designator list, choose a reference designator.
– From X list, choose a X coordinate.
– From Y list, choose a Y coordinate.
– From Rotation list, choose a rotation.
– From Side list, choose a side. This is an optional field.
– Enter the Starting line. The default value is 1. This is an optional field.
– Enter the End line. The default value is 0. This is an optional field.
6. Select Ignore errors check box to ignore certain error lines. By default, the check box is selected.
Note: If the Ignore error check box is not selected, then you must specify the Starting line and
Ending line.
7. Click Preview.
The customized CAD data appears.
8. Click OK.
The CAD data appears in the CAD data window validating that the CAD is loaded.

Importing BOM
1. From Merge CAD data with BOMs dialog, click Load BOM(s).
2. In the File name field, click and choose a BOM file.
3. Set the BOM data to the following.
– From Ref. Designator list, choose a reference designator.
– From Part number list, choose a part number.
– From Part type list, choose a part type.
4. Select Ignore errors check box to ignore certain error lines. By default, the check box is selected.
Note: If the Ignore error check box is not selected, then you must specify the Starting line and
Ending line.
5. Click OK.
The BOM data is displayed in the BOM (variant) list window.

48 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Import CAD and BOM Data

6. Click Preview.
7. Repeat step 1 to 6 to import the other BOMs.
8. Select a BOM and click View, to view the BOM data. This step is optional.
9. Click Build, to view the build results.
10. Click Start wizard.
Follow the instructions in the CAD Import Wizard; click Help in the wizard for information
about each step.
11. After importing the CAD and BOM data, align the CAD and BOM data frame (root task) to the
image.
a. Right-click the CAD and BOM data frame and select Task properties.
b. Set the Task Angle to rotate the CAD and BOM data frame to the proper orientation.
c. Use the move tool to move the entire frame as necessary to align the CAD and BOM
fiducials with the image fiducials.

Caution: Make sure that you move the entire frame (root task) and not individual fiducials or
components.

CyberOptics Corporation 49
Chapter 2: Basic Programming Steps

Import SRFF Data

Note: These instructions provide basic steps for importing SRFF data. For detailed information
i about using and importing SRFF data, see Importing SRFF Data on page 108.

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly >Import SRF.

Follow the instructions in the SRF Import Wizard; click Help in the wizard for information
about each step.
2. After importing the SRFF data, align the SRFF data frame (root task) to the image.
a. Right-click the SRF data frame and select Task properties.
b. Set the Task Angle to rotate the SRFF data frame to the proper orientation.
c. Use the move tool to move the entire frame as necessary to align the SRFF fiducials
with the image fiducials.

Caution: Make sure that you move the entire frame (root task) and not individual fiducials or
components.

50 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Panelize Assembly

Panelize Assembly
When the panel contains multiple boards of the same type, group all of the components for one
board and duplicate them across the entire panel. This maintains the links between model and
template definitions for each component.
1. In the Assembly Editor, select all components within the board frame.
2. Select Grouping> Panelize Board.
3. In the Panelize Board dialog box, enter the number of columns and rows.
The effects of your settings are shown in the window on the right.
4. Enter the X and Y pitch values to define the space between boards.
5. Select the direction in which to duplicate the board.
6. Rotate as necessary.
7. Make sure that you select Retain CAD coordinates of sub-tasks.
8. Click OK.
9. In the upper toolbar, check the boxes for Train Assembly and Save Results.
10. Save the Assembly.

CyberOptics Corporation 51
Chapter 2: Basic Programming Steps

Define Fiducials

Note: These instructions provide basic steps for defining fiducials. For detailed information about
i fiducials, see Defining Fiducials on page 125.

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Image> Load Sequence> and either load a Sequence File or
Selected Images.
2. Select Collect > Start. The system populates the Unit Template editor with image patches from all
of the loaded images.
3. Double-click a fiducial in the image to open the Unit Template editor.
4. In the Unit Template Editor, select Training Set > Load Production Set.
5. In the Unit Template Editor, click and draw a square around the fiducial.
6. Double-click the task (blue box) and set the dimensions to form a square.
7. Click the Resize button to resize the search and tolerance area (pink outer box & brown
inner box) if necessary to include the task icon.
8. Click the Build button. All fiducials from all the images appear in the Training Set pane
on the right.
9. Click Auto-Seed.
The Auto-seeding settings dialog box opens.
10. Set the parameters as described in To automatically seed a fiducial model on page 132.
11. Save and Exit Unit Template Editor.

52 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Define Fiducials

Hints

Right-click the fiducial task and select Edit Template properties to set these parameters:
● Search Angles: 1-way
● Search Angle +/-: Adjust the rotational position from nominal within which the system searches
for the feature. Since fiducials are accurately placed on the board, you would typically set this
angle to 2.00 or 3.00 for square fiducials, or +/- to 0.00 for round fiducials.
● Tolerance probability threshold: 1e-30.
● Tolerance Angle +/-: 5
● Out of Position: Off

To have the system automatically re-inspect the panel (one time) after a panel-level fiducial failure:
1. In the Launch Pad, click System Properties.
2. Select the Inspection & Rework Stations tab.
3. In the middle of the dialog box, select Reinspect fiducial failures.

CyberOptics Corporation 53
Chapter 2: Basic Programming Steps

Define Components Using Component

Library
During the CAD import process, components which are already defined in the component library
are automatically imported. And, the undefined components are shown with a default task icon
which consists of an orange outline and a cyan body task icon with default size.

Note: These instructions provide basic steps for defining components. For detailed information
i about creating and defining components, see Programming Components on page 147.

1. In the Assembly Editor, right-click the component you want to define, and then click Edit
Location Properties.

2. In the Location Properties dialog box, click next to Component.

3. In the Component Library dialog box, click New.
4. Type a name for the component in the New component name box.
5. Select either of the following options:
a. Base on existing package type
Click Select package type to choose an existing package type from the list, and then click
OK.
- or -
b. Base on new package type
Type a name for the package in the New package type name box.
6. Click OK. For information on adding tasks for specific parts, see Add Composite Tasks on page
60.

➢ If parts fail for position errors …

Review the failure in the Details Pane of the Assembly Editor (lower right corner). If the example
can be used for the model:
● Click the Add to Model button to add the example to the model, if it is acceptable as-is.
● Adjust the red part outline to its actual location if necessary, then add the example to the model.
● Click the Edit Template button to edit the Unit Template and adjust the properties to
accommodate the part (such as search areas, tolerances, etc.) then add the example to the model.
Any changes you make will be applied to the master in the library.

➢ If parts fail as not found …

Review the failure in the Details Pane of the Assembly Editor (lower right corner). If the example
can be used for the model:
● Click the Add to Model button to add the example to the model, if it is acceptable as-is.
● Click the Edit Model button to add more examples to the model. Any changes you make
will be applied to the master in the library.

54 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Define Components Using Component Library

➢ If parts fail for not enough examples …

1. Click the Edit Template button to open the Unit Template for the part.

2. Open a training set for the model, or create a new training set.
3. Click Auto-Seed.
The Auto-seeding settings dialog box opens.
4. Set the parameters as described in To automatically seed a fiducial model on page 132.
5. Click OK to begin the auto-seed process. When complete, the message “Model population
successful” is displayed.
6. Click the Save and Exit button.

➢ If parts exist that do not fit an existing library definition …

1. Click the Edit Template button to adjust the task and or search areas to accommodate the
part.
● Click and draw a new task around the part.
● Resize the Search and Tolerance area (pink outer box & brown inner box) if necessary
to encompass the task icon.
2. Click the Build button. The Training Set pane on the right is populated with examples of
the part from the images loaded.
3. Populate the model with examples, you need a minimum of 5 examples to complete the
assembly:
● Select all “good” examples and add them to the model.
● Select an example in the Training Set pane and review its appearance in the Details pane
(lower left). If acceptable, add the example to the model.
4. Click Inspect in the Training Set pane. Continue to add good examples to the model. Eventually,
the model should have 50 - 100 examples. You can add examples during initial programming or
during final training and debug on the system.

CyberOptics Corporation 55
Chapter 2: Basic Programming Steps

Hints
● When teaching new components without using a library template, the Search and Tolerance areas
will typically need to be adjusted for each component type in order to compensate for variability
in placement. However, the size of the search area can impact both inspection time and accuracy.
Make the search area slightly bigger than the task icon.
● Search Area angle (Angle +/-): This angle defines the rotational position from nominal within
which the system searches for the feature. For features other than fiducials, the search angle
defaults to 12.00. Increasing the search area angle does increase the inspection time. This
parameter is found in the Unit Template properties.
● If the Add to Model button is greyed out in the Unit Template editor, click Inspect in the
Main View pane (left side of the window).
● When you adjust the task area in the Model editor, you may need to load the training set again
(Unit Template Editor: Training Set> Load Production Training Set).
● Set up separate tasks for body and text inspections by creating a composite task. See Adding
Tasks Manually on page 222 for information about adding text tasks.
● For post-reflow inspections of solder joints, use pin inspections to check solder joints as
described in Add Pin Tasks on page 60.
● For components with more than two leads such as QFPs, SOTs, SOICs, etc. add active areas to
help define the component location. See Defining Active Areas for Component Models on page
176.

56 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Importing component from the default Component Library

Importing component from the default

Component Library
You can import the components from the default library for components that are not found in the
assembly external library.

Prerequisites
● Use the default library to import a component from the default component library. For creating a
new component and package, see Creating a new component in the component library on page
64.
● Ensure that the images are loaded and all locators must pass.

➢ Importing component from the default component library

1. To update the templates from collection, from the Assembly Editor File menu, click Assembly >
Update Templates from Collection.

2. In the search field, type the template you want to search and choose,
– All—locates all the components synchronized with the assembly external library.
– Synchronised—locates only the synchronized components with the assembly external
library.
– Unsynchronised—locates only the unsynchronized components with the assembly
external library.
– Updated—locates the updated synchronized components with the assembly external
library.
– Not updated—locates the not updated synchronized components with the assembly
external library.
3. From the Available collections list, choose a library.
Note: The default value is AI2 library. The AI2 library is displayed in the available collection
only if the System has a valid AI2 license.
4. From the Package template column, choose a template.
5. Draw the component body size for the template by using the Task Icon toolsize.
In the Package Library dialog, the templates are listed based on the size (body width and height)
drawn.
6. To map the collection library package to the assembly package template, choose Mapping table
and select,
– Part type to Part Type for mapping package to package
– Part number to Part Type for mapping component to package.
7. Choose Load From.
8. The Package Library dialog displays all the short listed template based on the components body
width and height.
9. Choose and double-click a component.
The component geometry is displayed in the right-pane of the Update component(s) from
Collections dialog.

CyberOptics Corporation 57
Chapter 2: Basic Programming Steps

10. Resize the component by using the toolsize (Task Icon, Move, Resize, Zoom in and Zoom out) to
adjust the body to match the component
Or
11. Use the angle button to rotate the component. Each rotation step is +900 or -900.
12. Click OK to copy all layers from the selected template to the assembly template.

Note:
– The components are updated based on the layer relation between the package and
component.
– The Template name does not change once the template is updated.
– The Default library (Cyber Library) is applicable for SAM and AI2.
– You cannot link the Assembly to the default library. This feature is currently nonfunctional.
– The example is not displayed inside the model template.

58 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Auto collecting first batch of example(s)

Auto collecting first batch of example(s)

From the Assembly Editor dialog, select “Auto Collect First Batch of Example(s)” command for the
software to scan the assembly automatically to collect the first batch of examples when the model
does not have an example. You can then view and also align the displayed example image. In the
existing “train assembly” function, the QX Series software performs an inspection first and then
collects examples. The collected examples are the result of alignment. When the alignment results
are not good and the task locations are accurate, the user can then choose this function to train the
assembly. Once the examples are collected, a dialog appears to confirm the procedure to allow the
user to adjust the task alignment to make sure the first example image is properly cropped into the
model.

Procedure
1. Click Assembly > Auto Collect First Batch of Example(s).
2. In the Max number of examples model, specify the max number of examples for each model.
The default value is 1.
3. Click Ok. If user use Max number = 1, a confirmation dialog popup and allow user to adjust
task alignment model by model.
Note: When the specified max number of examples for each model is greater than 1, then the QX
Series software adds an example until the specified number of examples is collected. If the
current assembly does not contain enough examples of a model then the QX Series software will
automatically collect the maximum number of possible examples.

CyberOptics Corporation 59
Chapter 2: Basic Programming Steps

Add Composite Tasks

Composite tasks are multiple inspection tasks performed on a specific part. A composite task for an
SOIC, for example, could contain:
● Body task: to inspect for the part placement
● Pin task: to inspect for application of solder paste
● Gap tasks: to inspect for debris between pins
● Text task: to verify the correct part number

Use the Composite Template Editor to define and group multiple tasks for a given part.

Add Pin Tasks

Use pin tasks to inspect solder joints on post-flow assemblies. When you create pin tasks, you create
a composite template that contains both the component body and the individual pin tasks. See
Adding Tasks Manually on page 222 for details about adding pin tasks.
1. In the Assembly Editor, select Edit > Layers.
The Assembly Package Layers Setup dialog box opens.
2. In the Package list, select a package type that contains the component whose pins need to be
inspected.
3. In the Package Layers area, select Pin. Make sure that both Body and Pin are selected.
4. Click OK. The component now has at least two task outlines: the body task and the pin layout
task.
5. Double-click the composite task to open the Composite Template Editor.
6. Right-click the pin layout task and select Edit task properties.
7. In the template field of the Task Properties dialog box, click
8. Select Pin Layout in the Library field of the navigation dialog box.
9. Select the Pin Layout that applies to the component body and click Apply.
The pin layout appears in the Details pane in the lower portion of the editor.

i Note: Click to open the Details pane if it is not open already.

10. Click OK to close the Task properties dialog box.

11. Click to save the template and close the editor.

60 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Add Composite Tasks

Add Text Tasks

Use text tasks to ensure that the correct part is placed. Make sure that each model contains only one
line of text. See Adding Tasks for Text on page 229 for more details about text tasks.
1. In the Assembly Editor, select Edit> Layers.
The Assembly Package Layers Setup dialog box opens.
2. In the Package list, select a package type that contains the component whose text needs to be
inspected.
3. In the Package Layers area, select Text. Make sure that both Body and Text are selected.
4. Click OK. The component now has at least two task outlines: the body task and the text task.
5. Double-click the text task to open the unit template editor for the task.
6. Click the Text button and draw a task icon around the text to inspect.

7. Click the Build button to build the model and add examples as you would when defining
a component.
In the Unit Template Editor properties, these settings are useful for text tasks:
● Search angle: select 2-way.
● Test for polarity: select No when the text orientation does not matter, such as for resistors.
● Search angle +/-: 5
● Tolerance probability threshold: 1e-30.
● Tolerance angle: 10
● Out of position: turn this setting off since text can be printed anywhere on the part.

Add Missing Tasks

The general steps to add missing tasks are given below. For more detailed information about adding
tasks and using the Composite Template editor, see topics such as:
● Adding Single Tasks on page 228
● Adding Barcode Tasks on page 231
● Adding Skip Mark Tasks on page 233
1. In the Assembly Editor, double-click the CAD frame (root task) to open the Composite Template
Editor.
2. In the Composite Template Editor, select Insert>task type (task types are QFP pins, DIP Pins,
Grid Array, Text, Component Body, Miscellaneous Task, Component from Library). The
Composite Layout Tool window opens.
3. Zoom in on the part to add.
4. Select a package type, select a template, and type a Task name.
5. Specify the part dimensions using the available pin measurement tool.
6. Click OK.
7. Define the task as described in Define Components Using Component Library on page 54.

CyberOptics Corporation 61
Chapter 2: Basic Programming Steps

Mark Component Templates Defined

Check each component template and make sure that it is marked Defined. To do this:
1. In the Assembly Editor, select Templates in the library Find box.
2. Click . When ? is selected, only undefined templates are listed.
3. Open the first undefined template and press F11 (File > Flag as defined). This marks the
template as defined and loads the next template.
4. Continue to press F11 until all templates are marked as defined.
5. If you have defined composite templates (such as text tasks), open these individually and edit
the template properties to set the template as Defined.

62 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Fit Components to Layers

Fit Components to Layers

After all the composite templates are defined, use this option to ensure that the component library is
up-to-date and contains the most recent changes done in the assembly.

In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly > Fit Components to Layers to resize the composite
templates of all the components in the assembly and capture sample images of each component.
These image samples are then used to identify the component in the Component Library dialog
box.

Final Steps
1. Open the assembly on the QX Series System and train the tasks in the assembly. Use a set of
training images or issue the assembly to production to train the models using failure collection.
2. Debug the assembly by running production panels and checking for false calls. Refine the
models as needed.
3. When the assembly is ready for production, Synchronize it with the database (Assembly Editor:
File > Synchronize). Synchronizing the assembly adds all new models and templates to a system
repository for use on other assemblies and can also update existing models and templates.

CyberOptics Corporation 63
Chapter 2: Basic Programming Steps

Creating a new component in the

component library
Prior to QX Series software v6.4 Release, the components and packages are created by using the
export component and package function. However, the new components and packages that are
created cannot be used for the following reasons.
● When a PinLayout composite layer is exported as a unit template, pins are not exported
● No packages are exported into the library. In the exported component information, the package
type name is displayed. However, the package is not displayed in the current component library
● Models cannot be exported when exporting a package or component. When importing a
component, the task box size and the model geometry gets incorrectly displayed
● When exporting a package or component, all the templates and model names do not tally with
the exported package or component. The composite template cannot be used and the relationship
and linkages are broken
● The software crashes when using export package/component menu and thereby changing the
component type or package type

Hence, the solution is to create a Cyber default component library from the current customer library
by using the export package functions. Enabling this feature also improves the programming flow.

To create new package (Part type) and component (Part number) in the Cyber Library
(\\Collections\Cyber Library), Export Package & Component (Cyber Library) is now added in the
Composite Template Editor menu.

➢ Creating new component in the component library

1. From the Composite Template Editor file menu, click Export Package & Component (Cyber
Library).

2. In the New Package Type dialog, type a name for the new package type (Part Type).
Note: The Body, Pin, Text, and Polarity check boxes are disabled. You can edit the component
layers in Edit Layer dialog.
3. Enter a component name (Part number).
4. The inherited layers from the package are displayed in the Edit Layer dialog.
5. Import CAD from the Cyber Library when the layer relationship between the package and the
component are displayed in the edit layer dialog.
6. Click File > Export Component.
Note: In the Component Properties the exported component package name is similar to the
component name.

64 QX Series System Software User Guide

 3 Creating Assemblies

Assembly Data 66

Opening an Assembly 67

Capturing Image Data 71

Stitching the Image 78

Importing CAD Data 100

Importing CAD and BOM Data 106

Importing SRFF Data 108

Overview 102

Aligning the Root Task with the Panel Image 113

Panelizing a Board 115

Saving, Moving, and Deleting Assemblies 117

Creating a Variation of an Assembly 119

Componentizing an Assembly 121

Finding Tasks 123

CyberOptics Corporation
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

Assembly Data
After programming, assemblies contain all the information necessary to inspect a board. The
following figure shows the information contained in an assembly.

ASSEMBLY
Contains information about:
Image, root task, models, and templates

IMAGE
Contains information about:
Image position, board size, and
stitching

ROOT TASK
Contains information about:
X and Y coordinates and part
numbers for all tasks

Composite template Unit template Models

Models Unit templates

66 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Opening an Assembly

Opening an Assembly
An assembly is a collection of the image acquisition and stitching information, fiducial definitions,
inspection tasks, templates, and models needed to inspect a single, specific printed circuit board.

When you first create an assembly, the QX Series System software creates the files it needs to track
your project, similar to creating a blank document in a word processing program. After creating the
new assembly, you must program the assembly to add instances of template and related models for
each feature or part to be inspected.

➢ To create a new assembly

1. On the Launch Pad, click Open Assembly.
The Assembly Selector dialog box opens.

2. Select a Library from the list or click the New button to create a new library in which to
store the assembly.
a. In the New Library dialog box, enter a name for the Library.
b. Click OK to save the library and close the New Library dialog box.
3. In the Assemblies list, type over the NewAssembly text with the name of your assembly, such as
a product number.
4. Click Open in the Assembly Selector dialog box.
The Active Collection dialog box opens.
5. Select an existing collection from the Available Collection list or click New and type a name for
the new collection.
6. Click OK.
The Active Collection dialog box closes and the new assembly opens in the Assembly Editor.
Because the new assembly has not yet been programmed, no images appear in the Assembly
Editor panes.

CyberOptics Corporation 67
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

7. Click to save the assembly.

i Note: The assembly is not saved until you click the Save button.

The Assembly Editor is central to the programming of printed circuit boards in the QX Series
System. It is used to program new assemblies and debug existing assemblies. An assembly is a
collection of the image acquisition and stitching information, fiducial definitions, inspection tasks,
templates, and models needed to inspect a single, specific, printed circuit board.

➢ To open an existing assembly

You can open more than one assembly at a time.

1. Open an assembly in one of three ways:
● On the Launch Pad, click Open Assembly.
● In the Assembly Editor, select File > Open Assembly.
● In the System Manager, double-click an item in the Assemblies list.
2. In the Assembly Selector dialog box, select the library that contains the assembly to open.
3. Select the desired assembly.
4. Click Open.

68 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Loading Mounter Information from Assembly Editor

Loading Mounter Information from Assembly

Editor
Mounter information helps in identifying the point of failure on the placement machine, rectifying
the fault and reporting the feeder number and location. You can load mounter information through
the Assembly Editor or from the Inspection Station.

Note: For more information on loading mounter information from Inspection Station, refer to
i “Starting an Inspection by Opening an Assembly” section of the QX Series Inspection and Rework
User Guide.

➢ To load the mounter information

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties.
2. Select the Miscellaneous tab.
3. In the Component Mounter Information section, select the following options:
● Enable Mounter Info Support: Allows you to add mounter information for the loaded assembly.
● Enable Mounter File Update on Assembly Load: Allows you to override an existing mounter
data file with a new one. To enable this option, the Enable Mounter Info Support must be
selected.
Note: The Enable Mounter Info Support cannot be enabled if the Load Assembly by Barcode is
i selected, and vice versa.

4. Open an assembly. For more information on opening assemblies, see Opening an Assembly on
page 67.
5. In the Assembly Editor, select File > Load Mounter Data.
6. In the Open dialog box, select the mounter file you want to load.
7. Click Open.
A copy of the mounter data (.txt) file is loaded in your QX Series installation directory under
\QX500\MounterData\<Assembly Name>. The file will be renamed to match the assembly
name that it is associated with.
The MounterData folder is created when you load the mounter information for the first time
and the <Assembly Name> folder is created each time you open a different assembly and load
mounter data.
The mounter data file consists of rows with space delimited data in the following format:
Reference-Designator<SPC> Mounter<SPC>Feeder<SPC>Vendor
where <SPC>: Space Character and <Vendor> is an optional field.
Below is a sample mounter data file.

CyberOptics Corporation 69
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

70 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Capturing Image Data

Capturing Image Data

The QX Series System captures images on-the-fly using the Strobed Inspection Module (SIM). As
the panel moves along the conveyor, the cameras acquire images of the area, or tile, of the panel
within its field of view. The result of this image acquisition process is a mosaic image of the panel.

Camera Effective Field of View

320 mm x 33 mm

The distance between the cameras, and therefore the amount of overlap between camera fields of
view is fixed and cannot be changed. By default, the amount of overlap is the same between each
row.

To set the assembly properties so the cameras correctly acquire images, follow the procedures in
these topics:
● Define the Panel Size and Image Overlaps on page 72
● Capture Images on page 75
● Create Stitch patches manually on page 80

After the stitching task has been set up for an assembly, the image is automatically stitched each
time you load or capture an image in the Assembly Editor.

Notes:
i ● When you save an image, the image properties and stitching information are saved within the
assembly and also with the stored image.
● After you have set up the assembly to capture and stitch images, you can capture single images
to program or test the assembly. You can also capture sequences of images to inspect in the
Assembly Editor; this is useful for performing repeatability studies

CyberOptics Corporation 71
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

Define the Panel Size and Image Overlaps

When programming a new assembly, begin by capturing and saving images of the panel. The
information used to capture and stitch this initial image is stored with the assembly and is used
during production to capture images for inspection. For a new assembly, first define the image
positions by setting the dimensions of the board and the size of the row overlaps used to capture an
image of the board.

➢ To define image positions numerically

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly > Edit Image Positions.

2. The drop down list displays the model of the machine on which the board is inspected:QX500/
QX100/QX600/Flex HR/...
The system applies the default image overlap positions for the selected machine to the image
display.
3. Select Properties > Image.

72 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Capturing Image Data

4. In the Image Properties dialog box, enter the board dimensions and select a row overlap from a
set of predefined values by clicking on the previous or forward button.

● Width: the width of the board.

● Height: height of the board.
● Rows (mm): Rows overlap are a set of predefined values. You can select a Rows overlap value
by clicking on the previous or forward button.
For assemblies created by using earlier versions (prior to 6.1), the image overlap value is
automatically set to the nearest overlap, as shown in the following table.
5. Click OK to apply the properties and close the Image Properties dialog box.
The Image Positions Editor shows an outline of the board dimensions and the image tiling that
will be used to capture an image. Make sure that the board outline (displayed in green), fully
encompasses the entire board. You can adjust the board outline after capturing an image,
described later in this section.

CyberOptics Corporation 73
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

6. Click Apply to apply the image positions to the assembly and leave the Image Positions Editor
open.
During image capture, the system automatically selects only the number of cameras necessary
to capture the board image, based on the image positions you have defined.

➢ To adjust panel dimensions visually

After capturing an image you can adjust the panel dimensions in the Image Positions Editor.
Because the size of the area required to capture the board affects image acquisition time, avoid
including unnecessary areas. The green outline should be large enough to encompass all
components on the board, but should not include areas outside the board, such as the conveyor rails.

Typically, measurements should define the extent of the board, not the panel. However, if there are
multiple boards on the panel, you may have to include the panel extent in the measurements,
especially if this area contains fiducials.
1. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly > Edit Image Positions.
2. In the Image Positions Editor, do one of the following:
● Select File > Load Image and select a saved image to display.
● Select Image > Capture Live Image to capture a live image.
3. In the Image Positions Editor, select Properties > Tile Visibility to hide the tiles so you can clearly
see the boundary of the board.
4. Click the Resize Tool button, and then click and drag the green box to include the board.

5. Select Properties > Tile Visibility to turn the tile display back on.
6. Click Tile.
7. Select File > Save Image, and save the image in the desired location.

74 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Capturing Image Data

Capture Images
Capturing a Series of images provides board images with which to program an assembly. For best
results, capture images from 5-10 panels for initial training. You can either capture a sequence of
images automatically or capture and save images one at a time.

Save the original image used to create the stitching task to help you debug the image acquisition
process. You may update the stitching task against other images, but if the stitching task fails or
motion errors occur, it is sometimes useful to test the stitcher against the original, “golden” image to
make sure the stitching task still runs properly.
● If the stitching task runs properly on the saved image but not on newly captured images, the
hardware setup may need to be adjusted.
● If the stitching task does not run successfully on the saved image, the stitching task definition
may need to be changed.

➢ To capture an image sequence

Every time you capture an image sequence in an assembly, the QX Series System automatically
numbers the images in the image sequence file in sequential order, beginning with 1. If you start
another image sequence collection in the same assembly, the system overwrites the images from the
previous image sequence collection.
1. In the Assembly Editor, select Inspection Cell > Reset.
2. Select Image > Save Sequence.
3. Place the board on the conveyor through the opening on the right side, blocking the exit sensor.
4. Press the Reset/Start button on the QX Series machine.
The conveyor moves the board into the QX Series System, captures its image, and saves the image
to the location specified on the File Storage tab of the System Properties dialog box. The
following figure shows the default location for image files.

The system also creates an AssemblyName.seq file. This file is a text file with the names and
directory paths of the captured images.
5. Remove the board from the conveyor.
6. Repeat steps 3 - 5 until you have captured all your board images.
7. In the Assembly Editor, select Image > Stop Sequence.

CyberOptics Corporation 75
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

➢ To capture individual images

1. Set system to Inspect Mode.
2. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly>Edit Image Position.
3. In the Image Position Editor select Image>Capture Live Image.
4. Place panel on the conveyor from right side, press the Reset/Start button on the QX Series
System.
5. After the image appears Save the image to the C:\QX500\Images folder.
6. Remove the panel from the conveyor.
7. Repeat for 5-10 panels.

Creating an Image Sequence File (Optional)

An image sequence file is a text file containing the path name and the list of file names for the
images to inspect and the sequence in which to inspect them. If you capture a sequence of images
using the Save Sequence feature, the system automatically creates an image sequence file. You can
also, however, create or edit an image sequence file for data already stored in the system.

➢ To create an image sequence file

1. Open a text editor such as Windows® Notepad.
2. On the first line of the file, type the full path name for the folder where the image sequence file
will be stored.

3. Type the file names of the images to include in the image sequence, one file name on each
successive line in the file.
4. Save the file to the appropriate Images library with the extension .seq (for example,
Assembly_1.seq).
5. Close the text editor.

76 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Capturing Image Data

Loading Images into the Assembly Editor

You can load images to inspect as either a single image or as a set of multiple images. Loading
multiple images provides more potential examples for creating models.

➢ To load a single image

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Image > Load Stored Image.
The Open dialog box opens.
2. Select the library where your image sequence is stored.
3. Select the image file and click Open.

➢ To load an image sequence file

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Image > Load Sequence > Sequence File.
The Open dialog box opens.
2. Select the library where your image sequence is stored (SavedSeq).
3. Select the image sequence file and click Open.

➢ To load a selected set of images

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Image > Load Sequence > Selected Images.
2. Select the library where your images are stored.
3. Select the images to load from the list of images and click Open.

CyberOptics Corporation 77
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

Stitching the Image

To correctly inspect boards, the QX Series System must convert the multiple tiles of the mosaic
image into a single, seamless image of the board. This process is called stitching. After you create a
stitching task, the system stores the stitching information in the assembly so that all images
subsequently loaded into the assembly are stitched automatically.

Whether the stitching task is run from the Stitcher Editor or the Assembly Editor, the system must
be able to locate all the defined fiducial stitch patches. If the search for any fiducial stitch patch fails,
the system cannot locate the leading edge of the board and the stitching task cannot run reliably.
Consequently, the stitching task fails. When run from the Assembly Editor, no further inspections
will be made on the board if the stitching task fails.

78 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Stitching the Image

Auto stitching
A stitch finds the area of the panel that each camera image represented. When the stitcher stitches
correctly, the whole panel is captured by the camera and represented as a single picture. From v6.5
Release onwards, auto stitching is integrated and it automatically does the stitching based on the
FOV overlaps between the adjacent cameras and adjacent image strips.

To automatically stitch the image, Use Auto Stitch option is now added in the Assembly Properties
dialog. Different type of boards may require different stitching method, either manual stitch or auto
stitch. From the Use Auto Stitch list, choose Yes to use auto stitch or No to use manual stitching.

From the Use Auto Stitch list, choose

– Yes to auto stitch the image.
– No to manually stitch the image.

CyberOptics Corporation 79
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

Conclusion
● Auto stitch performs better under Motion Error and board warpage cases.
● When using 12mm overlap region, manual stitching performs slightly better than auto stitching.
You can reduce the overlap region for the auto stitch to gain speed performance. The suggested
minimum overlap region is 6mm. Value smaller than 6mm may cause bad auto stitching
performance.
● Auto stitch and manual stitch cannot be performed at the same time.
● For the board with high density tall components, the auto stitching performance may be
affected. In such a case, you may need to switch to manual stitching method.

Stitch patches manually

To stitch an image manually, you create a stitching task, which defines how the image tiles will be
joined together. Stitching tasks are stitch patches that specify the features on a panel used to align
overlapping tiles to form the seamless image. There are two kinds of stitch patches:
● Fiducial stitch patches enable the system to locate the leading edge of the board in the plane of
calibration.
● Overlap stitch patches enable adjacent, overlapping image tiles to be stitched correctly.

When you save an image, the image properties and stitching information are saved within the
assembly and also with the stored image.

Manual stitching must only be used for certain problem assemblies, such as, carrier at different
height in panel area and very tall components in overlap regions.

Note: To continue inspecting if the stitching task fails, suppress the stitcher fail warning using the
i option in the System Properties> Inspection and Rework Station tab.

➢ To create fiducial stitch patches

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Image > Load Stored Image.
2. Navigate to and select the file containing the board image to load.
3. Click Open.
4. Select Assembly > Edit Stitcher.
The Stitcher Editor opens in Fiducials mode.

80 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Stitching the Image

First image group

5. Maximize the window.

6. Click the Zoom Tool button to zoom into the first image group defined with the camera
boundary lines.
7. Click or to move to the first or second image group to place fiducials. Make sure,
however, that all fiducials are placed in the same group.
8. Click the Drop Locator Tool button.

Note: If the buttons for creating and editing stitch patches are disabled, select View > Image >
i Motion Corrected. The motion corrected view, which shows the image after it has been stitched and
corrected for any motion errors, is the only view in which stitch patches can be placed or edited

9. Click the left side of the image group on an appropriate board-level feature to drop the first
fiducial locator.
For fiducial stitch patches, it is important not to mix the type of feature you use for the stitch
patch. Try to make all fiducial stitch patches one type of feature, for example, all copper artifacts
or all silk screen elements. See Stitch Patch Recommendations on page 91 for more information
about choosing stitch patch features.
If you are stitching an image of a blank board (with no components), make sure you select a
feature that will not be obscured when the components are placed on the board.
10. Scroll across the image group and place a second fiducial stitch patch toward the center of the
image group.
11. Place a third fiducial stitch patch on the right side of the image group. CyberOptics recommends
that you only place three fiducial stitch patches on a board.
The stitch patches should look similar to the following figure.

CyberOptics Corporation 81
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

Figure 1. Fiducial Stitch Patches

12. After you have placed the fiducial stitch patches, click to run the stitcher.
The system inspects the stitch patches and highlights the passed fiducials in green and the
failed fiducials in red.
13. If any fiducial fails, delete the failed fiducial, drop a new fiducial using a different feature, and
re-run the Stitcher in Fiducials mode.
To view the fiducial model:
● Select the fiducial task and double-click it to open the Model Editor.
● Click the Properties button, and then click the Inspection tab
● Make sure that Contrast Correction is enabled (set to Yes).
14. When all fiducial stitch patches pass inspection, select File> Save to save the fiducial stitching
task.

Setting the board height

Set the surface height for printed circuit board (PCB) by modifying the board thickness in the
Assembly Properties and Edit Stitcher dialog instead of calibration the height prior to inspection.
Once the height is calibrated, the image positions are displayed on both the image title.

➢ To set the board height in assembly properties

1. Click Assembly > Edit Properties.
2. In the Assembly Properties, double-click Board height adjustment (mm) and enter a value from 0
to 10. The default value is 0.
3. Perform the stitch process as described in the section Stitching the Image on page 78.
4. Save the result.

➢ To set the board height in edit stitcher dialog

1. Click Assembly > Edit Stitcher.
2. You must enable the Adjust estimated board surface height before adjusting the board height.
Navigate to View > Image mode > uncorrected.
3. Increase the spin button to simulate an increase of the board height.
4. Decrease the spin button to simulate an increase of the board height.
5. Use the slide bar to simulate an increase or decrease of the board height.
6. Perform the stitch process as described in the section Stitching the Image on page 78.
7. Save the result.

Note: Once the simulated board height is adjusted in the Edit Stitcher dialog, the board height gets
automatically updated in the Assembly Properties dialog and vice versa.

82 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Stitching the Image

➢ To create overlap stitch patches

After creating the fiducial stitch patches that pass, create overlap stitches for the rest of the board.
1. In the View menu, clear the check mark next to Fiducials and select Overlaps (Stitch) mode.
The Stitcher displays the image overlaps only.
2. Click the Zoom Tool button and zoom into the first row of image overlaps, starting with
the first camera image on the left.
3. Click the Drop Locator Tool button.

First camera image overlap

First camera image

Figure 2. First Camera Image and Overlap

CyberOptics Corporation 83
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

4. Place a stitch patch on an appropriate board-level stitch patch feature close to the center of the
image overlap.
Stitch points placed in the horizontal overlaps are used for motion correction when stitching the
board. Stitch points in vertical overlaps are used for surface reconstruction. Stitch points placed
in the overlap intersections (where the horizontal and vertical overlaps intersect) are used for
both motion correction and surface reconstruction.
If you are stitching an image of a blank board (with no components), make sure you select a
feature that will not be obscured when the components are placed on the board.
5. Use the scroll bar or keyboard arrow keys to scroll across the image group to the second camera
image in the first row of image overlaps.

Second camera image overlap

Second camera image

Figure 3. Second Camera Image and Overlap

6. Place another stitch patch on an appropriate stitch patch feature.
7. Continue placing stitch patches until the first image group is fully populated with stitch patches.
Try to place at least one stitch patch in each image overlap, taking care to find a recommended
feature without any “noise” surrounding it.

84 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Stitching the Image

8. Continue placing stitch patches in each row of overlaps until the entire image is fully populated
with stitch patches. A fully populated image will have at least one stitch patch in each image
overlap.
9. After you have placed the overlap stitch patches, click to run the stitcher.
As part of populating the stitching task with stitch patches, you should test the stitching task to
make sure it correctly stitches the image. You may want to run the stitching task after
populating each row of overlaps to ensure that the stitch patches work correctly.
After you run the stitching task, the system displays the results (pass or fail) in the Stitcher
Editor title bar. Stitch patches that are located turn green and those that cannot be found turn
red. Select View > Results to determine the reason for any failures.
10. Delete the stitch points that fail by selecting the stitch point and pressing the Delete key on the
keyboard, then add new stitch points as needed. If your stitch points are rejected or not locking
on well, try using a different feature to stitch with.
After all of the stitch points pass, select View > Results and verify that the motion correction line
for each group is less than .25mm.
11. Select File > Save to save the overlaps stitching task.

CyberOptics Corporation 85
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

➢ Editing Stitcher at the border of the overlap regions

Prior to v6.5 Release, the software does not support placing a locator along the border of the region,
because the search area was used as a search criterion. When the search area is outside the overlap
region, the locator will not be considered for stitching.

Implementation

To improve the editing stitcher properties at the overlap region, the search criterion > by search
area (purple box) function used prior to v6.4 Releases is retained. However, a new criterion, search
criterion > by locator area (cyan box) is added in the v6.5 Release onwards, which uses the
locator box as a search criterion. When the locator box is outside the overlap region, the locator is not
considered for stitching.

You can place and edit the stitcher at the border of the overlap region. The locator box must be in the
overlap region while the search area can be outside the overlap region. The stitcher improvement
allows you to place and search the stitcher even when the search area is out of the overlap region.
When the search area is enlarged, the features in the top and bottom images do not move apart.

Note:
– This feature is useful when there are no features at the centre of the overlap region. But there
are features at the border of the overlap.
– To support the previous v6.4 or prior and the v6.5 and onwards Release versions assemblies,
the Editor Stitcher interface is updated as follows:
– Stitcher Criterion filed is now added in the Stitcher Editor Properties.
1. Navigate to Assembly > Edit Stitcher.
2. In the Stitcher Editor dialog, click Properties > Stitcher Criterion.
● by search area —choose when using v6.4 Release and prior version assemblies to place the
stitcher when the search area is outside the overlap region. Locators are not used in stitching
when the search area is outside the overlap region.
● by locator area —choose when using v6.5 Release assembly to place the stitcher when the extent
box of the stitcher is outside the overlap region. Locators are not used in stitching when the extent
box is not in the overlap region, regardless of the search area.

86 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Stitching the Image

➢ Feature improvement for reducing stitcher/out of position issues

The following improvements are implemented for the stitcher out of position for QX Series System.
● Correlation between SIM 1 and SIM2 by using features between CAM 8 and 9.
– The number of locators (for each image) in the region between CAM 8 and 9 must be at least
three as shown in the following figure (red and purple box). Otherwise, the correlation is set
to identity.

– The SIM1 to SIM2 correlation for the current group of images works on condition that the
number of locators between the row overlap of current group and previously group must be
at least three.

CyberOptics Corporation 87
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

– CyberOptics recommends that the locators span the whole range of each color box. As we can
see from the following figure, each color box is divided into three parts. That is to say, it is
better that each part of the color box could have locator for the correlation estimation.

● Larger search area for images in SIM2 for locators.

– The scale of the search area can be modified in EnvironmentVariables.cfg.
– Default value of IS_STITCHER_SH_SCALE is 1.5 and IS_STITCHER_SW_SCALE is 1.0.
– When the same group images are captured by SIM1 and SIM2 at different times, the motion
error for the two SIM images may be different. Enlarging the search area will allow the
software to compensate for larger motion error between the two SIMs.
● Prior to v6.5 Release, the resize tool functions for all the existing locators. From v6.5 Release
onwards, a new resize tool, Resize Single Area is added, which functions for only one locator at
a time, while the other locators are not affected.

88 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Stitching the Image

● To specify the old or the new stitching flow,

– Select, Stitch Editor > Properties > Running Mode.
– Select M/L Mode to stitch the image if the assembly is v6.4 or prior.
– Select L Mode to stitch the image if the assembly is v6.5 and onwards.

Note: For L-machine, due to the distance created between the two SIMs along the moving direction,
the images are captured at different time for the same group and hence, the motion error is different.
Prior to v6.5 Release, the two SIMs were considered as one SIM which has 16 cameras. And hence, it
was presumed that the images captured from 16 cameras were at the same time.

The stitching flow (M/L mode) prior to v6.5 is retained and the new function L mode is added to
compensates the motion error difference that occurs between the two SIMs.
● Switching between left and right camera display sequence

The display in the stitch editor attempts to stitch the panel based on the default calibration.
Therefore, in the overlap regions the view from one camera is randomly chosen for display. To switch
between the left and right camera and to view the image in the default or reverse mode, a new
button View images in reverse order is now added in the Stitcher Editor as shown in the following
figure. The priority on the overlapped region is displayed in two different modes:
– LEFT>RIGHT, BOTTOM>TOP (default mode)
– RIGHT>LEFT, TOP>BOTTOM (reversed mode)

CyberOptics Corporation 89
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

You can switch between the two modes by clicking on the View images in reverse order button.

90 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Stitching the Image

Stitch Patch Recommendations

Stitch patches must be placed on visible, board-level features that are unique within their search
area, are close to the center of the image group or image overlap, and are repeatably placed on the
board. Stitch patches must not stitch on components or any other feature with height, nor should
stitch patches be placed on large holes that the system could potentially see through.

Vias and bare copper fiducials are acceptable only if you are not using the system in a post-wave
application. Crosses or Ts in traces (features with right angles) are ideal. Do not use traces with
shallow angles because the system will not lock onto these very well. For fiducials, use plated
through-holes or vias. Silk screening features with high contrast and sharp angles are ideal.

In general, place stitch patches on parts that are unique within their search area.

Recommended Features Features to Avoid

Shape Feature Shape Feature
Traces with sharp Trace lines
angles
Vias Diamond board
feature

Fiducials Square board

feature

Plated thru holes

N/A Silk screen features

Crosses

CyberOptics Corporation 91
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

Stitch Points Results

Results are listed in the Stitch Points Results window by group and by stitch patch within the
group. To view stitch points results:
● In the Stitcher Editor, click View, and then select Results.

In this window, you can:

● Sort options to show and organize the results of interest.
● Double-click a result to view the image patch.
● Double-click in the image patch to open the image in the model editor.

92 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Stitching the Image

Moving Stitch Patches

When creating the stitching task, you can move a stitch patch so that it accurately aligns with the
chosen feature. It is easiest to move stitch patches before the image is fully stitched.
1. In the Stitcher Editor, select the type of stitch patches to view (Fiducials or Overlaps) using the
View menu.
2. Click the Move Tool button.
3. Click and drag the stitch point (the inner box) to the desired position.
4. Click to run the stitching task.
5. Select File > Save to save your changes.

Note: Moving a stitch patch breaks the relationship between the feature and the stitch patch. After
i repositioning one or more stitch patches, you must run the stitching task, even if you have previously
done so.

Resizing Stitch Patches

The stitch patches you create when defining the stitching task consist of a search area and a stitch
point. The search area defines the boundaries within which the software will attempt to find the
feature. The stitch point defines the boundaries of the feature itself. To create a clearly-defined model
of the feature, the stitch point must encompass the entire feature. If necessary, you can resize the
stitch point and/or the search area.

For both overlap and fiducial stitch patches, resizing the search area on one stitch patch
automatically resizes the search area for all the stitch patches of the same type (overlap or fiducial)
on the image. The search area is defined to account for the motion of the conveyor as well as to
encompass the size of the feature. Therefore, the system assumes that if the search area for one stitch
patch needs resizing to correct for conveyor motion, then all search areas need resizing.

➢ To resize individual stitch points

1. In the Stitcher Editor, click the Resize Tool button.
2. Click the border of the stitch point (the inner box) within the stitch patch and drag the stitch
point to the desired size.
3. Select File > Save to save your changes.

➢ To change the default stitch point size

1. In the Stitcher Editor, select Properties > Stitcher.
2. In the Stitcher Properties dialog box, enter values for Drop Size Width and Height.
Note: If stitcher keeps on failing, then CyberOptics recommends you to set the width and height
value to 0.6.
3. Click OK.
4. Select File > Save to save your changes. Newly created stitch patches will have the specified
dimensions. Previously created stitch patches will not be affected by this change.

CyberOptics Corporation 93
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

➢ To resize the stitch patch search area visually

1. In the Assembly Editor, load a saved image.
2. Select Assembly > Edit Stitcher.
3. In the Stitcher Editor, select the type of stitch patches to view (Fiducials or Overlaps) using the
View menu.
4. In the Stitcher Editor, click the Resize Tool button.
5. Click the boundary of the search area (depicted as a pink box around the feature) and drag the
search area to the desired size.
6. Select File > Save to save your changes.

➢ To resize the stitch patch search area precisely

Each feature being used for either fiducial or overlap stitch patches should be unique within its
search area. Use caution when resizing the search area because this impacts all stitch patches of the
same type on the board.
1. In the Stitcher Editor, select the type of stitch patches to view (Fiducials or Overlaps) using the
View menu.
2. In the Stitcher Editor, select Properties > Stitcher.
3. In the Stitcher Properties dialog box, enter values for Search Size Width and Height.
4. Click OK.
5. Select File > Save to save your changes.

94 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Stitching the Image

Specifying Limits on Stitching Motion

When capturing images, two types of motion error can occur as the panel moves along the conveyor
through the rows of cameras:
● The panel can shift slightly, changing its position or angle on the conveyor.
● There can be a small variance in the conveyor motion itself; for example, when set to move 1mm,
the conveyor might instead move 0.99mm.

When image groups are stitched together, the stitching process calculates the severity of motion
errors by evaluating how far the next image group has to move to align with the previously stitched
image group. You can define the maximum amount of movement permitted between one image
group and the next. If, during stitching, an image group moves in excess of the thresholds you set
for x, y, or angle, the stitching task fails.

➢ To specify limits on stitching motion

1. In the Stitcher Editor, select View > Fiducials to clear the check mark next to the Fiducials
command.
2. Select Properties > Stitcher.
3. In the Stitcher Properties dialog box Motion Control section, specify values for Max X, Max Y,
and Max Angle.
4. Click OK.

Note: If the stitching task fails due to motion error, it is likely that there is a problem with the
i physical setup of the machine.

CyberOptics Corporation 95
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

Reducing Stitcher Errors

By default, the QX Series software corrects for conveyor motion which reduces the occurrence of
stitcher errors. Options to turn this feature off or make adjustments are provided on the System
Properties tab.

You can also set the system to re-inspect the panel after a stitcher failure to see if a second attempt
will give a better result.

➢ To adjust the conveyor motion compensation

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then click the Inspection & Rework
Stations tab.

2. Make sure the Dynamic home offset correction check box is selected.
3. In the Motion correction effort box, adjust the percentage according to the following
guidelines:
● Low values cause the system to wait until near the end of the acquisition process before
correcting for any motion errors and have a negligible impact on the panel cycle time.
● Higher values cause the system to apply corrections for motion errors earlier and more
effectively in the acquisition process, but can cause an increase in cycle time.
● The default value of 50% provides corrections to the last few motions (typically where
stitcher errors occur) with little effect on cycle time.
● Entering zero (0) turns off motion correction.

➢ To re-inspect the panel (one time) after a stitcher failure

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then click the Inspection & Rework
Stations tab.

2. Select Reinspect stitcher failures check box.

96 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Stitching the Image

Stitching and Inspecting Simultaneously

After the stitching task is defined, it runs automatically when you open an image in the Assembly
Editor or when you perform an inspection. During inspections, you can either stitch an image and
then inspect the locators and components on the board, or you can simultaneously stitch and
inspect the image. Simultaneously stitching and inspecting can shorten cycle time, but the board
must have an even spread of locators for this process to work correctly.

The simultaneous stitching and inspection process stitches the first two or three image row overlaps
before inspecting the locators. If the locators in the lower area of the board pass their inspections, the
component inspections begin in this located region of the board. This process continues up the
image until the entire board is stitched, located, and inspected.

➢ To perform simultaneous stitching and inspecting

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly > Edit Properties or click the Properties button.

2. In the Assembly Properties dialog box, set Stitch First to No.

3. Click OK.
4. In the Assembly Editor, start the inspection.
The results of all the inspections are shown in color in the Panel Layout pane, and the status of
the inspection appears in the Assembly Editor status bar and in the Inspection Results pane.
5. View the inspection results in the Inspection Results pane of the Assembly Editor.

Note: If the stitching task or locators fail during the inspection, the inspection process stops and no
i further component inspections are performed. To continue inspecting if the stitching task fails,
suppress the stitcher fail warning using the Suppress Warning Dialog on Stitcher Fails option in
the System Properties> Inspection and Rework Station tab.

CyberOptics Corporation 97
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

Selecting Surface Models

If you know the shape of the current board's surface, you can enhance the image produced by the
stitching task by selecting an appropriate surface model. The stitching task applies the surface
model when performing a surface correction search. Surface correction improves the quality of the
image used for inspections and measurement.

➢ To select an appropriate surface model

1. In the Stitcher Editor, select Properties > Surface Model.
2. Select one of the following surface models, based on the shape of the board:
● None: Select this option to prevent the stitching task from performing stereo height
correction for the board.
● Thickness/Tilt: Select this option to account for the thickness of the board above the plane of
calibration as well as any tilt found in the board position. The board thickness is a result of
the design and materials used, but the board tilt may occur as a result of many situations.
● Sag: Select this option to correct for board sag during stitching. If you know a product is
susceptible to sagging (the board is very thin, for example), enabling the Sag option enhances
the performance of the stitching task on this product. The image must have a good
distribution of stitch patches for this surface model to be successful.
● Warp: Select this option to correct for board warp, which can occur during board production.
The image must have a good distribution of stitch patches for this surface model to be
successful. By default, the Warp surface model is applied to all stitching tasks on
measurement systems because the warp surface model accounts for the most variability in
the board surface.

Note: Stitching tasks on all QX Series Systems contain different image views: uncorrected, motion
i corrected, and (on measurement systems), surface corrected. Select View > Image > Surface
Corrected to see the image after it has been stitched, motion corrected, and surface corrected. You
cannot drop stitch patches or edit them while viewing surface corrected images.

98 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Stitching the Image

Creating Surface Plots

(Measurement Systems Only)
The surface plot graphically illustrates the shape of an image after it has been stitched using any of
the stereo surface models. If you bypassed stereo height correction [see Correcting for Height
During Inspections (Measurement Systems Only) on page 160] when you ran the stitching task, the
surface plot option is not available.

➢ To create a surface plot

1. After running the stitching task, select View > Surface Plot.
2. In the Plot Height Surface dialog box, set the percentage of pixels to plot in both X and Y. The
higher the percentage values in either axis, the more densely populated the surface plot will be.
3. Click OK or Apply to generate the surface plot for the selected surface model.
4. View the surface plot. A good stitching task should produce a flat or slightly warped height map.
In the map,
● X = The width of the board as defined by the image area in the Image Positions Editor.
● Y = The length of the board as defined by the image area in the Image Positions Editor.
● Z = The height of the board's surface in relation to the system's plane of calibration.
If the height map shows excessive warpage or occasional peaks and troughs, recheck the camera
setup, system calibration, and stitching task. If necessary, edit the stitching task by verifying that
the fiducials locate accurately and that the stitching task is well populated.

CyberOptics Corporation 99
Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

Importing CAD Data

Whenever possible, use CAD data to create and populate a root task. Although you can create a root
task manually, the effort is very time-consuming and the resulting assembly is less reliable than
when using CAD data. For these reasons CyberOptics strongly discourages programming entire
assemblies manually.

CAD files contain engineering data about the assembly, such as the position and orientation of each
component, the location of fiducials, the part numbers, and the part types. Importing CAD data
automatically does the following:
● Creates a root task for the assembly.
● Finds existing templates in the system repository to use for each part number in the CAD file, or
creates new templates for each part number.
● Finds existing models in the system repository to use for each unit template, or creates new
models (you will have to program the new models).
● Creates libraries where the templates and models are stored.
● Optionally defines cloning relationships between part number templates that are all of the same
part type. Clones share the same template, which reduces programming time.
● Designates fiducials, and optionally defines fiducial templates and models with properties
typical for fiducials, and saves the templates and models in a separate library.
● Creates tasks for each reference designator within the CAD file. If the CAD file includes height,
width, and angle information, the tasks will also be correctly sized and oriented.
● Provides the approximate X and Y dimensions for the board.

100 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Importing CAD Data

Create a new HOW TO

CAD format PROGRAM AN
ASSEMBLY ON A
NEW SYSTEM

Load the CAD

format and the
CAD file
Set up the
hardware

Define the
template How to import
libraries CAD data Create new
assembly

Indicate the
fiducials
Capture
image data

Build the root

task Stitch the image

Align the root

Import CAD
task with an
data
image

CyberOptics Corporation 101

Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

Overview
Before importing CAD data, verify the location and format of your CAD file. This text file must
contain at least the following information for each component:
● Component reference
● Part number
● X coordinate
● Y coordinate
●  coordinate

If possible, it is preferred that your CAD file also supply the following information:
● Component type
● Top or bottom side

If the CAD file includes component type information, the amount of time it takes to program a
board will be reduced. If part type information is available, the structure of the part type, part
number, and component reference will be similar to the following example.

Part type
Component
reference
Part number
Component
reference

Component
reference
Part number
Component
reference

The QX Series System interprets the CAD file information into the following structure:

Master
template
Task
Cloned
template
Task

Task
Cloned
template
Task

102 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Importing CAD Data

Running the CAD Importer

The CAD Import Wizard steps you through the process of converting CAD data for use with QX
Series software.

➢ To start the CAD import process

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly > Import CAD.
2. On the Select File and Format page of the CAD Import Wizard, click Browse, navigate to the
folder and file where your CAD data is stored, and then click Open.
3. Specify the format of the CAD file in one of the following ways:
● Select an existing CAD format definition
● Edit an existing CAD format definition
● Create a new CAD format definition
Although any CAD file that you import into the QX Series System must contain the same basic
information (reference designator, part number, x, y, and angle), different CAD files may store
that information in different formats; for example, different files may list the information in a
different order or indicate the start of the data differently. As part of importing a CAD file, you
must define the exact format of the file you are importing.
If all of your CAD files have the same format, you can create one generic CAD format and use it
repeatedly.
4. To create a new definition, select Create a New Tabular CAD Format.

The following steps describe how to create a new CAD format definition. If you select an
existing definition, then proceed to To define template libraries on page 110.
5. Click Next.
6. On the Create New Tabular CAD Format page, type a unique name for the format in the Call
This Format text box.

CyberOptics Corporation 103

Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

7. Click the CAD File tab in the lower portion of the window to display the CAD file data. Refer to
this data to help you determine the format of your CAD file.

8. In the File Header list, select the type of file header for the format:
● Select Tagged if the CAD file contains separate lines that indicate where the data starts and
ends. In the Start and End text boxes, type the text used to establish the start and end of the
data (if different from BEGIN and END)
● Select Strip Lines if the CAD file contains a fixed number of lines of text at the beginning,
before the actual data. In the Lines text box, type the number of lines to strip from the CAD
file.
● If you have no header, select Strip Lines and set the Lines to 0 (zero).

9. If the angles in the CAD file are not represented in degrees, set the values that correspond to the
0, 90, 180, and 270 angles (for example 0, 1, 2, 3) in the Rotation section, CAD Representation
fields. Based on this information, the system interprets any other angle values in the CAD data
as a number of degrees.

104 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Importing CAD Data

10. In the Field Delimiter list, select the type of character used to separate the columns of data in
the CAD file: TAB, variable spaces, single space, or comma.
11. For each Value in the Field Description list, type the column number for the corresponding
CAD data in the Column in CAD field. If a column does not exist in the CAD file, type 0 in the
corresponding Column in CAD field.
12. In the Unit Conversion section, select one of the following options:
● Select the Standard option if measurements in the CAD file are expressed in millimeters,
centimeters, meters, inches, microns, or mils. If you select this option, select the unit of
measure used in the CAD file from the corresponding list.
● Select the MM Per Unit option if the CAD file uses a unit of measurement other than
millimeters, centimeters, meters, inches, microns, or mils. If you select this option, type the
value by which to multiply the CAD file's unit of measurement to convert it to millimeters.

13. Click the Preview tab and then click Refresh to preview the CAD format. If the preview data is
incorrect, change the appropriate values and click Refresh again.

14. When the preview looks correct, click Next and continue with the CAD Import Wizard.

CyberOptics Corporation 105

Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

Importing CAD and BOM Data

Whenever possible, use CAD and BOM data to create and populate a root task. Although you can
create a root task manually, the effort is very time-consuming and the resulting assembly is less
reliable than when using CAD and BOM data. For these reasons CyberOptics strongly discourages
programming entire assemblies manually.

CAD and BOM files contain engineering data about the assembly, such as the position and
orientation of each component, the location of fiducials, the part numbers, and the part types.
Importing CAD and BOM data automatically does the following:
● Creates a root task for the assembly.
● Finds existing templates in the system repository to use for each part number in the CAD and
BOM file, or creates new templates for each part number.
● Finds existing models in the system repository to use for each unit template, or creates new
models (you will have to program the new models).
● Creates libraries where the templates and models are stored.
● Optionally defines cloning relationships between part number templates that are all of the same
part type. Clones share the same template, which reduces programming time.
● Designates fiducials, and optionally defines fiducial templates and models with properties
typical for fiducials, and saves the templates and models in a separate library.
● Creates tasks for each reference designator within the CAD and BOM file. If the CAD and BOM
file includes height, width, and angle information, the tasks will also be correctly sized and
oriented.
● Provides the approximate X and Y dimensions for the board.
● Automatically generates variants according to the number of BOMs.

106 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Importing CAD and BOM Data

Create a new HOW TO PROGRAM

CAD+BOM format AN ASSEMBLY ON A
NEW SYSTEM

Load the
CAD+BOM format
and the CAD and
BOM file Set up the
hardware

Define the
template libraries
How to import CAD
and BOM data Create new
assembly

Indicate the
fiducials
Capture
image data

Build the root task

Stitch the image

Align the root task

with an image Import CAD+BOM
data

CyberOptics Corporation 107

Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

Importing SRFF Data

Whenever possible, use SRFF data to create and populate a root task. Although you can create a root
task manually, the effort is very time-consuming and the resulting assembly is less reliable than
when using SRFF data. For these reasons CyberOptics strongly discourages programming entire
assemblies manually.

SRFF files contain engineering data about the assembly, such as the position and orientation of each
component, the location of fiducials, the part numbers, and the part types. Importing SRFF data
automatically does the following:
● Automates the tedious Programming Setup.
● Draw the boxes for:
– Task
– Geometry (active areas)
– Search Window
– Tolerance Window
● Generates SRFF for SPI and AOI at the same time.
● Enables similar naming convention between AOI and SPI for SPC correlation.

108 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Importing SRFF Data

HOW TO
PROGRAM AN
ASSEMBLY ON A
NEW SYSTEM

Load the SRFF

Build the tasks
format

Set up the
hardware

Align the root task

with an image (this
is done manually)
Create a new
assembly

Capture image
data
How to import SRFF data

Stitch the image

Import SRFF data

CyberOptics Corporation 109

Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

➢ To define template libraries

1. In the CAD Import Process page, define the template libraries for the assembly by doing the
following:
2. Click the Accept the automatic assembly structure and naming conventions
(recommended) and the Always import from system (recommended) options.
These options define the template libraries using the default naming conventions and create the
assembly from existing templates in the system repository or create new templates based on the
CAD data. To keep any layering structure previously applied to the template, the CAD Import
Wizard first searches for the template in the Component library. If the template does not exist in
the Component library, the system searches for the component template in the Body library. For
double-sided boards, if the CAD file contains top and bottom side information, you must also
specify whether to create the assembly based on the top or the bottom of the panel.

3. Click Next to continue with the CAD Import Wizard.

110 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Importing SRFF Data

➢ To define fiducials

When importing CAD data, if the CAD file contains reliable fiducial information, this information is
interpreted by the QX Series System application and used to create fiducials within the root task. In
the CAD Import wizard, you must indicate which reference designators represent fiducials. Tasks
created for the parts designated as fiducials during the CAD Import process are automatically
defined as fiducials within the assembly.
1. In the Define Fiducials page, select the objects that represent fiducials from the reference
designators list.
2. Click Fiducial.
The system places the word Yes next to the selected fiducials.

i Note: To remove the fiducial designation from a part, select the part and then click Non-Fiducial.

3. After you have defined the fiducials, click Next and continue with the CAD Import Wizard.

CyberOptics Corporation 111

Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

➢ To build the root task

1. In the CAD Import Process Is Complete page, specify whether to mirror the root task by clicking
the desired option (Off, In X, In Y).

i Note: You may need to use mirroring if your CAD data includes bottom-side information.

2. Click Build.
The system builds the root task in the Assembly Editor.
3. After the build is complete, click Close.

112 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Aligning the Root Task with the Panel Image

Aligning the Root Task with the Panel Image

When you first create a root task, the task may be in a different position than the panel image
captured by the QX Series System. You may need to align the task with the image before you
program the assembly or inspect the image in the Assembly Editor.

Aligning the root task with the image consists of:

● Rotating the root task, if necessary
● Moving the root task over the image

Caution: Do not move individual component tasks within the Assembly Editor. Moving an
individual component task in the Assembly Editor changes the CAD coordinates for that task
and can result in faulty inspection results.

➢ To rotate the root task visually

1. In the Assembly Editor, zoom the image so that the entire root task is visible.
2. Click the Rotate Tool button.
3. In the Panel Layout pane, click and drag the root task to rotate it to the correct position.

CyberOptics Corporation 113

Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

➢ To rotate the root task precisely

1. In the Assembly Editor, click .
2. In Panel Layout pane, right-click the boundary of the root task and select Edit Task Properties.
3. In the Task Properties dialog box, enter the appropriate rotational value (for example, -90) in the
Task Angle field.
4. To see the results without closing the Task Properties dialog box, click Apply. If necessary, you
can further adjust the task angle.
- or -
To apply the changes and close the Task Properties dialog box, click OK.

➢ To move the root task onto the image

1. In the Assembly Editor, click the Move Tool button.

2. In the Panel Layout pane, click the boundary of the root task and drag it so that it is aligned with
the image. Make sure that all task icons within the root task are selected. (When you select a
task icon, the boundary turns yellow.)
3. Click .

114 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Panelizing a Board

Panelizing a Board
Group the existing tasks for a single board and then populate a panel with the tasks for all the
boards on the panel.
1. In the Assembly Editor, select the unit tasks to group.
2. Select Grouping > Panellise Board.
The Panellise Board dialog box opens with the tasks for one board on the panel displayed.

3. To zoom in on the display image, click in the image and click the left mouse button or drag a box
around the area to magnify. To zoom out on the display, right-click the image.

CyberOptics Corporation 115

Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

4. Enter the information specific to the panel:

● Number of Columns and Rows: select the number of columns/rows of boards on the
panel.
● Pitch in X and Y: enter the distance between boards on the panel in millimeters. Use the
positions of the root task outlines and fiducials as a guide.
● Direction: select the direction in which to populate the panel.
● Rotate Panels 180 degrees: check this box to rotate the panel clockwise. When selected,
you also choose whether to make the rows or columns even.
● Retain CAD Coordinates of sub tasks: check this box to define coordinates of newly
created tasks relative to the assembly rather than to the composite template.

5. In the Template name field, click and navigate to the template for the panelized board.
6. When the panels are lined up correctly on the board, click OK to save the information and close
the Panellise Board dialog box.
7. In the Assembly Editor, click the Resize Tool button to resize the root task boundary to
include the entire panel.
8. Click to save the assembly.

116 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Saving, Moving, and Deleting Assemblies

Saving, Moving, and Deleting Assemblies

The System saves data for each assembly using a specific file structure. You cannot simply move or
delete assemblies and be assured that all elements of the files are included in the operation. Make
sure that you use the Assembly Editor to save, move, copy or delete assemblies from the system.

An asterisk (*) appears next to the title in the title bar of the Assembly Editor if changes have been
made to the assembly since the last time it was saved.

➢ To save an assembly

Saving an assembly saves all the information needed to inspect the printed circuit board: image
positions, the stitching task, inspection tasks, templates, and models.
● In the Assembly Editor, select File > Save Assembly.

➢ To save a copy of an assembly

1. Close any editors that you opened from the Assembly Editor, saving changes as appropriate.
2. In the Assembly Editor, to apply any changes to the original assembly before making the copy,
select File > Save Assembly.
3. Select File > Save Assembly As.
4. In the Save Assembly As dialog box, type the new assembly name.
5. Do one of the following:
● Select the library where the assembly will reside.
● Create a new library by clicking . In the New Library dialog box, enter the library name
and click OK.
6. Click Save.

➢ To move assemblies to different libraries

You cannot directly move an assembly to a new library. Instead, you must save a copy of the
assembly to the new library, and then delete the original assembly.
1. In the Assembly Editor, open the assembly to move.
2. Select File > Save Assembly As.
3. In the Save Assembly As dialog box, type the new assembly name.
4. In the Library list, select the library for the assembly.
5. Click Save.
6. Close the Assembly Editor.
7. On the Launch Pad, click System Manager.
8. In the System Manager window, select the original assembly and then select Edit > Delete
Selected.
9. If a confirmation message asks if you really want to delete the assembly, click Yes.

➢ To delete assemblies
1. In the Launch Pad, click System Manager.

CyberOptics Corporation 117

Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

2. In the System Manager window, select the assembly to delete in the Assemblies list.
3. Select Edit > Delete Selected.
4. If a confirmation message asks if you really want to delete the assembly, click Yes.

Notes:
i ● Use caution when deleting assemblies. This action cannot be undone.
● Deleting an assembly deletes the assembly's copy of the templates, models, and the image
capture and stitching information used to program a single board. However, deleting an
assembly does not automatically delete related templates and models in the system repository.
● To control whether the system displays confirmation messages when you delete items go to the
Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then in the Miscellaneous tab, select or clear the
Display Delete Confirmation Dialog check box.

118 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Creating a Variation of an Assembly

Creating a Variation of an Assembly

Assemblies that are nearly identical with just a few distinguishing parts can be created as
variations of a generic assembly. This is useful in assemblies where parts are present only for
certain options, or parts are a different specification for certain applications.

Once a variation is created, then only the variations can be opened at the inspection station. To
maintain the ability to open a non-variant version of the assembly at the inspection station, save the
original assembly under a new name.

Assemblies can vary in the following ways:

● Different set of parts on the board (some added, some omitted).
● Different type of part for a given component location.
● Component located in a different place on the board.

Each type of variant is created differently, but all use the concept of either adding or omitting tasks
from the assembly. Omitted tasks are not included in the inspection results nor will they affect the
definition of the parent composite template.

Note: Adding tasks to a create a variant adds the task to the overall “generic” assembly and also to
i any other variants associated with the assembly. If you add a task, make sure that you determine to
which variants it applies and omit the new task where necessary.

➢ To create a variant by omitting tasks

1. Create an assembly file for the panel configuration that has the most possible tasks on the panel.
2. On the Assembly menu, select Variants> New.
3. Enter a name for the set of variations. The assembly name is changed in the title bar to include +
(Assembly Variant Name). By default all tasks in the assembly are included in the variation.
4. Locate the first task to exclude from the variation. Always omit tasks from the root location to
avoid omitting tasks with similar names. For example, if the task to be omitted is located within
a component, omit the entire component.
5. Right-click the task and select Variant> Omit from loaded variant.
This removes the selected task from the inspection.
6. Repeat step 5 to remove all tasks for this assembly variation.
7. To view a list of the omitted tasks, in the Find pane, select Tasks and click .
8. When all affected parts are omitted, Save the assembly.
When the assembly is opened at the inspection station, the operator is prompted to select an
Assembly Variant.

Note: If you are using the Load Assembly by Barcode feature with an in-line barcode reader, you
i must also set the Auto-load product variants setting on the System Properties – Barcode tab and
include the Variant in the Barcode to Assembly table mapping.

CyberOptics Corporation 119

Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

➢ To create a variant for a different part position

1. Create a new task for the part in its new location.
● Give this task a name similar to the original, such as C22_alt.
● Locate the new C22_alt in the same composite template (board-level) using the same unit
template as the original C22.
2. Create assembly variants that omit the unnecessary task from each assembly.

➢ To create a variant for a different part type

1. Create a new task for the affected part.
● Give this task a name similar to the original, such as C22_alt.
● Locate C22_alt in the same composite template (board-level).
● This part will have a different unit template that describes its specific type.
2. Create assembly variants that omit the unnecessary task from each assembly.

➢ To use an existing assembly variant

1. Open the desired assembly.
2. On the Assembly menu, select Variants> Load.
3. Select the assembly variant to apply to the current file.
4. The variants are loaded and the assembly name is changed in the title bar to include
+ (Assembly Variant Name).

➢ To duplicate a variant
1. Open the desired assembly.
2. On the Assembly menu, select Variants> Manage.
3. Select an assembly variant which you want to duplicate from the list and click Duplicate.
4. Enter a new name for this variant. If the name you entered already exists, an error is generated.
5. A new variant is created with the same content as the existing variant and appears in the
selection list.
6. Click OK.

i Note: You must save the assembly for the duplicated variant to be saved.

120 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Componentizing an Assembly

Componentizing an Assembly
Convert templates from older versions of Flex (5.3 and earlier) to make them compatible with
features such as, Component Library, available in later versions. When you componentize a legacy
assembly, it converts all existing composite templates containing layers and unit templates into
components with package type. You can also view all the components and package types and enter
additional information for each component. Then, you can recreate the assembly using the newly
created components.
1. In the Assembly Editor, select File > Open Assembly (or click Open Assembly on the Launch
Pad.)
2. In the Assembly Selector dialog box, navigate and select a legacy assembly.
3. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly > Componentize Legacy Assembly.
The Componentize Legacy Assembly dialog box opens with the list of components in the
legacy assembly displayed on the left pane and the individual component details displayed on
the right pane.

4. Press F10 to move to the next component in the list.

5. You can edit the details of the component in the Edit Selected Component Details area.
6. To assign a different package type to the component, click next to Package Type.
The Legacy Imported Package Types dialog box opens with the list of package types available
in the current assembly displayed in the left pane and the package type details displayed in the
right pane.

CyberOptics Corporation 121

Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

7. You can edit the details of the selected package type in the Edit Selected Package Type
Details area. Then, click OK to close the dialog box.
The component now includes all the layers of the selected package type. However, the text layer
remains unique to the component.
8. To delete a component from the list, click Remove Selected Component.
9. Click OK to componentize the assembly.
10. Click to save the assembly.

122 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Finding Tasks

Finding Tasks
Use the Find view in the Assembly Editor to find specific tasks.
● Click the Synchronize button to synchronize the selections with the Panel Layout pane
(Assembly Editor) or Main View (Composite Template Editor). With this button selected, tasks
selected in the image display are displayed in the Find or Tree View panes, and vice versa

➢ To find tasks by task name

1. In the Assembly Editor Find pane, select Tasks from the Find list.
2. Type the all or part of the task name in the filter text box. Use the asterisk (*) character in place
of unknown text to indicate any number of missing characters in the filter text. For example, to
select resistors, you could enter the filter text as *R*. Note, however, that the search is case
sensitive. Entering just an asterisk lists all tasks in the assembly.
3. Click .
The system displays all the relevant instances in the list.

➢ To find tasks by template name

1. In the Assembly Editor Find pane, select Template from the Find list.
2. Type the all or part of the template name in the filter text box. Use the asterisk (*) character in
place of unknown text to indicate any number of missing characters in the filter text. Entering
just an asterisk lists all templates in the assembly.
3. Click .
The system displays all the relevant templates in the list.
4. In the list of templates, expand the template containing the tasks of interest.

➢ To select tasks
● To select all listed tasks, click the Select All button.
● To select a particular task, click the task name.
● To select multiple adjacent tasks, hold down the SHIFT key as you select the first and last tasks in
the group.
● To select multiple non-adjacent tasks, hold down the CTRL key as you click the tasks to select.

CyberOptics Corporation 123

Chapter 3: Creating Assemblies

124 QX Series System Software User Guide

 4 Defining Fiducials

Overview 126

Defining a Fiducial Template 128

Seeding a Model 131

Inspecting Fiducials in the Assembly Editor 135

Editing a Fiducial Template 138

Editing a Fiducial Model 139

Locating Fiducials within an Assembly 145

Changing Unit Tasks to Locators 146

CyberOptics Corporation
Chapter 4: Defining Fiducials

Overview
Fiducials are board-level features placed on a printed circuit board during the manufacturing
process. The QX Series System uses fiducials to visually align the root task and the board during
the production and inspection processes. All fiducials must pass the inspection before further
inspections can take place.
● Accurate placement of fiducials on each product is critical. CyberOptics recommends that you
define at least four fiducials, with one at each corner of the board. This enables the QX Series
System to correctly compensate for translation, rotation, and scaling issues when inspecting the
board. Use six or more fiducials to additionally compensate for tilt. If you use more than four
fiducials, place one fiducial at each corner, and space additional fiducials evenly across the board.
● Fiducial placement information must be documented in the CAD file for a QX Series System to
reliably inspect boards. If fiducial information is not included in the CAD file, alternative board-
level features (such as vias and electrical test points) can be used in their place. However, these
features are not usually as reliable as fiducials, so the fiducial CAD data should be acquired if
possible.
● For the QX Series System to accurately find a fiducial during inspection, the fiducials on the
board must be of good quality. If the fiducials are particularly poor, you may alternatively use
other board-level features as locators.
● Models should be initially populated with at least five examples. However, after a training
period, fiducial models should contain 30 to 100 examples.

Table 3. Fiducial Geometry Recommendations

Fiducial Design Model Design Recommendation

Highly recommended

Recommended

Recommended

126 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Overview

HOW TO
PROGRAM AN
ASSEMBLY ON A
NEW SYSTEM

Set up the
hardware

Create new
assembly

Capture
image data

Define model
Import CAD geometry
Define template data
properties (search How to define the How to define the
areas) fiducial template fiducial model
Seed the
model (min. 5
examples)
Define Define Define
fiducial template fiducials fiducial model
Save the
Save the
template
model

CyberOptics Corporation 127

Chapter 4: Defining Fiducials

Defining a Fiducial Template

If you are programming without CAD data, the first model and template created in the assembly
should be for the fiducials on the board so that you can run the fiducials and align the root task and
the image for future programming.

The ideal fiducials are circles, but almost any unique item can work. Make sure that the fiducials are
spread apart on the panel.

➢ To define a fiducial template

1. In the Assembly Editor, double-click a fiducial task icon.
The Unit Template Editor opens with the selected fiducial displayed.
2. Click the Zoom Tool button to zoom in on the displayed image.

3. Click the Create Task Icon button and draw a new task icon around the fiducial. Make
sure that the icon is centered on the fiducial and encompasses the entire feature.

4. To resize the task icon so that it is symmetrical, click and then double-click the border of the
task icon.

128 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Defining a Fiducial Template

5. In the Resize Task Icon dialog box, enter the same value in the Width and Height fields and
then click OK.

6. In the Unit Template Editor, select the border of the search area, and then click the Resize
Tool button to increase the search area around the task icon. Elongate the search area more in
the Y direction to help correct any looseness in the movement of the conveyor belt.

7. Click the Properties button to open the Unit Template properties and set these parameters:
● Search Angles: 1-way
● Search Angle +/-: Set this angle to 2.00 or 3.00 for square fiducials, or 0.00 for round
fiducials.
● Tolerance probability threshold: 1e-30.
● Tolerance Angle +/-: 5
● Out of Position: Off

CyberOptics Corporation 129

Chapter 4: Defining Fiducials

8. Click the Build button to build a model for this example.

The system creates the model, places it in the correct library, and populates the Training Set pane
with examples from the current image.

9. Inspect the training set examples by clicking Inspect on the Training Sets pane toolbar. The
template should fail inspection for Not Enough Examples.
10. Seed the model by adding examples from the initial training set shown in the Training Sets pane
on the right side of the window.
11. Click the to save the template and close the Unit Template Editor.
12. In the Assembly Editor, click to save the assembly.

130 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Seeding a Model

Seeding a Model
The system learns variation in task or model appearance by adding examples to, or seeding, the
model. Create a production training set, which contain tasks from multiple images, to select
examples to add to the model. When the assembly is ready for production, delete the production
training sets used to program the panel.

➢ To create a production training set

1. Select Assembly > Training Options.
2. In the Training Options dialog box, set the Action field to Add to Production Training Set.
3. Set the Training Option field to Collect All Failures. When initially programming an assembly,
tasks will fail because the model is incomplete, so you want to be sure to see all failures and add
them into the model if they are acceptable examples.

4. Click OK to save the settings and close the Training Options dialog box.
5. In the Assembly Editor, load an image sequence or a set of images if not already loaded.
6. Select Collect > Start.
7. When the system is done collecting training set examples, select Assembly > Training Sets.
8. In the Training Sets dialog box, select the fiducial from the list and click Open.
The Unit Template Editor opens with the Training Sets pane populated with examples.

CyberOptics Corporation 131

Chapter 4: Defining Fiducials

➢ To automatically seed a fiducial model

1. Open the model in the Unit Template editor.
2. Open a training set for the model, or create a new training set.
3. Click Auto-Seed.
The Auto-seeding settings dialog box opens.

4. In the Auto-seeding settings dialog box, set these parameters:

● Good Examples Ratio: This ratio defines which examples to use for auto-seeding. In the
case above, the best 80% of the examples in the training set will be used. If the training set
does not yield a reasonable number of good examples, set the ratio to a lower value. The
default ratio can be set in System Properties> Miscellaneous tab.
● Initial Align: Check this box to run auto-alignment on the initial model.
● Tolerance Probability Threshold: When auto-seeding is complete, all examples in the
model will be at or above the tolerance probability threshold value. By default, this is set to
the square root of the tolerance probability threshold of the template properties.
● Examples: The number of examples in the model after each stage of seeding.
– First Stage: During the first stage, the system picks the best examples from the training
set. By default, this value is set to 20% of the examples identified by the Good Examples
Ratio, up to 25 examples. You can set this value from 5 to 25 examples.
Check the Alignment box to auto-align the model after this stage.
– Second Stage: During the second stage, the system picks the next best examples from
the training set. By default, this value is set to 20% of the examples identified by the
Good Examples Ratio, up to 50 examples. You can set this value from 0 to 50 examples. If
no additional examples are found, this stage is skipped.
Check the Alignment box to auto-align the model after this stage.
– Third Stage: During the last stage, the system adds examples in increments shown in
this field. By default, examples are added in groups of three until no more examples meet
the probability threshold.
Check the Alignment box to auto-align the model after each increment.
5. Click OK to begin the auto-seed process.

132 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Seeding a Model

6. If you have selected any alignment options, a warning message appears to notify that the auto-
seeding process might take considerable time. Click Yes to proceed.

7. When complete, the message “Model population successful” is displayed.

CyberOptics Corporation 133

Chapter 4: Defining Fiducials

➢ To manually seed a fiducial model

1. In the Unit Template Editor, click Inspect in the Training Set pane.
2. After the inspection is complete, sort the examples by probability and from bottom to top. This
places the best examples at the top of the Training Set pane.

3. In the Training Set pane, select the first five examples.

4. Right-click and select Add Selected to Model.
5. Inspect the training set examples again. Several examples should now pass inspection.
6. Sort the training set examples again by probability but this time from top to bottom. The system
places the worst example at the top of the Training Set pane.

7. In the Details window, drag the green cross-hair to the center of the task icon.
8. Click to add the example to the model.
9. Re-inspect the Training Set examples.
10. If the example icons are locking on correctly, you can add them all at once:

● In the Max Examples text box set the maximum number of examples that the model should
have after the system populates the model from the training set.
● Select whether to overwrite existing examples in the model with new ones from the training
set. Examples are replaced only if the total number of examples in the model exceeds the
maximum.
● Click Populate.
11. After all examples in the Training Set pane pass inspection and lock on correctly, save the
template and exit from the Unit Template Editor.

134 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Inspecting Fiducials in the Assembly Editor

Inspecting Fiducials in the Assembly Editor

Component inspections rely on the performance of the stitching task and fiducial inspections;
typically, if the stitching task fails or the fiducials fail their inspections, the components on the board
will not be inspected. To test the performance of the stitching task and the fiducials, you can inspect
the fiducials independently of the components.

➢ To inspect fiducials in the Assembly Editor

1. On the Assembly Editor toolbar, click Inspect All Locators in the After Loading an Image list.

2. Select Inspect > Stored Image menu.

The system stitches the image before inspecting the fiducials. If all the fiducials pass their
inspections, each fiducial task icon turns green and the root task icon turns green. If any fiducial
fails its inspection, the fiducial task icon and the root task icon turn red.

➢ To inspect only the locators

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Inspect > Locators Only.
2. Start the inspection in one of three ways:
● Inspect > Inspect Live (Continuous)
● Inspect > Inspect Live (Once)
● Inspect > Stored Image to start the inspection
3. In the Assembly Editor, select View > Result Filters or click the Results Filter Dialog
button in the Inspection Results pane.
4. In the Results Options dialog box, select Show Passes, Show Failures, and Show Locators.
5. Clear Show Tasks check box.
6. Click OK.
7. In the Assembly Editor Inspection Results pane, select each task in turn to view the detailed
results in the Details pane.
8. If the template contains more than one model, in the Details pane, click or to display
the desired search results.
9. In the Details pane, do one of the following:
Add the current task as an example in the model.
Create a new model associated with the unit template for the task
Edit the current model geometry or examples.
Edit the current template for the task to adjust the tolerances or search area.

Note: To inspect all components again (versus just locators), select Inspect > Locators Only again to
i clear the check mark.

CyberOptics Corporation 135

Chapter 4: Defining Fiducials

➢ To analyze the results of the fiducial inspection

1. In the Assembly Editor, inspect the fiducials.
2. In the Inspection Results pane, select View > Result Filters or click the Results Filter
Dialog button.

3. In the Results Options dialog box, select the Show Locators check box and clear the Show
Tasks check box to change the results display to show only the fiducial inspection results.

4. Click OK to change the display and close the Results Options dialog box.

136 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Inspecting Fiducials in the Assembly Editor

5. In the Inspection Results pane, click each result in the list in turn to view the details of the
inspections in the Details pane.

6. If the template contains more than one model, click in the Details pane to display the
desired search results.
7. In the Details pane, do one of the following:
Add the current task as an example in the model.
Create a new model associated with the task's template.
Edit the current model.
Edit the current template.

CyberOptics Corporation 137

Chapter 4: Defining Fiducials

Editing a Fiducial Template

The unit template contains search and tolerance criteria, height correction information (if applicable),
and the models associated with the template. When you make changes to a unit template, the
changes affect all the instances of that template within the current assembly.

➢ To edit a fiducial template

1. In the Assembly Editor, double-click the fiducial task to edit.
The Unit Template Editor opens with the selected template loaded.
2. Correct the template definition as necessary using the editing tools.
or Resize the search area or tolerance area, or to resize both areas together.
For fiducials, you should typically set the search area (pink box) to be smaller than the tolerance
area (brown box).
Move the task icon, search area, or tolerance area.
Rotate the task icon, search area, or tolerance area.
Draw new search and tolerance areas around the task icon.
Draw a task icon for a new template.
3. After you have made the necessary corrections, click to save the template and exit from the
Unit Template Editor.
If a fiducial fails because of its probability value, it is likely that the model does not contain all
the acceptable variations found in the fiducials. If so, you may need to add more examples of the
fiducial to the model.
4. In the Assembly Editor, save the assembly.

138 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Editing a Fiducial Model

Editing a Fiducial Model

If any of the fiducials fail their inspection, edit the model or template for the fiducial. When you edit
the model geometry, all of the examples in the model are affected. Therefore, you must make sure
that any changes you make to the model geometry are correct for all of the variations contained in
the component and thus the model.

Viewing a Model Example

➢ To view a model example
1. In the Inspection Results pane of the Assembly Editor, select the instance name.
Use Show Passes and Show Failures buttons to help locate the desired fiducial.

CyberOptics Corporation 139

Chapter 4: Defining Fiducials

2. In the Details pane toolbar, click the Edit Model button.

The Model Editor opens with the selected template and its model examples loaded.

3. Click the Geometry tab.

4. In the Examples pane, select the first example.
The example appears in the Main View pane.
5. Click to scroll through the examples in the model.

Changing Model Geometry

The task icon represents the model's extent, or boundaries. When you define a model and associate
it with a template, the task icon for each instance of that template changes to reflect the model
geometry extent as defined by the task icon. The center mark of the task icon must be centered over
the feature to return accurate offsets during inspections. Changing the model geometry will change
the alignment of the task icon in all of the model's examples.

➢ To change the model geometry

1. Examine each example and correct the model geometry as necessary using the editing tools.
Resize the task icon, active area, or inactive area.
Double-click the task icon to enter precise width and height values.
Move or rotate the task icon, active area, or inactive area.
2. After you have finished making changes, click in the Model Editor to add the example to
the model.
3. When you are satisfied with the examples, click to rebuild the model.
4. Click to save the model and exit from the Model Editor.

140 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Editing a Fiducial Model

Editing the Examples in the Model

➢ To edit the examples in the model
1. In the Main View pane of the Model Editor, click the Alignment tab.
2. In the Examples pane, select the first example.
The example appears in the Main View pane.
3. Click to scroll through the examples in the model.
4. Examine each example and align it to match the model geometry if necessary.
● Use the Move/Rotate Tool button to rotate skewed examples and move misaligned
examples, or
● Click AutoAlign to automatically align all of the examples.

Figure 4. Misaligned Example

● Click to delete incorrect or poor examples.
5. When you are satisfied with the examples, click to rebuild the model.
6. Click to save the model and exit from the Model Editor.

CyberOptics Corporation 141

Chapter 4: Defining Fiducials

Defining Active and Inactive Areas for the Model

Defining active areas in a model helps to ensure that inspections capture all of the edge data of a
feature or component. The edge data is necessary for reliable inspections. Active areas can also:
● Place more focus on important data in the model (such as polarity marks),
● Exclude irrelevant data in the model,
● Define unique features on components to help with discrimination, and
● Reduce the amount of data required to process the model.

➢ To define an active area

1. In the Model Editor, click the Geometry tab and then click the Active Ellipse Tool button.

2. Starting in the upper left corner of the task icon, about two pixels diagonally outside the corner of
the icon, click and hold the mouse button, and then draw an active area around the task icon.
The active area should be about 0.2mm larger than the task icon, as shown in the following
figure.

Note: 0.2 mm is approximately equal to 1-1/2 to 2 pixels. To see the pixels more clearly, click
i and clear the Smooth Resampling check box. The following figure shows a model with an active
area drawn around it.

Figure 5. Fiducial task icon with Active Ellipse Area

3. Click and then double-click the active area.
4. In the Active Area Properties dialog box, define the properties for the active area.

a. Enter the same value in the Width and Height fields.

b. To center the area around the X and Y axes (the center of the task icon – represented by a
cross-hair in the display image), click Center.
c. To save the changes and close the Active Area Properties dialog box, click OK.
5. To delete an active area, select the active area and click .

142 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Editing a Fiducial Model

➢ To define an inactive area

Inactive areas are used to exclude data from a model. This can improve performance by eliminating
changeable and unnecessary data from the model, thus speeding up the inspection process.
1. In the Model Editor, click the Geometry tab and then click the Inactive Ellipse Tool
button.
2. Starting in the upper left corner of the task icon, about two pixels diagonally inside the corner of
the icon, click and hold the mouse button, and then draw an inactive area within the task icon.
The inactive area should be about 0.2mm smaller than the task icon, as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 6. Fiducial task icon with Inactive Ellipse Area

3. Click and then double-click the inactive area.
4. In the Inactive Area Properties dialog box, enter the same value in the Width and Height
fields, click Center, and then click OK to save the changes and close the Inactive Area
Properties dialog box.

5. In the Model Editor, click to build the model.

Note: You can reverse recent changes to the model geometry, including size and position of the task
i icon, active areas, and inactive areas, by reverting to the previous build. To do this, click
. Any changes to the model geometry or example alignment made since the last
build will be lost.

CyberOptics Corporation 143

Chapter 4: Defining Fiducials

Adding a Failed Example to a Model

If you have more than one failed fiducial, CyberOptics recommends that you add the best failure
(the failure with a probability value closest to 1) to the model.

➢ To add a failed example to the model

1. In the Assembly Editor, inspect the fiducials.
2. In the Inspection Results pane, click the Result Filter Dialog button.

3. In the Results Options dialog box, change the display to show only the failed fiducials and sort
the failures in descending probability order.
a. Clear the Show Passes check box and select the Show Failures check box.

Note: You can also change the display of passes and failures using Show Passes and
i Show Failures buttons on the Inspection Results pane toolbar.

b. Clear the Show Tasks check box and select the Show Locators check box.
c. In the Sorting lists, select the Probability option and the Descending option.

4. Click OK.
The system sorts the results and places the best result at the top of the Inspection Results list.
5. Analyze the reason for the failure and double-click the best result (the first result in the list).
The Unit Template Editor opens with the selected fiducial loaded.
6. If the blue task icon is correctly aligned, click to add the example to the model.
If the task icon is not correctly aligned, double-click the task icon to launch the Model Editor. In
the Model Editor, align the icon correctly and save the model.

144 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Locating Fiducials within an Assembly

Locating Fiducials within an Assembly

Typically, all fiducials for a panel are based on a single template. In the Assembly Editor, you can see
a list of all the fiducials based on a single template, or you can visually locate a fiducial in the Panel
Layout pane.

➢ To locate fiducials by template or library name

1. In the Assembly Editor Find pane, click the Synchronize button if it has not already been
selected.
2. In the Find pane, select Templates from the list.
3. In the text box, type all or part of the template or library name (case sensitive), or type * to see a
list of all templates.
4. Click Search.
5. In the list, select the template for the fiducials; expand the template to see a list of all instances of
that template used in the assembly.
6. Select the specific task to highlight the task in the Panel Layout pane.

➢ To locate fiducials by fiducial position

1. In the Assembly Editor Tree View pane, click Synchronize button if it has not already
been selected.
2. In the Tree View pane, select Templates from the list.
3. In the Panel Layout pane or Zoom pane, select the fiducial of interest.
4. In the Templates list, expand the Template to see the list of all child templates, models, and tasks
associated with that template.

Notes:
● When importing the CAD data, if you followed the recommended procedure of allowing the
system to automatically set up the library structure and you designated a part as being a
fiducial, the fiducial templates are saved in a separate library, named Fiducial. You can search on
all or part of this library name in the Assembly Editor Find pane.
● The icons in the Assembly Editor Tree View pane denote different objects, as follows:

Icon Description

Task

Model

Root Template

Unit Template

OR Composite Template

AND Composite Template

Cloned Template

CyberOptics Corporation 145

Chapter 4: Defining Fiducials

Changing Unit Tasks to Locators

Tasks created for parts that are designated as fiducials during the CAD import process are
automatically defined as locators within the assembly. However, if you manually create tasks within
an assembly, or if to define additional tasks as locators after importing CAD data, you can convert
unit tasks to locators within the Assembly Editor.

➢ To change a single unit task to a locator

1. Do one of the following:
● In the Composite Template Editor, right-click a task and select Edit Task Properties. (In the
Main View pane, you must select the task first.)
● In the Assembly Editor, right-click a task and select Edit Task Properties. (In the Panel
Layout and Zoom panes, you must select the task first).
2. In the Task Properties dialog box, set the Type field to have a value of Locator.
3. Click OK.

➢ To change multiple unit tasks to locators

1. In the Assembly Editor, select multiple tasks in one of the following ways:
● In the Panel Layout or Zoom panes, press and hold down the SHIFT key as you click the
tasks.
● In the Find pane, press and hold down the SHIFT key as you click the first and last task in a
list, or press and hold down the CTRL key to click non-adjacent tasks.
2. Right-click the tasks and select Edit Task Properties.
3. In the Task Properties dialog box, set the Type field to have a value of Locator.
4. Click OK.

Reducing Fiducial Errors

If the fiducial tasks are defined correctly but failures still occur, you can set the system to re-inspect
the panel after a fiducial failure to see if a second attempt will give a better result.

➢ To reinspect fiducial failures

1. In the Launch Pad, click System Properties, and then click the Inspection & Rework Stations
tab.
2. Select Reinspect fiducial failures check box.

146 QX Series System Software User Guide

 5 Programming Components

Assigning Part Types to Layers 148

About Templates 150

Working With Unit Templates 151

Working with Models 167

Working With Examples 184

Working with Training Sets 198

Advanced Editing 202

CyberOptics Corporation
Chapter 5: Programming Components

Assigning Part Types to Layers

When you import CAD data into your assembly and allow the system to automatically create
templates and define the library structure for the assembly, most templates are created within the
Component library (templates for parts designated as fiducials reside in the Fiducials library). If the
template does not exist in the Component library, the system searches for the template in the Body
library.

Designating that a template belongs to a certain layer does the following:

● Moves the template to the appropriate library, or creates a new template in the appropriate library.
If a new template is created, a new, blank model will also be created.
● Sets the template and model properties as appropriate for the layer. For example, the polarity
should typically be set differently for body tasks and text tasks. Tolerances, search angles, and
model properties also differ between layers.
● If you designate a part should belong to more than one layer (for example, a QFP may be
assigned to both the body layer and the pins layer), a composite template is automatically created
and stored in the Component library. The composite contains the tasks from the selected layers.
● If you select the pins layer, a composite template is created in the PinLayout library. You must
separately drop tasks for the individual pins within the composite.

148 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Assigning Part Types to Layers

➢ To assign part types to layers

1. In the Assembly Editor, open an assembly and load an image.
2. Select Assembly > Edit Layers.
3. In the Assembly Package Layers Setup dialog box select the Body, Pin, Text, or Polarity
check boxes in the Package Layers area. Repeat the following steps for each package in the list:
a. In the Package list, select a package type.
b. If the package type has several components, view each component to determine whether its
cloning relationship should change. Use to scroll through the components.
To remove an instance from the cloning relationship, select the corresponding check box in
the Use Component Layer area. This replaces the cloned layer from the selected package
type with a previously cloned layer of the component.
c. Select the check box(es) in the Package Layers area and/or Component Layers area which
represent the layers associated with the selected package type.

Note: If you are inspecting a part with text larger than an 0603, you would typically select the Text
i check box rather than the Body check box. If you are inspecting solder joints, you would typically
select either the Pins and Text or the Pins and Body check boxes for QFPs.

4. Click OK.
5. Define the component for each layer as described later in this section.
6. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly > Activate Layers.
7. In the Assembly Layers dialog box, clear a check box to turn off, or deactivate, the associated
layer. Then, click OK.

CyberOptics Corporation 149

Chapter 5: Programming Components

About Templates
After programming an assembly to locate fiducials and establishing cloning relationships between
templates, you must define unit templates and their associated models for each component to be
inspected. This process involves a combination of creating and editing unit templates, models, and
training sets.

Model: The definition of a feature’s appearance. The model definition includes the shape and size of
the component, the alignment and a series of examples that define the legitimate variations of the
feature or component.

Unit Template: Defines which model to use and where to look for it. The unit template also defines
tolerances for the feature position and appearance.

Composite Templates: Containers for other composite or unit tasks. For example, a composite
template on a resistor could contain a unit template for the body inspection and a unit template for
the text inspection; with each inspection done independently. Composite templates themselves are
not physically inspected; their inspection results depend on the inspection results of the unit tasks
within them.

Training Sets: A set of tasks (shown as image patches with task icons) collected during inspections
that you can separately inspect, analyze, edit, and optionally add as examples in a model. Each
training set is associated with a composite or unit template.

This chapter assumes that you have created a root task and populated it using CAD data. If this is
not the case, see Defining Composite Templates on page 217 for information about creating an
assembly manually.

150 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Unit Templates

Working With Unit Templates

The unit template contains search area and tolerance criteria, height correction information (if
applicable), and the models associated with the template. When you make changes to a unit
template, the changes affect all the instances of that template within the current assembly.

Opening Existing Unit Templates

Unit templates define properties necessary to inspect the components on a board, such as the search
area and tolerances. You can open unit templates from different places in the QX Series application,
depending on where you are working. Unit templates can exist in either the system repository or the
assembly.
● Use the Launch Pad or the System Manager to open shared, system templates.
● Use the Assembly Editor, Composite Template Editor, or Unit Template Editor to open templates
local to the assembly.
● When you open a unit template from the system repository, the template does not have an image
automatically associated with it; you must separately open a full image of a panel in the Unit
Template Editor.

➢ To open a unit template from the Assembly Editor

1. In the Assembly Editor, click to generate an initial training set for the unit template.
2. Use one of the following methods to open a unit template from the Assembly Editor:
● Right-click the template name or on the task itself and then select Launch Template Editor.
● In the Main View pane, select and then double-click a unit task.
● In the Find pane, double-click the template name.
● After an inspection, select a task, and then click in the Details pane.

➢ To open a unit template from the Composite Template Editor

Use one of the following methods to open a unit template from the Composite Template Editor:
● Right-click the template name or on the task itself and then select Launch Template Editor.
● In the Main View pane, select and then double-click a unit task.
● After an inspection, select a task, and then click in the Details pane.

➢ To open a unit template from the Unit Template Editor

● In the Unit Template Editor, select File > Open Template. In the Template Selector dialog box,
select the desired library and template and then click Open.

➢ To open a unit template from the system repository

Use one of the following methods to open a shared unit template in the system repository:
● On the Launch Pad, click Open Template. In the Template Selector dialog box, select the
collection from which you want to load the template. Then, select the desired library and
template in that collection and click Open.
● On the Launch Pad, click System Manager. Select the collection from which you want to load
the template, and then double-click a template in the Templates list.

CyberOptics Corporation 151

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Saving Unit Templates

Saving a unit template saves all the template properties, including the list of associated good and
bad models (although it does not save the models themselves). You can create a copy of an existing
template using the Save As command.

➢ To save a unit template

In the Unit Template Editor, do one of the following:

● To save the template and leave the Unit Template Editor open, click .
● To save the template and close the Unit Template Editor, click .

➢ To save a copy of a unit template

1. In the Unit Template Editor, select File > Save As.
2. In the Save Template As dialog box, do one of the following:
● Select the library where the template will reside.
● Create a new library by clicking . In the New Library dialog box, enter the library name
and click OK.
3. Enter the new template name.
4. Click Save.

Notes
● If you opened a template from the system repository, when you save the template, the changes are
applied to the system repository, enabling you to share the changes among multiple assemblies.
● If you opened a template from within an assembly, when you save the template, changes are
applied only to the current assembly. To apply local changes to the system repository, you must
separately commit the data. This enables you to test any changes within the current assembly
before committing them to the system repository.
● CyberOptics recommends that you use the standard libraries (Fiducial, Body, Text, PinLayout,
Pins, and Component) rather than creating new libraries. However, if you are using custom
naming schemes, you can still create new libraries.
● After you save a copy of the original template, the Unit Template Editor contains the new
template. Any subsequent changes to the new template do not affect the original.

152 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Unit Templates

Deleting Templates

Caution: Templates deleted from the system repository cannot be retrieved. This action cannot be
undone.

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Manager.

2. In the System Manager window, select the template to delete in the Templates list.
3. Select Edit > Delete Selected.
4. In the confirmation message, click OK.

Notes
● To quickly view unused items in the System Manager, select View > Show Unused. To again
show all items in the system repository, select File > Reset.
● You cannot directly delete templates from an assembly. However, if no tasks within an assembly
use a template, that template is automatically removed from the assembly when the assembly is
next saved.

Loading Stored Images in the Unit Template Editor

You can load images directly into the Unit Template Editor only when the template is a shared
template in the system repository. A shared template is one that is opened from the System Manager
or the Launch Pad. When working with templates local to an assembly, you cannot directly open an
image within the Unit Template Editor.

➢ To load a stored image for a local unit template

1. Load the image in the Assembly Editor.
2. Open the desired unit template.
The image automatically loads into the Unit Template Editor.

➢ To load a stored image for shared unit template

1. In the Unit Template Editor, select File > Load Image.
2. In the Open dialog box, navigate to the folder where your image is stored.
3. Select the stored image to load.
4. Click Open.

Notes
● You are prevented from opening images from the Unit Template Editor for local templates
because loading the image in the Assembly Editor automatically stitches the image and inspects
board locators; this prevents you from working with an unstitched or unaligned image.
● You can specify the default folder for your image files by selecting System Properties from the
Launch Pad and entering the folder in the Images text box on the File Storage tab.

CyberOptics Corporation 153

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Creating Unit Templates

Every task within the QX Series System is an instance of a template. Templates and their associated
tasks are generated by cloning to existing templates, generated from CAD data, or are created
manually.

➢ To clone to existing templates

CyberOptics supplies a set of templates for common parts that can be used for cloning, or you can
clone templates to your own existing parts.
1. In the Assembly Editor, select Image> Load Sequence> Selected Images.
2. Select all images captured for the panel.
3. In the lower left Search window, select Templates in the Find box and click .
4. Right-click the top master of a part in the Library list and select Clones of Master from the
menu. (For example, click the top master of capacitor 0805C.)
5. Make sure that Body is selected as the Library type.
6. Navigate to the library equivalent of the part, such as C0805.
The part (in this case, 0805C) is cloned to the CyberOptics master set up in the definition library.
All parts linked to this master will be updated to the library definition.
7. Go through the list of templates and clone as many as possible to a master template from the
library.
8. Click .
9. In the lower left Search window, list the undefined unit templates.
a. Click .
b. Select Templates from the Find box and click .
The system displays the list of undefined templates in the assembly.
10. Double-click the first unit template in the list to open it in the Unit Template Editor.
11. When you are satisfied with the template definition, select File > Flag as defined, load next (F11)
to open the next undefined template.
12. After all the unit templates in the assembly have been defined, click to save and exit the
unit template editor.

154 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Unit Templates

➢ To define templates generated from CAD data

When you import CAD data to populate your assembly, component templates are created
automatically, but are initially undefined. Begin by stepping through each template (which typically
corresponds to each component type) and defining it.
1. In the Assembly Editor, select Image > Load Image and select the first image in the image
sequence.
2. In the Find pane, list the undefined unit templates.
a. Click .
b. Select Templates from the Find list and click .
The system displays the list of undefined templates in the assembly.
3. Double-click the first unit template in the list to open it in the Unit Template Editor.
4. If necessary, edit the template:
a. Adjust the task, search area, and tolerances (see Adjusting Search Areas and Tolerances on
page 157).
b. If you make changes, click to build the model for the template.
c. To add examples to the model, select Training Set > Load Production Set.
d. Train the template’s model using the production training set (see page 198).
5. When you are satisfied with the template definition, select File > Flag as defined, load next (F11)
to open the next undefined template.
6. After all the unit templates in the assembly have been defined, click to save and exit the
unit template editor.

CyberOptics Corporation 155

Chapter 5: Programming Components

➢ To create a unit template manually

In most cases, unit templates are created automatically by importing CAD data. However, in certain
situations, such as those described below, you may need to create new unit templates by creating a
new unit task within an assembly:
● To inspect pins for a QFP, DIP, or grid array.
● To program an assembly without CAD data (CyberOptics discourages this because when
placing tasks without the benefit of CAD data, you must use an image of a golden board).
● To incorporate design changes into an existing assembly.
1. In the Assembly Editor, load the image for the golden board.
2. Locate and right-click the root task (or another composite task, as appropriate) and then select
Launch Template Editor.

3. In the Composite Template Editor select the Insert menu and choose the task to add. Refer to the
following sections for details about creating specific tasks.
● Adding Tasks for Component Bodies on page 223.
● Adding Pin Tasks for Dual In-Line Packages on page 224
● Adding Tasks for Quad Flat-Pack Pins on page 226
● Adding Single Tasks on page 228
● Adding Tasks for Text on page 229
4. In the Composite Template Editor, position the newly inserted task icon as necessary. To rotate or
resize the task icon, double-click the icon to open the Unit Template Editor.
5. Click to save and exit the Composite Template Editor.

Notes
● When you assign a part type template for a QFP, DIP, or grid array to the pins layer, a composite
template is automatically created in the PinLayout library. When adding unit tasks for the QFP,
DIP, or grid array pins, this composite template is the one in which you will create the unit tasks.
● You can also create a new unit template by opening an existing unit template in the Unit
Template Editor and then selecting File > Save As. This saves a copy of the template, which you
can modify. Note, however, that if there are no tasks in the assembly associated with the new
template, the template will be discarded from the local assembly the next time the assembly is
saved.

156 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Unit Templates

Adjusting Search Areas and Tolerances

Because the model geometry determines the size and shape of the task icon, you should create a
model for a feature before you define the tolerances. If your CAD data contained part information,
the geometry should already be defined.

A tolerance area defines the allowable area in which the feature can be placed. If the feature is found
outside the defined tolerance box, it will fail inspection. Tolerances on components are typically
defined such that if the component is found in excess of 25% off-pad, it fails with an out-of-position
error. Refer to industry standards for the part being inspected to help you determine tolerance
values.

The search area defines the image area within which to search for the feature. Search areas should
be sized to compensate for variability in component placement during production.

➢ To adjust using the Resize tool

You can resize the tolerance box and the search area simultaneously within the Unit Template Editor
using these tools:

To Click And then

Draw the tolerance box and Click the border of the tolerance box (the brown box) and
have the search area sized drag to the desired size. To resize all four sides
at 110% simultaneously, drag a corner of the box. To resize one edge,
drag the center of that edge.
The system draws the tolerance box to the specified size and
proportionately sizes the search area to be 110% of the
tolerance box size.

Draw the tolerance box and Click in the Main View image and drag to draw the tolerance
have the search area sized box (the brown box) around the text.
proportionately (for text) The system draws the tolerance box at the specified size and
offset, and proportionately sizes and positions the search
area.

Draw the search area and Click the border of the search area (the pink box) and drag to
have the tolerance box the desired size. To resize all four sides simultaneously, drag
sized at 90% a corner of the box. To resize one edge, drag the center of
that edge.
This resizes the search area to the specified size, and
proportionately sizes the tolerance box to be 90% of the
search area size.

CyberOptics Corporation 157

Chapter 5: Programming Components

➢ To precisely resize the search and tolerance areas

1. In the Unit Template Editor, click the Properties button to edit the template properties.
2. In the Unit Template Properties dialog box, click the Search tab.
3. In the Tolerance section, set the following values:

Probability Threshold
Enter a value that determines how well the feature being inspected must correspond to the
model to be considered a match. The probability value for a perfect match is 1. The probability
threshold must allow for genuine variations in component appearance while still remaining
discriminating. Typical probability thresholds include:
● Fiducials 1.0e-020
● Components 1.0e-012
● Text 1.0e-030

Angle +/-
Enter the number of degrees by which the part can rotate from nominal and still pass
inspection. For example, entering a value of 5 means a feature will pass its inspection if it is
found within 5° of the nominal angle (defined by the Task Angle specified in the Task
Properties dialog box). The Tolerance Angle +/- value should be 3 to 4 degrees less than the
Search Area Angle +/- value.

Width and Height

Enter the dimensions of the tolerance area, measured in millimeters. The tolerance area defines
the area within which a component must be found to pass inspection.

X and Y
Enter the X and Y coordinates for the center of the tolerance area. To center the tolerance area
around its nominal position, enter 0 in both the X and Y Tolerance fields
4. In the Search Area section, set the following values.

Angle +/-
Enter the number of degrees by which the part can vary from nominal and still pass inspection.
For example, a value of 5.00 would cause the system to search for the feature within 5° of
nominal. This value enables an inspection to successfully find components when they are
rotationally skewed on the pad. If Angle +/- is set to 0, components could experience false
failures because the model cannot rotate enough to find the component accurately. However,
searching for components at ± n° can increase inspection time.
For most features, a typical value is between 5.00 and 15.00. Because fiducials are accurately
placed on the board, a typical value for fiducials is 2.00 or 3.00. For circular fiducials, the angular
search can be set to 0.00.

Width and Height

Enter the dimensions of the search area, measured in millimeters. The search area defines the
area within which a component must be found to pass inspection.

X and Y
Enter the X and Y coordinates for the center of the search area. To center the tolerance area
around its nominal position, enter 0 in both the X and Y Tolerance fields.
5. Click OK to save the properties and close the Unit Template Properties dialog box.

158 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Unit Templates

Setting Search Levels

When a model is built, it can be defined and saved with different levels of resolution, with level 0
being the highest resolution (containing the most detail), and levels 1 and higher each containing
progressively less detail. Inspections can search for a match by comparing a feature to the model at
a specific resolution level. As part of the unit template properties, you can specify the resolution
levels at which to search. The search begins at the maximum specified search level (that is, at the
lowest possible resolution), and if no match is found, continues searching at the next (more detailed)
level, until the minimum search level has been checked or until a match is found.

Search levels influence the speed and reliability of inspections. The higher the minimum and
maximum levels are set, the less detail used when searching for a match with the model examples
during inspections.
● Therefore, higher-numbered search levels result in faster searches, but lower reliability of the
model, with a possibility of higher false call rates.
● The lower the minimum and maximum search levels, the slower the search, but the inspection
results are more reliable.

➢ To change minimum and maximum search levels

1. Open the Unit Template Editor:
● In the Unit Template Editor, click or select Edit > Properties.
● In the Assembly Editor, right-click a unit task or unit template and then select Edit Template
Properties or click .
2. In the Unit Template Properties dialog box, click the Search tab.
3. In the Search area, set the following properties:
● In the Minimum Search Level field, enter the level at which the search will end. This is the
lowest number level (that is, the highest resolution), that will be searched.
● In the Maximum Search Level field, enter the level at which the search will begin. This is
the highest number level (that is, the lowest resolution) that will be searched.
● In the Timeout Period/Seconds field, enter the number of seconds the system should search
for a part before timing out.
4. Click OK.

Notes:
i ● If the value entered in the Maximum Search Level field exceeds the number of levels in the
model, the search begins at the highest possible level.
● The value entered in the Minimum Search Level field must be greater than the Minimum
Search Level set for the model (see Setting Search Levels for Models on page 213).

CyberOptics Corporation 159

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Correcting for Height During Inspections

(Measurement Systems Only)
For the cameras on the QX Series System to correctly locate an object, that object must lie within the
system's plane of calibration. The taller the object, the more likely it is to fall outside the plane of
calibration. In measurement machines, you can compensate for this and correct position errors
caused by the height of an object by adjusting the unit template properties.
1. Open the Unit Template for the unit task or template and click .
2. In the Unit Template Properties dialog box, click the Search tab.
3. Under the Miscellaneous heading, select one of the following Height Correction options to
correct for position errors caused by the height of an object.
● None: Select this to bypass stereo height correction.
● Stereo: Select this to perform stereo height correction during inspections. Use this option
when the height of the component is unknown. If you use pre-oven measurement processes,
you must select this option. This option increases the inspection time.
● Manual: Select this to manually enter the height of the object. The system uses the value you
enter in the Height field to estimate the necessary correction in the position of the object.
This option is a compromise between the None and Stereo options, allowing the system to
correct for position errors caused by the object's height, but yielding a faster inspection time
than the Stereo option.
4. If you set Height Correct to Manual, enter the actual or estimated height of the component,
measured in millimeters.
5. Click OK.

160 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Unit Templates

Aligning Tasks and Images

When you open a local template in either the Composite Template Editor or Unit Template Editor, the
unit or composite tasks are positioned over the board image in the Main View pane according to the
locators defined in the assembly. If the task and the underlying image are not correctly aligned
because the fiducials are not working correctly, you can temporarily move the task to align with the
image. This procedure enables you to test the effectiveness of the template even if the fiducials are
not working properly. You also need to align the image in this way if you are working with a
template opened from the system repository.

➢ To align tasks with images

1. Open a unit template:
● Load an image in the Assembly Editor. Then open a template in the Composite Template
Editor or Unit Template Editor.
● Open a system template using the Launch Pad or System Manager. Then in the Composite
Template Editor or Unit Template Editor, load an image.
2. In the Main View pane, make sure nothing is selected.
3. Click .
4. In the Main View pane, click the cross hair and drag it to the desired position.
The system moves the underlying image according to the movement of the task and resets the
task on the image so that the task icon is centered in the display area.

Notes
● Changes to the alignment are not saved with the template. To fix the actual alignment, adjust the
fiducial definitions in the parent template.
● When you align a task as described above, the coordinates for the task do not change because it
is the image underneath the task that actually moves, not the task. However, moving a task
within its parent template editor (within the root task, for example) does alter its locations as
defined by its CAD coordinates, and should be avoided.

CyberOptics Corporation 161

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Centering Templates around Task Icons

Both composite and unit templates should be centered around the nominal position of the task (that
is, around the X and Y values specified in the Task Properties dialog box).

➢ To center unit templates

1. With the template open in the Unit Template Editor, select Edit > Task Icon.
2. In the Resize Task Icon dialog box, click Center.
3. Click OK.

➢ To center composite templates

1. Do one of the following:
● In the Composite Template Editor, click .
● In the Assembly Editor, right-click a composite task or template and select Edit Template
Properties.
2. In the Composite Template Properties dialog box, enter 0 for both the X and Y coordinates to
center the task icon around the nominal position of the task.
3. Click OK.

Note: You can reposition the unit template definition only if no models are associated with the unit
i template; otherwise, the position and extent of the template are automatically defined by the model.

162 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Unit Templates

Resizing Unit Task Icons

If no models are associated with a unit template, you can resize the task icon. To resize a task, you
change the dimensions of the template upon which the task is based. However, if you associate a
model with the template, the task icon automatically adopts the extent of the model geometry and
you cannot resize it.

If no model has been built for the template, then you can resize the task icon numerically, visually
by dragging the boundaries of the icon, or visually by redrawing the icon. If you visually resize or
redraw the task icon, the tolerance box and search areas are automatically resized proportionately.

➢ To resize task icons numerically

1. With the template open in the Unit Template Editor, select Edit > Task Icon.
2. In the Resize Task Icon dialog box, type the appropriate values in the Width and Height text
boxes.
3. Click OK.

➢ To resize task icons visually

1. With the template open in the Unit Template Editor, click and then click the Main View
image to zoom in on the feature, if necessary.
2. Click .
3. In the Main View image, click and drag the boundary of the task icon to the desired size.

➢ To redraw task icons for new templates

1. With the template open in the Unit Template Editor, click and then click the Main View
image to zoom in on the feature, if necessary.
2. Click .
3. In the Main View image, click and drag to draw the task icon to the desired size.

Notes
● If the task icon is not clearly visible in the Unit Template Editor, select View > Task Appearance.
In the Task Appearance dialog box, clear any Unit Task Options as needed except Task Icon and
then click Apply.
● If you associate multiple models with a unit template, the task icon adopts the extent of the first
model in the Good Models list that appears on the Models tab of the Unit Template Properties
dialog box.

CyberOptics Corporation 163

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Viewing Undefined Templates

After you fully program a template, you can mark the template as defined to indicate that no
further editing is necessary. You can then display the list of undefined templates in the Assembly
Editor or System Manager, allowing you to track the templates that require further modifications. In
the Unit Template Editor, you can quickly open the next undefined template, enabling you to define
one template after another without having to return to the Assembly Editor.

➢ To mark templates as defined

1. Do one of the following:
● In the Unit Template Editor or the Composite Template Editor click .
● In the Assembly Editor, right-click a task or template and select Edit Template Properties.
2. In the Properties dialog box, select the General tab.
3. In the Defined field, select Yes.
4. Click OK.

➢ To open undefined templates in the Unit Template Editor

1. In the Unit Template Editor, when you are done working with the currently open template, do
one of the following:
● If you have not completely defined the current template, select File > Load Next Template to
save the changes to the current template and open the next undefined template.
● If you have completely defined the current template, select File > Flag As Defined, Load Next
to mark the current template as defined, save the changes, and open the next undefined
template.
2. If a message appears stating that the current template is the last in the list, click Yes to view the
first undefined template in the list, or No to keep the current template loaded.

➢ To list undefined templates in the Assembly Editor

1. In the Assembly Editor Find pane, select Templates from the Find list.
2. Click .
3. In the Find text box, type *.
4. To list all undefined templates, click Search.

➢ To list undefined templates in the System Manager

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Manager.
2. In the System Manager, select View > Show Undefined.

Notes
● In the Assembly Editor, if is not selected, the search finds both defined and undefined
templates.
● In the System Manager, to again show all items in the system repository, select File > Reset.

164 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Unit Templates

Cloning Templates
To decrease the time it takes to program assemblies, you can clone templates (both unit and
composite). Cloning enables you to group a series of templates that share the same properties. For
example, if a series of templates all define various 0805 resistor type components, all the templates
can be cloned so that one master template defines many other templates. The master template and
all of its clones are identical; when you make changes to a clone or its master, all the templates
within the cloning relationship are affected by the changes.

When you populate an assembly by importing CAD data that includes part type and part number
information, cloning relationships can be created automatically. However, when part type
information is not included in the CAD file or when you need to change the cloning relationships,
you can manually clone the templates in the System Manager.

➢ To manually clone templates in the System Manager

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Manager.
2. In the Templates list, select the templates to clone.
You can select templates by clicking each template name or by filtering the information using the
Filter box for the templates.
3. From the Edit menu, click Clones of.
4. In the Master Selector dialog box, navigate to the Library containing the template to use for the
master.
5. In the Templates list, select the master template from which to clone a new template.
6. Click Open.
The system clones the new templates and indents the template names in the Templates list
beneath the master template from which they were cloned.

CyberOptics Corporation 165

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Uncloning Templates
Cloned templates are represented in Assembly Editor and Composite Template Editor in the Tree
View by the symbol. In the System Manager, cloned templates are indented under the master
template. To see the list of all clones for a master template, select the master template and then select
View > Expand Master.

You can break the link between a cloned template and its master by uncloning it.

➢ To unclone templates in the Assembly Package Layers Setup dialog

box
1. Load an image in the assembly.
2. Import the CAD data into the assembly. On the CAD Import Wizard - CAD Import Process
page, select the option to automatically define the template libraries by accepting the default
structure and naming conventions (recommended).
3. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly > Edit Layers.
4. In the Assembly Package Layers Setup dialog box, do the following:
a. Select the package type from the list with the component layer to unclone.
b. Click and to scroll through the components that are clones of the selected
package type. View each instance and compare them with the package type template. If an
instance looks visually different from its package type template, select the corresponding
check box in the Use Component Layer area.
5. Click OK.

➢ To unclone templates in the System Manager

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Manager.
2. In the System Manager, select the cloned template from the Templates list.
3. From the Edit menu, click Un-Clone.

166 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working with Models

Working with Models

The QX Series System uses models to capture the natural variability of components. A model is
formed from a series of examples that capture how a component looks and how it varies under
normal conditions. The QX Series System learns from experience how an object varies, enabling the
system to become more discriminating over time.

When you create the model, you define the geometry for the component being modeled and then
show the system a series of good examples of this component. After the model is fully seeded, the
QX Series software successively refines its estimate of what the component should look like and how
it can legitimately vary. During inspections, the QX Series System determines which image
variations are acceptable and fails unacceptable variations.

Note: If the models of the components loaded from the library are already well-defined and match
i the assembly, you can skip “Define the component” step and use the existing models.

HOW TO
PROGRAM AN
ASSEMBLY ON A
NEW SYSTEM

Set up the
hardware

Create a new
assembly

Capture the
image data

Import the
Define the CAD data Define the
template model
properties, geometry
such as
search and
tolerance HOW TO Define the HOW TO
areas DEFINE A fiducials DEFINE A Seed the model
COMPONENT COMPONENT (min. five
TEMPLATE MODEL examples)

Save the
template
Save the
Define a Define the Define a
model
component components component
template model

CyberOptics Corporation 167

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Creating a Component Model

Models in the system repository can be associated with any template in any assembly, but models
created within an assembly can only be accessed within that assembly until the models are
committed to the system repository. Models created from within a template are oriented the same as
the template and thus match the CAD data.

More complex models, such as text inspections or joint inspections require Composite templates. For
information about creating these types of models, see Adding Tasks Manually on page 222.

➢ To define a model for a component

1. In the Assembly Editor, load an image sequence or a set of images.
2. Select Collect > Start.
3. After the inspection is finished, select Assembly > Training Sets to open the Local Training
Sets dialog box.

4. Select the first template (non-fiducial) from the list and click Open.
5. In the Unit Template editor click .
The Model Editor opens with the current board image displayed and the default task icon placed
over the component at the correct orientation.
6. Select the Geometry tab if it is not already showing.
7. Refer to the following topics to edit the model geometry:
● Center and size the task icon as described in Positioning Model Task Icons on page 175.
The name of a component type can help you to determine the size of the component.
Component sizes are defined by a four-digit code representing the length and width. This
code is usually expressed in inches. For example, a 1206 capacitor is 0.12 inches long and 0.06
inches wide. (Component thickness is not included in the size code.) Table 4 lists some
common component types with their approximate sizes.
● Adjust the active area as described in Defining Active Areas for Component Models on page
176 and Sizing Active Areas on page 180.
When you create or size a task icon, the active area is automatically created proportionally to
the task size as set in the System Properties> Miscellaneous tab. By default, this value is 0.1
mm larger than the task.
8. To apply the changes, click . The changes are applied to all the examples in the
model.
9. When the model is defined, populate the model as described in Working With Examples on page
184.

168 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working with Models

Table 4. Common Passive Component Settings (IPC610E Class 2)

Name Metric Task Task Active Active Tolerance Tolerance Search Search
Name Size Size Area Area X Y Area X Area Y
X Y X Y

0402 1005 1.0 0.5 1.2 0.7 1.5 1.0 1.7 1.2

0603 1608 1.6 0.8 1.8 1.0 2.2 1.6 2.4 1.8

0805 20125 2.0 1.25 2.2 1.45 2.6 2.5 2.8 2.7

1206 3216 3.2 1.6 3.4 1.8 3.8 3.2 4.0 3.4

1210 3225 3.2 2.5 3.4 2.7 3.8 5.0 4.0 5.2

1812 4832 4.8 3.2 5.0 3.4 5.5 6.8 5.7 7.0

Notes:
● Table 4 refers to settings for pre-reflow inspections.
● Task Sizes and Active Areas are set at Model level. The Active Area defaults to a pre-set size
based on the task size. The default value can be changed in the System
Properties>Miscellaneous tab.
● Tolerance and Search Areas are set at the Unit Template properties.

CyberOptics Corporation 169

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Creating Models Manually

You can create a new, blank models from within any of the editors, and although typically not as
efficient, you can also create new models in the system repository. These methods are described
below. After creating a blank model, define and build the model as described in Creating a
Component Model on page 168.

➢ To create a new model from the Unit Template Editor

1. With a template loaded in the Unit Template Editor, click in the Details pane.
2. In the Model Selector dialog box, select or create the library where the new model will reside.
3. Type the name for the new model.
4. Click Open.
The Model Editor opens with a default task icon placed over the feature.

➢ To create a new model from the Assembly or Composite Template

Editors
1. In the Assembly Editor or Composite Template Editor, click Inspect.
2. Select a task representing the feature to be modeled.
3. In the Details pane, click .
The Model Editor opens with a default task icon.

➢ To create a new model in the system repository

1. On the Launch Pad, click Open Model.
2. In the Model Selector dialog box, do one of the following:
● Select an existing library where the model will reside.
● Create a new library by clicking . In the New Library dialog box, enter the library name
and then click OK.
3. Click New.
4. In the Models list, type a unique name for the new model.
5. Click Open.

170 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working with Models

Opening Existing Models

You can edit a model that is local to a specific assembly or one that is stored in the system repository
(and is therefore available to be shared among assemblies).

➢ To open a model local to an assembly

Use one of the following methods to open a model, depending on where you are working within the
application:
● In a list in the Assembly Editor or Composite Template Editor, right-click the desired model name
and select Launch Model Editor.
● Select a task in the Panel Layout, Inspection Results, or Details pane and then click .
● In the Model Editor, select File > Open Model. In the Model Selector dialog box, select the
desired library and model and then click Open.
● In the Unit Template Editor, select the template properties and select the Model tab. Double-click
the model in the good model list.

➢ To open a model from the system repository

Use one of the following methods to open a shared model in the system repository:
● On the Launch Pad, click Open Model. In the Model Selector dialog box, select the collection
from which you want to load the model. Then, select the desired library and model and click
Open.
● In the System Manager, double-click a model in the Models list.

Loading Images in the Model Editor

The Model Editor contains several panes that display different images:
● The Main View pane displays the image patch for the example that is currently selected in the
Examples pane. If no examples have been defined for the model, the Main View pane contains
an image of the entire board or is blank. If the Main View pane is blank, you must load an image
in the Model Editor before you can start to define the model.
● The Tester pane, which allows you to test the model against an image and to seed the model
with examples, displays an image for an entire board (although the image may be enlarged, so
that only a portion of the board is visible). If the Tester pane is blank, you must load an image in
the Model Editor before you can test the model definition or seed the model.
● The Examples pane displays image patches of the models examples. You do not load images in
the Examples pane; new image patches appear in this pane only after they have been added as
examples to the model.

➢ To load images in the Model Editor

1. In the Model Editor, select File > Load Image.
2. In the Open dialog box, select the library in which the desired image is stored.
3. Select the desired image from the list of image names.
4. Click Open.
The selected image is loaded in either the Main View pane (if the model has no examples) or the
Tester pane (if the model does have examples).

CyberOptics Corporation 171

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Saving Models
Saving a model saves the model geometry (task icon, active areas, and inactive areas) and the
model's examples. You can also create a copy of an existing model using the Save As command

➢ To save a model
● Click to save the model and keep the Model Editor open.
● Click to save the model and close the Model Editor.

➢ To save a copy of a model

1. In the Model Editor, select File > Save Model As.
2. In the Save Model As dialog box, type the new model name.
3. Do one of the following:
● Select the library where the model will reside.
● Create a new library by clicking . In the New Library dialog box, enter the library name
and click OK.
4. Click Save.

Notes
● When you first create a model in the Model Editor, you must click Build before you can save the
model or save a copy of the model.
● If you opened a model from the system repository, changes are applied to the system repository.
Any assembly that uses this model is updated when you open the assembly in the Inspection
Station.
● If you opened a model from an assembly, changes are applied only to the current assembly. To
apply local changes to the system repository, you must separately commit the data. This enables
you to test any changes within the current assembly before committing them to the system
repository.
● After you save a copy of the original model, the Model Editor shows the new model. Any
subsequent changes to the new model do not affect the original.

172 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working with Models

Deleting Models
Models can be deleted directly from a local assembly or from the system repository. However, if no
templates within an assembly use a model, that model is automatically removed from the assembly
when the assembly is next saved.

Caution: Deleting models from the system repository permanently removes the models from the
system. The action cannot be undone.

➢ To delete models from local assembly

1. On the Launch Pad, click Open Assembly.
2. In the Assembly Editor, select File > Open Assembly.
3. From the Find list in the Assembly Properties dialog, from the Library column, choose a Model.
4. Right-click the models and choose Remove all examples.
Note: You can also choose multiple models and delete examples.
5. A confirm message dialog appears. Click Yes.
Note: The number of examples for the selected models is changed to 1 and not 0. This is
because, the QX Series always assigns a checkerboard example for all the new models.

➢ To delete models from system repository

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Manager.
2. In the System Manager window, select the model to delete in the Models list.
3. Select Edit > Delete Selected.
4. In the confirmation message, click OK.

To quickly view unused items in the System Manager, select View > Show Unused. To again show
all items in the system repository, select File > Reset.

CyberOptics Corporation 173

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Editing Model Geometry

When you create a model, you must define the geometry for the component being modeled before
showing the system a series of good examples of this component. The model geometry consists of
the size, position, and angle of the task icon, active areas, and inactive areas. After the model has
been defined, you can still change the model geometry.

When you edit the model geometry, all the examples in the model are affected by the change, so
make sure that any changes you make are correct for all possible variations of the component and
thus the model.

➢ To edit the model geometry

1. Open the model in the Model Editor.
The Main View pane displays the model's first example. Typically, this is the example used to
initially define the model geometry and is now used to edit the geometry.
2. In the Model Editor Main View pane, select the Geometry tab.
3. To use a different example for editing the geometry, in the Examples pane, scroll through the
examples and click the example to use.
4. Refer to the following topics to edit the model geometry:
● Positioning Model Task Icons on page 175
● Defining Active Areas for Component Models on page 176
● Defining Inactive Areas on page 181
5. Click to rebuild the model with the updated geometry.
The system applies the geometry changes to every example in the model.

Note: Click to reverse recent changes to the model geometry. Any changes to the
i model geometry or example alignment made after the last build will be removed.

174 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working with Models

Positioning Model Task Icons

The task icon is a graphical representation of the model's size and shape. The center mark of the task
icon must be centered over the feature or component body to return accurate offsets during the
inspections. The offset defines the part location relative to the CAD data coordinates.

As part of defining a model's geometry, you can move, rotate, or resize the task icon. Changing the
model geometry changes the alignment of the task icon in all of the model's examples.

Active Area (green)

Task Icon (cyan)

Center Mark

➢ To move or rotate the task icon

1. Open the model in the Model Editor.
2. In the Model Editor Main View pane, select the Geometry tab.
3. Click .
4. Do one of the following:
● To move the task icon, click and drag the center mark of the task icon. When you are done, the
center mark should be centered over the feature.
● To rotate the task icon, click and drag a corner of the task icon.
5. Click to apply your changes.

➢ To redraw the task icon

To redraw the task icon, in the Main View pane, click and then drag a box around the
component. Using the Task Icon tool deletes any search areas defined for the model.

➢ To resize task icons numerically

1. With the template open in the Model Editor, click and double-click the task icon.
2. In the Extent dialog box, type the appropriate values in the Width and Height text boxes.
3. Click OK.

➢ To resize the task icon visually

1. With the model open in the model, click the Geometry tab
2. Click and then select the task icon.
3. Click and drag the boundary of the task to the size needed.

Notes
● Click to reverse recent changes to the model geometry. Any changes to the
model geometry or example alignment made after the last build will be removed.
● In addition to positioning the task icon for the entire model, you can adjust the alignment of the
task icon for individual examples.

CyberOptics Corporation 175

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Defining Active Areas for Component Models

Define active areas in a model to ensure that inspections capture all of the edge data of a feature or
component which results in more reliable inspections. Active areas should be sized 1.5 - 2 pixels (0.1
mm) larger than the model task icon. This is the default active areas size, which can be changed in
the System Properties - Miscellaneous tab.

If a task does not have an active area associated with it, the active areas is defined as the extent of
the model task icon.

You can use active areas to:

● Place more focus on important data in the model (such as polarity marks)
● Exclude irrelevant data in the model
● Define unique features on components to help with discrimination
● Reduce the amount of data required to process the model.

i Note: Do not place an active area inside an inactive area.

➢ To define SOTs
1. Double-click the component task to open the Unit Template Editor.
2. Click and draw a new task icon around the body of the component.
3. Click to open the Model Editor.
4. Click and draw a box around the pin/body joint at the top of the 2-pin side.
5. Right-click and select Reflect in Y to create a second pin active area.
6. Select the active area, right-click and select Reflect in X to create a third pin active area.
Reposition the lone pin active area at the pin/body joint.
Active
Area

SOT
Active
Area

7. Click .
8. Click to save and exit the Model Editor.

176 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working with Models

➢ To define D-Packs
1. Double-click the component task to open the Unit Template Editor.
2. Click and draw a new task icon around the body of the component.
3. Click to open the Model Editor.
4. Click and draw active areas around each side of the component body at the pin/body joint.
Active
Area

D-Pack
Active
Area

5. Click .
6. Click to save and exit the Model Editor.

CyberOptics Corporation 177

Chapter 5: Programming Components

➢ To define SOICs and QFPs

1. Double-click the component task to open the Unit Template Editor.
2. Click and draw a new task icon around the body of the component.
3. Click and draw an active area around the body of the component, inside the task area.
4. Click and draw an inactive area inside the body of the component to exclude the inside of
the part from the inspection.

Inactive
Areas

Active
Areas

5. Click .
6. Click to save and exit the Model Editor.

Alternate Method

To use only active areas:

1. Click 2-way (SOICs) or 4-way (QFPs).
2. Click and draw an active area along one side at the pin/body joint. Active areas are
created automatically for the remaining side(s).

Active
Areas

178 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working with Models

➢ To define active areas for text tasks

Active area grids are useful when defining models for text. For good text discrimination, you
should typically divide a long text string into several shorter pieces of text using multiple active
areas.

i Note: If you define a Unit Template using the

when you build the model.
button, an active area is automatically created

1. With the model open in the Model Editor, click the Geometry tab. (If the Geometry tab is not
enabled, click Build to build the model or click Last Build to revert to the last build of the
model.)
2. Click the Active Area Grid Cell Tool button.
3. In the Main View image, click and drag to draw one cell of the active area grid.
4. Click the Active Area Grid Tool button.

5. In the Main View image, click and drag to outline the size of the entire active area grid. Multiple
active areas, scaled to be equally sized, are created to fill the grid area. Note that the border
between two active areas may divide a single character, so that each active area includes just part
of the character; this is acceptable.
6. Click Build to apply your changes.

CyberOptics Corporation 179

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Sizing Active Areas

Active areas are set by default to be 0.1 mm larger than the task icon. You can adjust this for
individual models or set the active area size globally.

For symmetrical features such as circular fiducials, active areas should be centered on the feature
and sized symmetrically by setting the numeric X and Y values as described below.

➢ To size and position active areas numerically

1. With the model open in the Model Editor, click the Geometry tab.
2. Click and then double-click the active area.
3. In the Active Area Properties dialog box, in the X and Y text boxes, enter the coordinates that
represent the offset from the center of the task icon. (Typically, you would enter 0 in each field, or
click Center.)
4. To resize the active area, enter the appropriate values in the Width and Height boxes.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Build to apply your changes.

➢ To resize active areas visually

1. With the model open in the model, click the Geometry tab
2. Click and then select the active area.
3. Click and drag the boundary of the active area to the size needed.
4. Click Build to apply your changes.

➢ To change the default active area size

1. In the Launch Pad, click System Properties.
2. Select the Miscellaneous tab.
3. In the Defaults for New Models section, set the Active Area in X and Y values.
4. Click OK.

180 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working with Models

Defining Inactive Areas

Inactive areas are used to exclude data from a model. This can improve performance by eliminating
changeable and unnecessary data from the model, thus speeding up the inspection process. For
example, an inactive area can exclude text from resistors or the black body of a large QFP.

i Note: Do not create an active area that is fully enclosed inside an inactive area.

➢ To define inactive areas

1. Double-click the component task to open the Unit Template Editor.
2. Click and draw a new task icon around the body of the component.
3. Click to open the Model Editor.
4. Click or and draw around the area to exclude from inspection.
5. Click .
6. Click to save and exit the Model Editor.

CyberOptics Corporation 181

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Reusing Model Geometries

Saving the model geometry saves the size and position of the task icon, active areas, and inactive
areas, but not the examples. You can then load the geometry definition into a new model for a
component that is similar, possibly of the same size.

➢ To save model geometries

1. With the desired model open in the Model Editor, select the Geometry tab.
2. Select File > Save Geometry.
3. If this is the first time you have saved any model geometries, in the New Library dialog box,
enter a library name and then click OK.
4. In the Geometry Selector dialog box, select or create a library, and then enter a unique name
that describes the geometry you are saving.
5. Click Save.

➢ To load saved geometries from a file

1. With the new model open in the Model Editor, select the Geometry tab.
2. Select File > Load Geometry.
3. In the Geometry Selector dialog box, select a library and then select the geometry to load.
4. Click Open.
5. Click to rebuild the model using the new geometry.

➢ To load geometries from another model

1. With the new model open in the Model Editor, select the Geometry tab.
2. Select File > Load Geometry From Model.
3. In the Model Selector dialog box, select a library and then select the model that contains the
geometry to load.
4. Click Open.
5. Click to rebuild the model using the new geometry.

Note: You can also save model geometries from the Assembly Editor or Composite Template Editor.
i In the Tree View or Find panes, right-click a model and select Save Geometry.

182 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working with Models

Changing Grid Settings

The grid settings feature of the Model Editor helps to align task icons and active areas more easily.
After you enable the snap-to-grid feature, specify the distance between an invisible set of grid lines.
When you use the editor tools to edit the position of an object, the system forces the object to align
with the nearest intersection of grid lines.

➢ To change grid settings

1. In the Model Editor, select View > Grid Settings.
2. In the Grid Settings dialog box, ensure that the Snap to Grid check box is selected.
3. In the Grid Size (millimetres) box, enter the desired distance between the grid lines.
4. Click OK.

CyberOptics Corporation 183

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Working With Examples

When you initially define a model, you seed it with a limited number of examples that broadly
define the allowable variations for the component or feature. Seeding can be done manually or
automatically. However, models should be trained over a period of time to reduce false calls by
including all the natural variation in a component. Fully populated models typically contain
between 10 and 150 examples, which can come from actual inspection results in production.

The system automatically prevents you from inadvertently adding existing examples to a model.

Viewing Examples
You can change the way examples are displayed in the Model Editor by increasing the number of
examples visible at a time (increasing the number of columns) or by sorting the examples.

➢ To change the number of columns in the Examples pane

● In the Model Editor Examples pane, select the number of columns to display in the Columns list.

➢ To sort examples
1. In the Model Editor Examples pane, select the option from the Sort By list: Unsorted, Probability,
Image Brightness, Tester Similarity or creation time.
2. If you selected an option other than Unsorted, do one of the following:
● Click to sort the list from top to bottom (that is, from lowest value to highest).
● Click to sort the list from bottom to top (that is, from highest value to lowest).

Note: Choosing Unsorted in the Sort By list presents examples in the order in which the examples
i were added to the model.

184 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Examples

Setting the Maximum Number of Examples for a Model

To reduce the amount of time it takes to program a board, the QX Series application provides various
ways of automatically adding examples to models. Models should contain enough examples to
reflect the allowable variations in the component or feature (typically 10-150 examples). However,
models should not be over-trained; having an excess of examples increases the amount of time
required for inspections. You can set a maximum number of examples allowed for a model.

➢ To set the number of examples

1. Do one of the following:
● In the Model Editor, click .
● In list of models, right-click the model and then select Edit Model Properties.
● In the Unit Template Editor Details pane, click .
2. In the Model Properties dialog box, select the General tab.
3. Specify the maximum number of examples allowed for the model.
4. Click OK.

Notes
● If you set the maximum number of examples to fewer than the current number of examples in
the model, existing examples will be discarded to keep the number of examples at or below the
limit.
● After the maximum number of examples has been reached, either new examples will not be
added, or existing examples will be overwritten with new examples to keep the total from
exceeding the maximum. Whether existing examples are overwritten depends on the method
you use to add the models and how you have configured the QX Series System.

CyberOptics Corporation 185

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Automatically Seeding the Model

When you first define a model, it contains only one example.You must add at least five examples to
the model initially; the quickest way to do this is to automatically seed a model with examples from
an existing training set. The process uses an existing training set and additional parameters
provided to sort through the training set examples in three stages. If selected to do so, it will auto-
align the examples after each stage of the process.

➢ To seed the model automatically

Follow the procedure as described in To automatically seed a fiducial model on page 132.

➢ To train Unit Templates with the new model

After seeding, you can quickly train all Unit Templates that contain the model.

Note: The General Training process uses the Good Examples Ratio set in the System Properties. If
i you changed the ratio during the auto-seeding process and wish to use the new setting, open the
System Properties> Miscellaneous tab and change the default Good Examples Ratio setting.

1. In the Assembly editor, set the master unit templates that will be trained to undefined. To do
this:
a. In the Assembly Editor Find pane, select Template from the Find list.
b. Click .
The system displays all the relevant templates in the list.
c. In the list of templates, select the template to change.
d. Press F11 to change the template from defined to undefined. The state of the template
(defined or undefined) is shown in the Unit Template properties.
2. In the Assembly editor, select Assembly> General Training. Each Unit Template will be updated
with the new model and then set to Defined.

186 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Examples

Adding Examples from the Model Editor

Another way to seed the model is by adding examples from within the Model Editor. You can add
examples from the Model Editor at any time, but after the model is seeded, there are other, quicker
methods to fully populate the model with examples (such as using training sets or the update
models feature) rather than adding them individually within the Model Editor.

➢ To add examples from the model editor

1. Open a model in the Model Editor.
2. If no image appears in the Tester pane, load an image in the Model Editor.
3. If the Build button is available, click Build. (The Build button is available only if changes have
been made to the model.)
4. If needed, in the Tester pane, change the General and Angle search parameters to specify how
the Model Editor should search for the feature.
● If you opened the Model Editor from one of the Editors, these parameters are automatically
entered based on the properties defined for the unit template.
● If you open the Model Editor from the System Manager, default values are used. These values
apply only to searches within the Tester pane; changing these fields does not change the
corresponding values in the Unit Template Properties dialog box.
5. Zoom in on an example of the feature being modeled.
6. Click .
7. For each feature to use as an example:
a. On the image in the Tester pane, click and drag a box around the feature.
b. In the status bar along the bottom of the Model Editor, view the results: probability, X and Y
coordinates, angle, and scale.
c. If necessary, select the task icon, click , and then drag the task icon to align it with the
feature.
d. Do one of the following:
– If the example is acceptable, click to add the example to the model.
– If you do not want to include the example in the model, select the task icon and click
to remove the model task icon from the Tester pane. This does not actually delete the
example from the model.
8. Select to save your changes and exit the Model Editor.

Notes
● Although only one feature can be found within any one search area, you can draw multiple
search boxes so that you can build multiple examples into the model simultaneously.
● When you add an example from the Tester pane, the task icon turns blue to indicate that it
represents an example in the model rather than the result of a search. You will no longer be able
to reposition or manipulate the task icon in the Tester pane, but the task icon remains as a
reminder that the example exists.
● You can sort examples of a model by time. Thereby making it easier to search for wrong
examples.

CyberOptics Corporation 187

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Adding Individual Examples to a Model

You can add specific inspection tasks as model examples directly from the Assembly Editor,
Composite Template Editor, or Unit Template Editor.

➢ To add individual examples to a model

1. Perform an inspection from one of the Editors.
2. Select the task to add as an example to the model either in the image or from a list, such as the
Inspection Results pane.
3. In the Details pane, examine the results of the inspection.
4. Reposition the task icon over the image patch in the Details pane if it is not centered on the
component:
● To move the task icon, click and drag the center mark.
● To rotate the task icon, click a corner of the icon and drag to the desired angle.
5. Click to add the currently selected task as an example in the model.

Notes

If the Enable model validation check box is selected in System Properties > Miscellaneous tab:
● whenever a new example is added from Composite Template Editor/Unit Template Editor, the
model is rebuilt. The updated model is then used to inspect a validation training set. If any
example(s) in the validation training set passes, it indicates that some bad examples have been
added to the model and a warning message appears to inform that the validation has failed. You
can either choose to keep the updated model or revert back to the original model.
● when you click in the Assembly Editor to add the currently selected task as an example to
the model, a warning message appears to notify that model validation is enabled.
– Clicking Yes adds the task as an example to the model without any validation.
– Clicking No closes the message box and allows you to open the Composite or Unit Template
Editor to add the example to the model after validation.

188 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Examples

Adding Failed Examples to a Model

When you inspect an assembly, you can add failed tasks that are acceptable as model examples
directly from the Assembly Editor. If you have more than one failed task for a component,
CyberOptics recommends that you add the best failure (the failure with a probability value closest
to 1) to the model.

➢ To add failed examples to a model

1. Perform an inspection in the Assembly Editor
2. In the Inspection Results pane, click .
3. In the Results Options dialog box, select Show Failures and clear Show Passes.
4. In the Sorting lists, select Probability and Descending.

5. Click OK.
The system displays a list of the names of the failed tasks and the reasons for their failures in the
Inspection Results pane, with the best result placed at the top of the pane.
6. Click the first result in the Inspection Results pane (the best result) and analyze the reason for
its failure in the Details pane.
7. If the result is a false failure, click to add the example to the model.
8. The system adds the example to the model and displays a confirmation message in the status bar.
If the system cannot add the example to the model, a message box appears.

CyberOptics Corporation 189

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Deleting Examples from a Model

You may want to delete an example from a model if it is not a good representation of the component
or feature. If a model has been overtrained and the number of examples within the model is too
large, you can also subsample the examples, which randomly discards a specified proportion of the
examples.

When using the CyberOptics template library to program models on the QX Series System, delete
the examples from the model and add models from your specific assembly.

➢ To delete specific examples

1. In the Examples pane of the Model Editor, select the examples to delete.
● Click a single example in the Examples pane.
● Press and hold the CTRL key and click multiple examples.
● Press and hold the SHIFT key and click the first and last example in a sequence.
● Drag a box around adjacent examples to select them (the box you drag must encompass the
entire image patch of the example to select).
2. In the Examples pane, click .
The system places a red X over the deleted examples.
3. Click Build to rebuild the model without the deleted examples.

Note: To quickly delete all examples with a certain probability level, sort the examples in the Model
i Editor Examples pane by choosing Probability from the Sort By list. When you select an example, its
probability value appears in the Examples pane status bar. Use this information to select and delete
all examples with a certain probability level.

➢ To sub-sample model examples

Subsampling permanently removes a random subset of the examples from the current model.
Subsample overtrained models to improve discrimination, free up disk space, or reduce inspection
time.
1. In the Model Editor, select Model > Subsample.
2. In the Subsample the Model Examples dialog box, enter the number by which to reduce the
examples in the Sub-Sampling Factor box. For example, to use one of every five examples, enter 5.
3. Click OK.

190 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Examples

Aligning Examples
After the model is seeded or fully populated, you can view and update the model examples. If the
task icon is not correctly aligned with a particular model example, you can move or rotate the
individual example so that it correctly aligns with the model geometry. Aligning particular
examples does not change the model geometry or affect other examples; only the alignment of the
selected example is changed.

After you manually align model examples and achieve a relatively good fit, you can further refine
the example alignment by auto-aligning them. See Automatically Aligning Examples on page 193
for more information.

➢ To align an example
1. With the model open in the Model Editor, select the Alignment tab.
2. In the Examples pane, select the example to change.
The selected model is displayed on the Alignment tab.
3. On the Alignment tab, click .
4. Do any of the following:
● To align the model geometry with the example, click an edge or the center mark of the task
icon and drag it into position.
● To rotate the model geometry over the example, click a corner of the task icon and drag it into
position.
5. Click Build to rebuild the model with the updated example.

➢ To step through examples to find misalignments

1. With the model open in the Model Editor, select the Alignment tab.
2. In the Examples pane, select the first example.
The selected example is displayed in the Alignment tab.
3. For each model example:
a. On the Alignment tab, examine the example and if necessary, align it with the model
geometry.
b. Click to view the next example.
c. Click Build to rebuild the model.

CyberOptics Corporation 191

Chapter 5: Programming Components

➢ To quickly step through examples

1. With the model open in the Model Editor, select the Alignment tab.
2. In the Examples pane, select the first example.
The selected model is displayed in the Alignment tab.
3. On the Alignment tab, select the animation speed from the list. Select a slower speed if you are
likely to find misaligned examples, or a faster speed if you are confident that you will not have
to stop the animation to align an example.
4. Click .
The examples will automatically be displayed in sequence, with the model geometry
superimposed on each example.
5. If you see an example that is skewed or misaligned:
a. Click to stop the animation.
b. If necessary, click to scroll back to the misaligned example.
c. Use the editing tools to correctly align the example.
d. Click to restart the animation.
6. After you have looked at and aligned all the examples, click to stop the animation.
7. Click Build to rebuild the model.

192 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Examples

Automatically Aligning Examples

Refining a model using automatic alignment is an important part of the model training process. It
allows the system to improve the location of the individual examples in a way that is difficult to
achieve visually. This process leads to a model that performs more reliably in a production
environment.

When a model is auto-aligned, an existing model geometry is refitted to each example within the
model. The auto-align process is iterative; the software lays the model geometry over each example,
moves and rotates it to find the best fit, and recalculates the model position. Once all examples have
been processed, the model is rebuilt. The entire process is then repeated until the mean movement
for an iteration is within the value set. You may review the auto-alignment results for each example
and accept or reject the changes.

➢ To align examples
1. Open a model in the Model Editor.
2. In the Model Editor, click Auto-Align.

i Note: If Auto-Align is unavailable, click Build to build the model.

3. In the Auto-Align Model dialog box, specify the search options as described beginning with
Alignment Parameters on page 194. These parameters apply only to auto-alignment searches
and not to inspection criteria.

CyberOptics Corporation 193

Chapter 5: Programming Components

4. Click Auto-Align.
After the system completes one iteration of the refinement, the system averages the X and Y
values for each example and returns a mean movement value (in microns) to show how far the
model was moved to refit each example. It is this value that corresponds with the minimum
movement value. If the refinement process does not reach the minimum movement value, it stops
when it reaches the maximum iterations value instead.

5. Click or to scroll through the examples.

6. If the BEFORE example looks better than the AFTER example, click Revert.
7. When you are satisfied with the model refinements, click OK to close the Auto-Align dialog box.
8. In the Model Editor, click to save the model and exit the Model Editor.

Alignment Parameters
● Round body: Select Yes if the component and geometry (such as for a fiducial) are round. Select
No for model geometry that is not round.
● Reflection along X
Reflection along Y:
Use the reflection options to correct for rotational mismatches between the model geometry
and/or active area and the image patch. When selected (set to Yes) the system searches an
extended model area that includes the reflected area.
X axis is defined as the horizontal direction and the Y axis is considered to be in the vertical
direction.
Reflection options are only available when Round Body is set to No.
● Rotational Symmetry: When a component is reflected in both X and Y axis, the result is a
rotation of 180° . When selected (set to Yes) the system also searches for the part rotated 180° .
You can apply rotational symmetry only to symmetrical features such as squares, circles, and
rectangles.
● Search angle range: Enter a value between 0° and 45° to specify the search angle range to
use for the inspection. This option is only available when Reflection along X or Reflection along
Y is set to Yes.
● Min rotation angle (degree): Enter a value between 0° and 5° to specify the threshold at
which auto-alignment stops. When the average rotation angle and average movement of the
model geometry falls below this value, the auto-alignment stops.

194 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Examples

● Minimum Movement (µm): Enter the minimum movement between one iteration of the
refinement process and the next. The smaller the number you enter, the more accurate the
refinement process.
When the mean movement becomes less than or equal to this value, the refinement process
stops.
● Max Iterations: Enter the maximum number of iterations that the refinement process should
complete before stopping (10 is typical).
This value is used in conjunction with the value in the Minimum Movement μm value to limit
the number of times that the refinement process is applied to the examples. If the minimum
movement value is reached before the maximum iterations value is, the refinement process stops.

Discrimination
● Discrimination: Select the level of discrimination with which to build the model: Low, Medium,
High, or Custom. If you select the Custom option, additional discrimination options become
available.
The higher the level of discrimination applied to the model, the more successfully the model will
discriminate between good and bad components. By default, the discrimination is set to Low,
since this results in the fastest inspection and also typically results in better accuracy and
repeatability on pre-reflow boards.
Choose higher levels when setting up models for solder joint inspections, or for models used in
post-reflow inspections.
● Residuals: Select the type of residuals with which to build the model: Scalar or Vector. Vector
residuals can be used to improve discrimination. (Available only with Custom discrimination
option.)
● Weighted: Select whether to use weighted vector residuals (Yes or No). Weighted vector
residuals greatly improve discrimination, but inspection time is slower with this option.
(Available only with Custom discrimination option and Vector residuals.)
● Wavelet transform: Select whether to use wavelet transformations (Yes or No). Wavelet
transformations can be applied to the residuals, the edge data, or both. (Available only with
Custom discrimination option.)
● Optimisation: This text box is available only if you select the Custom discrimination option.
Select whether to optimize the model for Accuracy or Discrimination.
Select Accuracy (the default option) to increase the ability of the system to find the feature
when searching for the model. This option tends to smudge the edge data in the model.
Select Discrimination to sharpen the edge data in the model. This option is sometimes used for
smaller components to prevent the edges from smudging into each other.
● Fine Tuning: Select how to fine tune the model search: Best accuracy, Better accuracy, Good
accuracy and discrimination, Better discrimination, or Best discrimination. The default is Best
discrimination.
These options enable you to set the optimal ratio of accuracy to discrimination when searching
for the model. The Fine-Tuning property is useful, for example, when you choose a
Discrimination value of High to achieve good overall discrimination, but the system becomes
too discriminating by falsely rejecting some good examples. In this case, set the Fine-Tuning
property to be more accurate. Note, however, that fine-tuning the model can increase inspection
time.

CyberOptics Corporation 195

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Model Type
● Model Type: Select Grey to build the model as a gray type, which displays all the data
contained in the model.
Select Gradient to build the model as a gradient type, which pre-processes the data for the
model in order to highlight the edge data.

Grey Model Gradient

Type Model Type

● Colour: Select Yes to build the model as a color type. Because color models have a red, a green,
and a blue value for each pixel, color models contain three times as much data as gray models.
Therefore, assemblies containing color models take up more data storage space and take longer to
inspect than those with gray models. Select No to build the model as a gray type. Gray models
have a single gray value for each pixel.
● Compressed: This option is available only if you select Yes for the Colour option.
– Select Yes to compress the color model
– Select No to build the model as an uncompressed color type.
CyberOptics recommends that you compress color models to save data storage space and
improve inspection time. Compressed color models can be inspected in approximately the same
amount of time as gray models and use comparable amounts of storage space. Moreover, the
difference between the discriminative capabilities of compressed color models and
uncompressed color models is minimal. Models built as gray types cannot be compressed.
● Enhancement: Enter a value from 1 to 5 to increase hue saturation in the model, which makes
the image color more vivid. A value of 1 represents no enhancement, and a value of 5 is
maximum enhancement.

Active Areas
● Probability per Active Area: Select Yes to have the system report the result of the inspection
based on the probability of the worst failed active area. You can control the display of failed active
areas individually in the Task Appearance dialog box or globally on the Miscellaneous tab of
the System Properties dialog box.

Contrast Correction
● Enabled: Select whether to normalize the data in the model and correct for contrast.
Normalizing active areas separately results in better contrast in the diagnostics for individual
active areas and typically results in better discrimination.
Select Yes to help standardize the information contained in the model examples. By default, the
active areas are all normalized together. If you use multiple active areas to define the model
geometry, you can select additional normalization options.
● Correct Areas Separately: Select whether to correct each active area separately. If you set this
option to Yes, a probability fit value is returned for each active area rather than for the model as
a whole; for the model, the inspection uses the worst probability (the lowest) from the separate
active areas.
This option is available only if you select No in the Probability per Active Area field and select
Yes in the Enabled field.

196 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working With Examples

Editing the Examples in the Model

When you edit an example in the model, only the current example is affected by the change.

➢ To edit examples in the model

1. Open the Model Editor and click the Alignment tab.
2. In the Examples pane, scroll through the examples in the model and verify that they look
correct.
3. In the Main View pane, click the Move/Rotate Tool button to rotate skewed examples and
move misaligned examples.

Figure 7. Skewed Example and Misaligned Example

4. Click the Delete button to delete incorrect or poor examples.
The system places a red “X” over the examples marked for deletion.
5. When you are satisfied with the examples, click Build to rebuild the model.
The system builds the model and deletes any examples you had marked for deletion.
6. Click the Save and Exit button to apply the changes to the model and close the Model
Editor.

CyberOptics Corporation 197

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Working with Training Sets

Training sets are sets of tasks (shown as image patches with task icons) collected during inspections
that you can analyze, edit, and add as examples in a model. Each training set is associated with a
composite or unit template.

Training sets can be used in different ways to populate a model. The initial training set consists of
all instances of a template as they appear in the currently loaded image of the board; you can use
this to initially seed a model. Or you can create a production training set to ‘ learn’ the natural
variation of a component's appearance by seeing the component variation in large volume. Although
primarily used to test templates and models, you can also use good and bad training sets to
populate a model. For example, you could use a bad training set to add examples to a blank pad
model.

➢ To create production training sets

Production training sets contain tasks that have failed inspection in the production line (Inspection
Station or Rework Station); they may contain all failed tasks, or only those failed tasks with which
the operator disagreed (false failures).
1. Open an assembly in the Assembly Editor.
2. Select Assembly > Training Options.
3. In the Training Options dialog box, in the Actions field, select Add to Production Training
Set.

4. In the Training Option field, select Collect All Failures. This option creates a training set for all
failed tasks in the Assembly Editor, Inspection Station, or Rework Station. Saving all failed tasks
does not differentiate between false calls and genuine faults as reviewed by operators and
reworkers.
5. Click OK.
6. In the Assembly Editor, select the Train Assembly check box, then load and inspect an image.
7. Open the production training set to view the results.

198 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working with Training Sets

➢ To add examples from a training set

You can add all or select examples from a training set to build your model.
1. Open the training set in the Unit Template Editor.
2. On the Unit Template Editor toolbar, specify whether to collect passes, failures, or both when
adding examples to the model.
3. On the toolbar, specify the maximum number of examples that the model should have after the
system populates the model from the training set.
4. On the toolbar, select the Replace Originals check box to replace existing examples in the model
with new ones from the training set. Examples are only replaced if the total number of examples
in the model exceeds the maximum.
5. Click Auto-Seed.
The Auto-seeding settings dialog box opens.

6. In the Auto-seeding settings dialog box, set the parameters as described in To automatically
seed a fiducial model on page 132.
7. Click OK to begin the auto-seed process. When complete, the message “Model population
successful” is displayed.
8. Click .
9. If you are working with data in the system repository, commit the changes to the system
repository.
10. If you are adding examples from other than the initial training set, delete the training set after
adding examples to the model.

CyberOptics Corporation 199

Chapter 5: Programming Components

➢ To add specific examples from a training set

1. Open the training set in the Unit Template Editor.
2. In the Training Set pane, click Inspect to see which image patches pass inspection.
3. Analyze the results of the inspection by clicking each object in the Training Set pane and
viewing results in the Details pane. You may want to sort the results in the Training Set pane to
aid in your analysis.
4. In the Training Set pane, select the specific objects to add.
5. Right-click the selected objects, and then click Add Selected to Model.
The system adds the selected examples to the model and displays the results in the Unit
Template Editor status bar.
6. Click .
If you are working with data in the system repository, commit the changes to the system
repository.

200 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Working with Training Sets

➢ To delete the training set

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly > Training Sets to open the Local Training Sets dialog
box.

2. Click All to select all the displayed training set templates.

3. Click Delete to delete all the production training set templates.
4. If a message appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the templates, click Yes.
5. Click Close to close the Local Training Sets dialog box.
6. In the Assembly Editor, save the assembly.

➢ To create a training set from within the Unit Template Editor

1. Open the Unit Template Editor for the part of interest.
2. In the Training Set menu select Create from Model.
The system populates the Training Set pane with the examples from the model. From the Unit
Template Editor, you can select examples in the Training Set pane and then:
● Review examples in the Main view and Details pane.
● Click to remove all examples from the model.

CyberOptics Corporation 201

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Advanced Editing
The QX Series software provides many levels of programming and adjusting assemblies. This
section describes advanced editing techniques you can use to further define and maintain
assemblies.

Adding Tasks Manually

Typically, the assembly is populated with tasks using the CAD Import Wizard. If you need to add a
task that was not included in the CAD data, see Adding Tasks Manually on page 222 for detailed
instructions.

Loading Properties From an Existing Template

To save programming time, you can define a unit template with properties similar to or the same as
an existing unit template. This enables you to apply the properties of the existing template to the
new template without editing the name or storage location of the existing template.

➢ To load properties
1. With a unit template open in the Unit Template Editor, select File > Load From.
2. In the Master Selector dialog box, specify the library and the template from which to load the
properties.
3. Set the Copy Model From Template check box as follows:
● Select the check box to copy model geometry and examples in addition to the template
properties. The Good Models list for the target template will be updated to point to a single
model that has same name as the target template and that has the geometry, examples, and
properties of the first model in the source template. The Bad Models list will be cleared.
● Clear the check box to copy only template properties, leaving the target template's Good
Models and Bad Models lists (and any models pointed to) unchanged.
4. Click Open.

202 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Advanced Editing

Defining a Symmetrical Model

You can designate features as symmetrical using symmetry options; setting these options can
increase the effectiveness of a model by searching for the feature using different orientations of the
model examples. When you define symmetry for a model, first ensure that the task icon dimensions
are perfectly symmetrical; otherwise the rotational symmetry smudges the model and does not
improve it.

➢ To check task symmetry

1. In the Model Editor, click the Geometry tab.
2. Click .
3. Double-click the task icon to open the task Extent properties.
4. Click Center to center the task icon on the task’s nominal position.
5. If the feature is symmetrical along both the X and Y axis (4-way symmetry), ensure that the
height and width measurements are equal.
6. Click OK.
7. In the Model Editor tool bar, click to apply your changes.

➢ To define a symmetrical model

1. In the Model Editor, select the Alignment tab.
2. Select Model > Properties or click .
3. In the Model Properties dialog box, click the Symmetry tab.

4. In the Rotation list, select the appropriate symmetry option:

● None: Choose this option if the feature is not symmetrical.
● 2-way: Choose this option if the part looks the same if rotated 180° (effectively doubles the
number of examples).
● 4-way: Choose this option if the feature looks the same if rotated 90° , 180° , and 270°
(effectively quadruples the number of examples).
● N-way: If you choose n-way, also specify the number for n. This option is not recommended.

CyberOptics Corporation 203

Chapter 5: Programming Components

5. Specify a Reflection option, as follows:

● None: Choose this if you do not want to reflect the data.
● X or Y: Choose the axis along which to reflect the data. When you choose one of these
options, each example is reflected in the specified direction to create a second example; this
gives the effect of doubling the number of examples used during a search for the model.
6. Click OK to save the changes and close the Model Properties dialog box.
7. On the Model Editor tool bar, click to apply the changes.
8. Click to save your changes and exit from the Model Editor.

204 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Advanced Editing

Enabling OR Logic for Unit Template Inspections

If there is sufficient discrimination between the models in a unit template, you can effectively apply
OR logic to the unit template inspections by instructing the system to compare the component with
each model on the template’s Good Models list and stop when it finds the first good model, that is,
the first model to match the component within the probability threshold. When the system finds a
model that matches the component within the specified threshold, it immediately passes the
template.

Note: If the models do not contain sufficient discrimination, CyberOptics recommends that you
i instruct the system to pick the best result after checking all the models instead.

➢ To enable OR logic
1. In the Unit Template Editor, click the Properties button.
2. In the Unit Template Properties dialog box, click the Inspection tab.
3. In the Good Models list, select Stop when first model found.

4. Leave the Bad Models list at its default setting of Stop when first model found.
5. To save the settings and close the Unit Template Properties dialog box, click OK.
6. In the Unit Template Editor, save the template.

CyberOptics Corporation 205

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Enabling AND Logic for Unit Template Inspections

You can apply AND logic to unit template inspections by instructing the system to inspect all the
models on the Good Models list and select the worst result, that is, the model with the lowest
probability value. If the model with the worst result is at or below the specified threshold, the system
fails the template. Conversely, if the worst result is above the specified threshold, the system assumes
all the other models also have probabilities above the threshold and therefore passes the template.

➢ To enable AND logic

1. In the Unit Template Editor, click the Properties button.
2. In the Unit Template Properties dialog box, click the Inspection tab.
3. In the Good Models list, select Pick worst result from all.

4. Leave the Bad Models list at its default setting of Stop when first model found.
5. Click OK to save the settings and close the Unit Template Properties dialog box.
6. In the Unit Template Editor, save the template.

206 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Advanced Editing

Switching Templates
All tasks within an assembly must be associated with a template; each task is actually an instance
of the associated template. When you populate an assembly by importing CAD data, templates are
automatically created and associated with each task. If you populate an assembly manually, for each
task you add you must specify a template that defines the task. After you have populated an
assembly, you can substitute one template for another, associating the new template with all tasks
that were previously associated with the original template. You can also change the template
association for a single, specific task.

➢ To substitute one template for another

1. In the Assembly Editor, locate the template to change.
2. Right-click the template name and click Switch Template.
3. In the Switch Template dialog box, select the library and template to substitute for the current
template.
4. Click .
All tasks that were previously associated with the original template are now associated with the
selected template.

➢ To switch templates for a single task

1. Right-click the task, either in a graphic view or in a list. In some cases, you must click and
select the task first.
2. In the Task Properties dialog box, under the General heading, click in the Template field and
then click .
3. In the Select Template dialog box, select the library and template on which to base the task.
4. Click Open.
5. Click OK.

CyberOptics Corporation 207

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Associating Models with Templates

Every template must be associated with at least one model, but can be associated with multiple
models. You can add good models or bad models to a template. During an inspection, if a feature
matches a good model, it passes inspection, so a good model should represent an acceptable
example of the part. If a feature matches a bad model, it fails the inspection, so the bad model
represents an unacceptable situation, such as a component being missing.

➢ To associate models with templates

1. In the Unit Template Editor, click the Properties button.
2. In the Unit Template Properties dialog box, select the Models tab.
3. In the Good Models or Bad Models list, as appropriate, click Add.
4. In the Model Selector dialog box, select the library and model to add, and then click Open.
5. Click OK.

Removing Models From Templates

Removing a model from a template does not delete the model from the assembly if the model is
used elsewhere in the assembly. If the model is not used anywhere within the assembly, its
definition is automatically deleted from the assembly the next time the assembly is saved. If the
model definition is saved in the system repository, deleting the association between a template and
the model does not automatically delete the model definition from the system repository.

➢ To remove models from templates

1. In the Unit Template Editor, click the Properties button.

2. In the Unit Template Properties dialog box, click the Models tab.
3. In the Good Models or Bad Models list, select the model to remove from the template.
4. Click Remove.
5. Click OK.

208 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Advanced Editing

Disabling Models within a Unit Template

During testing, you may want to temporarily disable certain models that have been associated with
a template so that the specified models are ignored during inspections. To omit tasks to
accommodate different panel configurations, use Assembly Variants as described in Creating a
Variation of an Assembly on page 119.

➢ To disable a model
1. In the Unit Template Editor, click the Properties button.

2. In the Unit Template Properties dialog box, select the Models tab.
3. To disable a particular model in the Good Models or Bad Models list, clear the check box for that
model.
4. Click OK.

➢ To enable a previously disabled model

1. In the Unit Template Editor, click the Properties button.

2. In the Unit Template Properties dialog box, select the Models tab.
3. To enable a particular model in the Good Models or Bad Models list, select the check box for that
model.
4. Click OK.

CyberOptics Corporation 209

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Defining Inspection Properties for Multiple Models

If a unit template is associated with more than one good model or more than one bad model, you
can define which model to use for inspections.

➢ To define inspection properties

1. In the Unit Template Editor, click .
2. In the Unit Template Properties dialog box, click the Inspection tab.
3. In the Good Models and/or Bad Models fields, select from the following inspection options:
● Stop when first model found: Inspects each task related to the unit template with every
model in the models list in turn, stopping with the first model that yields a result above the
tolerance probability threshold specified on the Search tab of the Unit Template Properties
dialog box (the task could still fail inspection with an out of position or angle out of range
error).
● Pick best result from all: Inspects each task related to the unit template with every model in
the models list and bases the pass or fail status on the model that most closely matches the
task.
● Pick worst result from all (for good models only): Inspects each task related to the unit
template with every model in the models list and bases the pass or fail status on the model
that least closely matches the task. Selecting this option and Stop When First Model is Found
(for bad models) effectively applies AND logic to unit template inspections. If the model
with the worst match falls within the specified tolerances, then all the other models must
also match. To apply AND logic, select Pick Worst Result From All for good models and
select Stop When First Model Found for bad models.
4. If you selected the Pick Best Result From All option for both good and bad models, enter the
desired Clearance value, expressed as the required difference in the order of magnitude
between the probabilities returned for the good and bad model.
For example, if the search for the best bad model returns a probability of 1e-2 (0.01) and the
search for the best good model returns a probability of 1e-1 (0.1), there is only one order of
magnitude in difference between the best bad SAM and the best good SAM. If the clearance is
set to 2 (at least two orders of magnitude are required to claim an unambiguous result), the
inspection will return an ambiguous result.
5. Click OK.

210 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Advanced Editing

Defining Model Discrimination

Model discrimination properties specify how well a model can discriminate between a good and a
bad component. When fine-tuning a model's performance (for either its ability to identify good or
bad tasks or the inspection cycle time), you can change the discrimination properties.

➢ To define model discrimination

1. In the Model Editor, click .
2. In the Model Properties dialog box, select the Inspection tab.

3. Set the Discrimination properties.

● Discrimination
Select the level of discrimination with which to build the model: Low, Medium, High, or
Custom. If you select the Custom option, you can define additional options.
The higher the level of discrimination applied to the model, the more successfully the model
will discriminate between good and bad components. Low discrimination results in the
fastest inspection and also typically results in better accuracy and repeatability on pre-
reflow boards (choosing High discrimination can compromise this). Choose High
discrimination when setting up models for solder joint inspections; typically, you must also
choose High for models used in post-reflow inspections.
● Residuals (Custom Discrimination only)
Select the type of residuals with which to build the model: Scalar or Vector. Vector residuals
can be used to improve discrimination.
● Weighted (Custom Discrimination/Vector residuals only)
Select whether to use weighted vector residuals (Yes or No). Weighted vector residuals
greatly improve discrimination, but inspection time is slower with this option.
● Wavelet transform (Custom Discrimination/Vector residuals only)
Select whether to use wavelet transformations (Yes or No). Wavelet transformations can be
applied to the residuals, the edge data, or both.

CyberOptics Corporation 211

Chapter 5: Programming Components

● Optimisation (Custom Discrimination only)

– Select Accuracy (the default option) to increase the ability of the system to find the
feature when searching for the model. This option tends to smudge the edge data in the
model.
– Select Discrimination to sharpen the edge data in the model. This option is sometimes
used for smaller components to prevent the edges from smudging into each other.
● Fine Tuning
Select how to fine tune the model search: Best accuracy, Better accuracy, Good accuracy and
discrimination, Better discrimination, or Best discrimination. The default is Best
discrimination.
These options enable you to set the optimal ratio of accuracy to discrimination when
searching for the model. The Fine-Tuning property is useful, for example, when you choose a
Discrimination value of High to achieve good overall discrimination, but the system becomes
too discriminating by falsely rejecting some good examples. In this case, set the Fine-Tuning
property to be more accurate. Note, however, that fine-tuning the model can increase
inspection time.
4. Click OK.

212 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Advanced Editing

Setting Search Levels for Models

Search levels control the resolution level to which the system can search the model. During
inspections, the QX Series software searches for features based on model examples. The image
patches that define the examples for a model can be used at different resolution levels, where level 0
is the highest resolution, contains the most detail, and contains all the pixel data; level 1 is a lower
resolution, using ¼of the pixel data; level 2 uses 1/16 of the pixel data, etc.

Models can be built to contain several resolution levels; when inspections search for a component
using the model examples, they check the range of resolution levels specified in the unit template
properties, starting with the lowest specified resolution (if the search finds the component at a lower
resolution, it speeds inspection time).

➢ To view current resolution levels

The minimum search level at which to build the model depends on the size and quality of the
diagnostic data for each component.
1. Right-click a model name.
2. Select View Diagnostics.
3. In the Model Diagnostics dialog box, review the data for each resolution level, and then assign a
search level based on the quality of the data.

➢ To change search levels

1. In the Model Editor, click .
2. In the Model Properties dialog box, select the General tab.
3. Under the Minimum Search Level heading enter the minimum resolution level used to build
the model:
● Level 0 is the highest resolution, contains the most detail, and contains all the pixel data
● Level 1 is a lower resolution, using ¼of the pixel data
● Level 2 uses 1/16 of the pixel data, etc.
4. Click OK.

Caution: To avoid illegal search level errors, the minimum search level for the model must be less
than or equal to the minimum search level in the Unit Template properties.

CyberOptics Corporation 213

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Exporting Examples
You can export selected examples from a model to add them to an existing model or to create an
entirely new model. When you export examples to create a new model, both the selected examples
and the model geometry are exported. When you export examples into an existing model, only the
selected examples are exported.

Exporting examples is useful if the majority of a model was populated using the Update Model
feature or by adding examples from a training set. In these situations, you may find that the
resulting set of examples includes more than one distinct population. To correct for this, you can do
either of the following:
● Define separate templates, with different models, for the different populations. If the variation in
the examples corresponds to different part numbers that are associated with a part type
template, unclone the part number templates for the examples that look different. Then create a
new model for the new part number template, and export the examples for the separate part
number from the original populated model to the new model.
● Define multiple models for a single template. Do this when the variation in examples does not
correspond to different part numbers. For example, if the different example appearances
represent a component that is black on one side and white on the other, and both are permitted,
you would add multiple models to the template. In this situation, select the white examples,
export them into a new model, and then (while the examples are still selected) delete the
examples from the original model. The Good Models list for the template that launched the
Model Editor is automatically updated to include the new model.

➢ To export examples
1. Open the model from which to export the examples.
2. If changes were made to the model since the last time it was built, click Build.
3. In the Model Editor Examples pane, select the examples to export.
4. Select File > Export Examples.
5. In the Model Selector dialog box, select or create a library, and select or create the model that
will contain the exported examples.
6. Click Open.
● Exporting examples does not remove the examples from the original model. To remove exported
examples from the model, you must delete them separately.
● If the Alignment tab is selected when you select an example in the Examples pane, the
example's probability value appears in the status bar. The probability value indicates the degree
to which the selected example image patch conforms to the model, with 1 indicating a perfect
match. To quickly select all examples above a certain probability level, sort the examples by
choosing Probability from the Sort By list. Then press and hold the SHIFT key as you select the
first and last examples that meet your requirements.

214 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Advanced Editing

Importing Examples
You can add all the examples from an existing model to the examples in the currently open model
by importing them.

➢ To import examples
1. Open the model into which the examples will be imported.
2. In the Model Editor, select File > Import Examples.
3. In the Model Selector dialog box, select the library and model that contains the examples to
import.
4. Click Open.
The selected model's examples are imported into the current model.
5. In the Model Editor Examples pane, view the examples to ensure that correct data was imported
into the model.

CyberOptics Corporation 215

Chapter 5: Programming Components

Explicitly Selecting the Camera Images

When a task falls in the overlap region between images, the stitching process may result in a
misaligned or imperfect image patch. To ensure the best image for the task, you can select which
camera image to use, and eliminate the stitching irregularities that may occur. This is especially
useful on tall components, where the view from opposing cameras (and therefore different angles)
may be noticeably different.

➢ To enable explicit camera selection

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties and select the Miscellaneous tab.
2. In the Camera Selection area near the bottom of the tab, select Enable camera selection.

➢ To select camera usage manually

In manual selection, you choose which camera to use to create the image patch.
1. In the Assembly Editor, right-click a task and select Edit Task Properties.
2. In the Task Properties dialog box, set the Camera Selection field to choose the camera image:
● Undefined – Use both images, or allow the system to select the camera.
● Left Camera –Use the image captured by the camera on the left (when facing the front of the
machine).
● Right Camera – Use the image captured by the camera on the right (when facing the front of
the machine).
3. Click OK.

➢ To select camera usage automatically

In automatic selection, the software selects the camera to use based on which camera image
contains the task’s bounding box and also where the task bounding box center is closest to the
component’s bounding box center.
● In the Assembly Editor, select Image > Camera Selections and choose one of these two options:
– Calculate All – to select the best camera image to use for all overlapped tasks in the
assembly.
– Calculate Undefined – to select the camera image for those overlapped tasks with Camera
Selection field set to Undefined.

➢ To remove all explicit camera selections

● In the Assembly Editor, select Image > Camera Selections and choose Clear.

➢ To save explicit camera selections

When an assembly includes explicit camera selections, they are saved with the assembly in a
camera selection file. You can also save camera selections from the Assembly Editor.
● In the Assembly Editor, select Image > Camera Selections and choose Save.

➢ To load explicit camera selections

When an assembly includes explicit camera selections, they are loaded automatically when the
assembly is opened. You can also load camera selections from the Assembly Editor.
● In the Assembly Editor, select Image > Camera Selections and choose Load.

216 QX Series System Software User Guide

 6 Defining Composite
Templates

Understanding Composite Templates 218

Defining Composite Templates 220

Adding Tasks Manually 222

Editing Composite Templates 236

Inspecting Composite Tasks 241

CyberOptics Corporation
Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

Understanding Composite Templates

Composite templates are created automatically when you assign part types to layers (see Assigning
Part Types to Layers on page 148). This section describes how to create and edit composite templates
manually.

Composite templates are containers for other composite or unit tasks, and are used to program large
or complicated features in smaller, more manageable parts. Composite templates are not physically
inspected and therefore do not contain any inspection properties such as tolerance boxes or search
areas. Instead, the composite template contains information such as the number, type, and location of
unit tasks within the composite, and inspection logic that determines in what circumstances the
composite task passes inspection, based on the inspection results of its unit tasks.

Tree View pane

Main View pane

Training Set pane

Inspection Results pane

Details pane

Figure 8. Composite Template Editor

218 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Understanding Composite Templates

As with unit templates, changing the definition or properties of a composite template affects all
instances (composite tasks) of that template within the assembly.

Root task
composite template

Instance of
composite template

Instances of
unit templates

Composite templates can also be created for components where separate position and text
inspections are necessary.

Composite template
Unit template
for text inspection

Unit template
for positional information
(body)

CyberOptics Corporation 219

Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

Defining Composite Templates

To create a composite template and populate it with unit templates, you must have a default
composite template in the system already and the unit template must:
● Exist in the system already,
● Be created and stored in the system repository, or
● Be created when you populate the composite template.

Creating Composite Templates Manually

Typically, tasks are created automatically when you import CAD data for an assembly. However, if
you are programming an assembly without CAD data (CyberOptics discourages this) or if the
specification has changed for a product that you have already programmed, you can create new
composite templates in an assembly using the Composite Template Editor.

When placing tasks without the benefit of CAD data, you must use a golden image of the panel.

➢ To create a composite template

1. In the Assembly Editor, load the image for the golden panel.
2. Open the Composite Template Editor in one of two ways:
● Right-click the root task name where it appears in a list in the editor and select Launch
Template Editor.
● Double-click the root task outline in the main view.
3. In the Composite Template Editor, select Insert > Miscellaneous Task.
4. The Composite Layout Tool opens. Use this window to specify the task parameters:
a. Package: Select Single Task.
b. Pin or Pad Template: Click and select template if one exists. If not, use the default
template name.
c. Task name: Use the default or type in a new name for the pin task.
d. Click and then zoom in by clicking the area of the image that contains the task.
e. Click and then drag a box around the feature. Releasing the mouse button updates the X,
Y, height, and width values in the Dimensions section.
f. In the Build Options section, select Create Composite.
g. Click Apply. The boxes change to cyan, indicating uninspected tasks.
h. Click Close.
5. In the Composite Template Editor, position the newly inserted task icon. To rotate or resize the
task icon, double-click the icon to open its parent template editor.
6. Click to save and exit the Composite Template Editor.
7. Build the model and add examples as you would when defining a component.

220 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Defining Composite Templates

Converting a Unit Template to a Composite Template

Typically, CAD data is imported with all the component tasks defined as unit tasks. If you import
CAD data using the recommended options in the CAD Import wizard, the system can
automatically create composite templates as appropriate when you assign part type templates to
layers. However, if you do not choose the recommended CAD Import options which keep the CAD
naming conventions, you are advised to convert existing unit templates into composite templates,
when appropriate.

Caution: To populate the composite template with unit tasks created from the existing unit template,
define the unit template before you convert it to a composite template.

➢ To convert a unit template

1. Open the Unit Template Editor for the template to convert to a composite template.
2. In the Unit Template Editor, select File > Load From.
3. In the Master Selector dialog box, select the Defaults library from the Library list.
4. Select Composite from the Templates list.
5. Click Open.

CyberOptics Corporation 221

Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

Adding Tasks Manually

The preferred method for adding tasks is to import CAD data for an assembly. However, if the
specification has changed for a product that you have already programmed, you may have to add
tasks manually. When manually placing tasks, you must use a golden image of the panel or you
must know the X and Y coordinates and the pitch for precise placement.

See the section listed below for details about adding specific tasks:
● Adding Tasks for Component Bodies on page 223
● Adding Pin Tasks for Dual In-Line Packages on page 224
● Adding Tasks for Grid Arrays on page 225
● Adding Tasks for Quad Flat-Pack Pins on page 226
● Adding Gap Tasks on page 227
● Adding Single Tasks on page 228
● Adding Tasks for Text on page 229
● Adding Barcode Tasks on page 231
● Adding Skip Mark Tasks on page 233
● Adding Tasks for Component Library on page 234

222 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Adding Tasks Manually

Adding Tasks for Component Bodies

Create separate tasks and models for each aspect of a component, such as body, pins, and text.

➢ To add body tasks

1. In the Assembly Editor, load the image for the golden panel.
2. Open the Composite Template Editor in one of two ways:
● Right-click the root task name where it appears in a list in the editor and select Launch
Template Editor.
● Double-click the root task outline in the main view.
3. In the Composite Template Editor, select Insert > Component Body.
4. The Composite Layout Tool opens. In the pane on the left side of the window, specify the task
parameters:
● Package: Select Single Task.
● Pin or Pad Template: Click and select template if one exists. If not, use the default
template name.
● Task name: Use the default or type in a new name for the pin task.
5. Click and then zoom in by clicking the area of the image that contains the task.
6. Click and then drag a box around the feature. Releasing the mouse button updates the X, Y,
height, and width values in the Dimensions section.
7. Click OK.
8. In the Composite Template Editor, position the newly inserted task icon. To rotate or resize the
task icon, double-click the icon to open its parent template editor.
9. Click to save and exit the template. The new task appears in cyan in the assembly main
view.
10. Double-click the new task to create the unit template and build the model.

CyberOptics Corporation 223

Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

Adding Pin Tasks for Dual In-Line Packages

Use pin tasks to inspect solder joints on post-flow assemblies. When you create pin tasks, you create
a composite template that contains both the body and pin tasks. Typically, you would use the
component library or CAD data to create pin tasks.

➢ To add pin tasks

1. In the Assembly Editor, load the image for the golden panel.
2. Double-click the root task (the panel outline) to open the Composite Template for the assembly.
3. In the Composite Template Editor select Insert > DIP Pins.
4. The Composite Layout tool opens. n the pane on the left side of the window, specify the pin
parameters:
● Pin or Pad Template: Select a pin or pad template if one exists. If not, use the default
template name.
● Task name: Use the default or type in a new name for the pin task.
● Dimensions: Enter the number of pins per side only. The other dimension is determined
using layout tools.
5. Click and draw a box around one of the pins.
6. Click and click the first pin in one of the rows.
7. Click the same position on the last pin in the row.
Boxes representing each pin are distributed along the length of the part. The boxes should align
with the pins on all sides of the part. If not, repeat steps 5 and 6. until the alignment is correct.
8. In the Build Options, select or clear the Pins Vertical check box as appropriate.
9. Set up the automatic task naming as follows:
● Click and click pin 1 to designate the first pin for automatic task naming.
● In the Build Options section, select or clear the Number Pins Clockwise check box as
desired.
10. Optionally create gap tasks:
● Click and draw a box in one of the gaps. Pink boxes representing the gap tasks are
distributed between the pin tasks all around the part.
● See Adding Gap Tasks on page 227 for more information about gap tasks.
11. Click OK.
12. In the Composite Template Editor, move or resize the unit task icons as necessary.
13. Click to save and exit the template. The new task appears in cyan in the assembly main
view.
14. Build the pin model and add examples as you would when defining a component.
In the Unit Template Editor properties, these settings can be useful for pin tasks:
● Search angle ±: 5
● Tolerance probability threshold: 1e-12.
● Tolerance angle: 3

224 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Adding Tasks Manually

Adding Tasks for Grid Arrays

If a composite template in the PinLayout library is not available from CAD data input, you can use
the Composite Layout Tool dialog box to populate the PinLayout composite template with unit
tasks for the pins.

➢ To add grid array tasks

1. In the Assembly Editor, load the image for the golden panel.
2. Double-click the root task (the panel outline) to open the Composite Template for the assembly.
3. In the Composite Template Editor select Insert > Grid Array.
4. The Composite Layout tool opens. In the pane on the left side of the window, specify the pin
parameters:
● Pin or Pad Template: Select a pin or pad template if one exists. If not, use the default
template name.
● Task name: Use the default or type in a new name for the pin task.
● Dimensions: Enter the number of columns and rows in the grid array.
● Build Options: select or clear the Create Left to Right and Create Top to Bottom check
boxes as desired.
5. Click and draw a box around the feature.
6. Click and click the first pin in one of the rows.
7. Click the same position on the last pin in the row.
Boxes representing each pin are distributed along the length of the part. The boxes should align
with the pins on all sides of the part. If not, repeat steps 5 and 6. until the alignment is correct.
Then repeat steps 5–7 to define the column positions.
8. Optionally create gap tasks:
● Click and draw a box in one of the gaps. Pink boxes representing the gap tasks are
distributed between the pin tasks all around the part.
● See Adding Gap Tasks on page 227 for more information about gap tasks.
9. Click OK.
10. In the Composite Template Editor, move or resize the unit task icons as necessary.
11. Click to save and exit the template. The new task appears in cyan in the assembly main
view.
12. Double-click the new task to create the unit template and build the model.

CyberOptics Corporation 225

Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

Adding Tasks for Quad Flat-Pack Pins

If a composite template in the PinLayout library is not available from CAD data input, you can use
the Composite Layout Tool dialog box to populate the PinLayout composite template with unit
tasks for the pins.

➢ To add QFP pin tasks

1. In the Assembly Editor, load the image for the golden panel.
2. Double-click the root task (the panel outline) to open the composite template for the assembly.
3. In the Composite Template Editor select Insert > QFP Pins.
4. The Composite Layout tool opens. In the pane on the left side of the window, specify the pin
parameters:
a. Pin or Pad Template: Select a pin or pad template if one exists. If not, use the default
template name.
b. Task name: Use the default or type in a new name for the pin task.
c. Dimensions: Enter the number of Pins on Horizontal and Pins on Vertical sides.
5. Click and draw a box around one of the pins.
6. Click and click the first pin in one of the rows.
7. Click the same position on the last pin in the row.
Boxes representing each pin are distributed along the length of the part. The boxes should align
with the pins on all sides of the part. If not, repeat steps 5 and 6 until the alignment is correct.
8. In the Build Options, select or clear the Pins Vertical check box as appropriate.
9. Set up the automatic task naming as follows:
● Click and click pin 1 to designate the first pin for automatic task naming.
● In the Build Options section, select or clear the Number Pins Clockwise check box as
desired.
10. Optionally create gap tasks:
● Click and draw a box in one of the gaps. Pink boxes representing the gap tasks are
distributed between the pin tasks all around the part.
● See Adding Gap Tasks on page 227 for more information about gap tasks.
11. Click OK.
12. In the Composite Template Editor, move or resize the unit task icons as necessary.
13. Click to save and exit the template. The new task appears in cyan in the assembly main
view.
14. Double-click the new task to create the unit template and build the model.
15. Build the pin model and add examples as you would when defining a component.

226 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Adding Tasks Manually

Adding Gap Tasks

Use the Gap tool in the Composite Layout Editor to add tasks that define spaces between pins that
should be free of debris. Gap tasks should be created when you are creating the pin layout to take
advantage of the pin layout dimensions. If created separately from the pin layout, you have to create
each gap task individually between pins.

➢ To add gap tasks

1. After defining the pin layout, but before closing the Composite Layout Editor, in the Gap
Template field, select a gap template if one exists. If this is the first time creating gap tasks,
create a library named gaps (case insensitive).
2. In the Task name field, use the default or type in a new name for the gap task.
3. Dimensions, other than gap height and width, should already be set as part of the pin layout
definition.
4. Click and draw a box in one of the gaps.
5. Click OK. Gaps are added between pins to the pin layout definition.
6. Click to save and exit the template. The new gap tasks appear in cyan in the assembly
main view.
7. Build the gap model and add examples as you would when defining a component. In the Model
properties, on the Inspection tab, the Model type for gap tasks is automatically set to grey. Retain
this setting for best performance.

CyberOptics Corporation 227

Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

Adding Single Tasks

➢ To add single tasks
1. In the Assembly Editor, load the image for the golden panel.
2. Open the Composite Template Editor in one of two ways:
● Right-click the root task name where it appears in a list in the editor and select Launch
Template Editor.
● Double-click the root task outline in the main view.
3. In the Composite Template Editor, select Insert > Miscellaneous Task.
4. The Composite Layout Tool opens. Use this window to specify the task parameters:
a. Package: Select Single Task.
b. Pin or Pad Template: Click and select template if one exists. If not, use the default
template name.
c. Task name: Use the default or type in a new name for the pin task.
d. Click and then zoom in by clicking the area of the image that contains the task.
e. Click and then drag a box around the feature. Releasing the mouse button updates the X,
Y, height, and width values in the Dimensions section.
f. Click OK.
5. In the Composite Template Editor, move or resize the unit task icons as necessary.
6. Click to save and exit the template. The new task appears in cyan in the assembly main
view.
7. Double-click the new task to create the unit template and build the model.

228 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Adding Tasks Manually

Adding Tasks for Text

Inspecting the body and the text markings at the same time results in models that perform poorly.
The position of text markings on components can vary widely, so always set up separate tasks for
text. Set up the model geometry so that there are no more than 4 characters in each active area.

➢ To manually add text tasks

1. In the Assembly Editor select Edit >Layers.
2. In the Assembly Package Layers Setup dialog box, select a Package from the list which
contains the component with the text to be inspected.
3. In the Package Layers area, select the Text check box; both Body and Text should be checked.
4. Click OK.
The system creates a composite template that contains two tasks: the original body task and the
text task. All three elements (composite template, body task, and text task) are visible in the
Main View pane.
5. Double-click the text task to open the unit template editor for the task.
6. Click and draw a task icon around the text to inspect.
7. Click to build the model for the template.
8. Click to save and exit the model.
9. In the Main view pane, right-click the text task and select Edit template properties and set the
following parameters:
● Search angle: select 2-way.
● Test for polarity: select No when the text orientation does not matter, such as for resistors.
● Search angle +/-: 5
● Tolerance probability threshold: 1e-30.
● Tolerance angle: 10
● Out of position: turn this setting off since text can be printed anywhere on the part.
10. Load an image sequence or a set of images.
11. Select Collect> Start.
12. Open the text task model again.
13. Select Training Set>Load Production Set.
14. Add examples from the training set to build the model.

CyberOptics Corporation 229

Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

➢ To define multiple lines of text

When you define text for a part number that is greater than five characters long, you must add
multiple active areas. The QX Series System software has tools that automatically insert active areas
into the model geometry to segment the part number.
1. In the Unit Template Editor, click to open the Model Editor.
2. In the Model Editor, define the task icon to include the entire part number. Use Active Area Grid
Cell and Active Area Grid buttons to define multiple active areas.
a. Click and draw around the first few characters of a part number (to a maximum of five
characters).
b. Click and draw around the entire part number.

230 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Adding Tasks Manually

Adding Barcode Tasks

Create barcode tasks to use the QX Series System cameras to read barcodes from the panel. You can
create barcode tasks for panels or for individual boards within a panel.

➢ To add barcode tasks

1. In the Assembly Editor, load the image for the golden panel.
2. Click to open the Assembly Properties dialog box.
3. Under Panel barcode, set the Enable hardware reader option:
● Yes: To use an external, hand-held or conveyor-mounted barcode reader; you can still read
board-level barcode tasks using the QX Series cameras.
● No: To read panel-level barcode tasks using the QX Series cameras. Once the panel-level
barcode is inspected, it is saved to the FullResults folder and can be viewed in the Rework
Station.
When board-level barcode tasks are programmed, they are inspected like any task regardless of
the Enable Hardware Reader setting.
4. Open the Composite Template Editor in one of two ways:
● Right-click the root task name where it appears in a list in the editor and select Launch
Template Editor.
● Double-click the root task outline in the main view.
5. In the Composite Template Editor, select Insert > Miscellaneous Task.
6. The Composite Layout Tool opens. Use this window to specify the task parameters:
● Package: Select Single Task.
● Pin or Pad Template: Click and select the barcode template. If a template does not exist,
create a new library named Barcodes and a new template.
● Task name: Enter a name for the barcode.

7. Click and then drag a box around the barcode. Releasing the mouse button updates the X, Y,
height, and width values in the Dimensions section.
8. In the Build Options section, select Create Barcode and clear all other checkboxes.
9. Click OK.
10. In the Composite Template Editor, move or resize the barcode task as necessary.
11. Click to save and exit the template. The new task appears in cyan in the assembly main
view.
12. Double-click the new task to open the unit template for the barcode.

CyberOptics Corporation 231

Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

13. Click to open the template properties.

14. Select the Barcode tab and set the following parameters:
● Code symbology: Select the symbology used for the barcode. Choose AllSyms to have the
system determine the symbology used.
● Scan Interval: Enter a number to define the subsampling rate used to read lines across the
expected barcode to find edges of bars. QX Series will read 1 of every n lines in the search
area for the code, where n is the Scan interval. The default value (5) works for most typical
barcodes.
– A higher number increases speed, but can make the read less reliable.
– A lower number decreases speed but can make the read more reliable.
– A higher number works better with taller codes.
● Use Grayscale for Decoding: By default, the system reads barcodes using color images. If
the system does not read the barcode correctly, select this option to convert the barcode to
grayscale images. The conversion can increase inspection time slightly.
● Grayscale image generated by: Select a single channel option from the list to improve the
quality of the converted color images.
● Invert Color for Second Try: Select this option to scan the barcode a second time if it fails,
using inverted color values on the second pass.
Note: Use Grayscale for Decoding, Grayscale image generated by and Invert Color for Second
Try are now moved into the barcode template properties. When using an assembly prior to
v6.3.1 Release, once the software is upgraded to v6.3.1 and above Releases, all the settings in
the System Properties are automatically copied into the barcode template.
15. Click OK to close the Unit Template Properties dialog box.
16. Click Inspect to decode the barcode. Results are displayed in the lower left pane of the window.
If you selected AllSyms as the code symbology, return to the Code Symbology field and select
the symbology that the system determined was in use. This will speed up the barcode reading
activity.
17. When the barcode is properly identified, click to save and exit the unit template editor.

Tip
If the barcode read fails, you can set system properties to improve the performance:
● Use grayscale for decoding
● Invert color for second try

See Setting General Barcode Properties on page 32.

232 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Adding Tasks Manually

Adding Skip Mark Tasks

Create skip mark tasks to exclude a feature, such as a board on a multi-up panel, from inspection.
When the skip mark feature is marked, such as to indicate a defective board, the system detects the
skip mark and the board is not inspected. Features that are skipped during inspection are identified
in cyan in the inspection results and are not considered defects.

➢ To add skip mark tasks

1. In the Assembly Editor, load the image for the golden panel.
2. Open the Composite Template Editor in one of two ways:
● Right-click the root task name where it appears in a list in the editor and select Launch
Template Editor.
● Double-click the root task icon in the main view.
3. In the Composite Template Editor, select Insert > Miscellaneous Task.
4. The Composite Layout Tool opens. Use this window to specify the task parameters:
● Package: Select Single Task.
● Pin or Pad Template: Click and select the skip mark template. If a template does not
exist, create a new library named Skip Marks and create a new template.
● Task name: Enter a name for the skip mark.
5. Click and then drag a box around the skip mark area.
6. In the Build Options section, select Create Any Locator as block skip, and Create new task
as locator and clear all other checkboxes.

7. Click OK.
8. In the Composite Template Editor, move or resize the skip mark as necessary.
9. Click to save and exit the template. The new task appears in cyan in the assembly main
view.
10. In the Assembly Editor, right-click the skip mark and select edit task properties.
11. In the General tab verify the following parameters:
● Template: Skip mark template is selected.
● Type: Block skip indicator is selected.
12. Click OK to close the Task Properties dialog box.

CyberOptics Corporation 233

Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

Adding Tasks for Component Library

➢ To add component library tasks
1. In the Assembly Editor, load the image for the golden panel.
2. Open the Composite Template Editor in one of two ways:
● Right-click the root task name where it appears in a list in the editor and select Launch
Template Editor.
● Double-click the root task outline in the main view.
3. In the Composite Template Editor, select Insert > Component from Library.
4. The Composite Layout Tool opens. In the pane on the left side of the window, specify the task
parameters:
● Package: Select Component Library Task.
● Pin or Pad Template: Click and then drag a box to define the component. Releasing the
mouse button updates the X, Y, height, and width values in the Dimensions section.
Click to select a template from the Component Library and click OK to close the
Component Library dialog box.
● Task name: Use the default name or type a new name for the component library task.
5. Click OK.
6. In the Composite Template Editor, position the newly inserted task icon. To rotate or resize the
task icon, double-click the icon to open its parent template editor.
7. Click to save and exit the template. The new task appears in cyan in the assembly main
view.
8. Double-click the new task to create the unit template and build the model.

234 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Adding Tasks Manually

Component Library UI improvement

The following improvements are made to the component library.
● You can delete a component in the component library.
● You can also search a package by its units (inch or mm) from the Unit list.
● Double-click a component to automatically update it in the locator properties.
● The search range of the component is reduced to 20% of the body size.

➢ To delete a component from the component library

1. From the Component Library dialog, choose a component.

2. Select Delete button.

3. Click Ok to confirm deleting the component.
4. Navigate to the Assembly Editor > File > Synchronize.
Note: The components that share the same template and model cannot be deleted. An error
message dialog is displayed.
5. Select synchronise to restore the conflicts, correct assembly changes and add data to the system
database.
6. Once the component is deleted, click the cancel button to keep current setting.
7. From the Unit list search for a package by choosing inches or mm.

CyberOptics Corporation 235

Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

Editing Composite Templates

Composite templates are edited by changing the unit tasks within them. You can reposition the unit
template definition only if there are no models are associated with the unit template; otherwise, the
position and extent of the template are automatically defined by the model.

Centering Templates Around Task Icons

Both composite and unit templates should be defined to be centered around the nominal position of
the task (that is, around the X and Y values specified in the Task Properties dialog box).

➢ To center composite templates

1. Do one of the following:
● In the Composite Template Editor, click .
- or -
● In the Assembly Editor, right-click a composite task or template and select Edit Template
Properties.

2. In the Composite Template Properties dialog box, enter 0 for both the X and Y coordinates to
center the task icon around the nominal position of the task.
3. Click OK.

➢ To center unit templates

1. With the template open in the Unit Template Editor, select Edit > Task Icon.
2. In the Resize Task Icon dialog box, click Center.
3. Click OK.

236 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Editing Composite Templates

Resizing Composite Task Icons

Composite tasks are typically resized to the extent of the component body. The composite task icon
is not inspected, and is used only as a container for its unit tasks; this means for inspections, the
task icon size is irrelevant. However, sizing the task icon to the dimensions of the component helps
operators to correlate the task icon with the corresponding component on the image.

➢ To resize task icons numerically

1. Do one of the following:
● In the Composite Template Editor, click the Properties button.
- or -
● In the Assembly Editor, right-click a composite task or template and select Edit Template
Properties.
2. In the Composite Template Properties dialog box, click the General tab.
3. Under the Task Icon heading, type the appropriate values in the Width and Height fields.
4. Click OK.

➢ To resize task icons visually

1. With the template open in the Composite Template Editor, click the Select button.

2. In the Main View pane, select the composite task icon.

3. Click the Resize button.
4. Click and drag the boundary of the task to the desired size.

Loading Properties for a Composite Template

To save programming time, you can define a composite template with properties similar to or the
same as an existing composite template. This enables you to apply the properties of the existing
template to the new template without editing the name or storage location of the existing template.

This procedure overwrites the composite template properties and overwrites the unit tasks of the
current template. However, it does not alter the template name or storage location.

➢ To load properties in a composite template

1. With a template open in the Composite Template Editor, select File > Load From.
2. In the Master Selector dialog box, specify the library and the template from which you want to
load the properties.
3. Click Open.

CyberOptics Corporation 237

Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

Editing Unit Templates

When you create unit tasks within a composite template, you must fully define the unit templates
on which those tasks are based. If you added a task from an existing, fully defined unit template,
this will already have been done. But if you created a new unit template while adding the task or if
you created the task from a unit template that wasn't fully defined, you must define the
characteristics of that template (search area, tolerances, associated models, etc.) before you can
inspect the composite template.

➢ To edit a unit template

1. In the Assembly Editor, load the image for the panel.
2. Open the composite template in the Composite Template Editor.
3. In the Composite Template Editor, select the task icon and open the Template Editor for the task.
4. In the Template Editor, edit the template as desired.

238 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Editing Composite Templates

Positioning Unit Tasks

All unit and composite tasks are children of the root task, which defines the assembly as a whole. In
addition, some unit or composite tasks are also children of composite templates. To move or rotate a
task, you must open the parent template (composite or root) that contains the task, not the unit (or
composite) template that defines the characteristics of the task.

Root task
Parent to all unit and composite tasks

Composite template
Parent of its unit tasks; the
tasks it defines are
children of the root
template or possibly other
composite templates

Unit template
Its tasks are children of a
composite template (if any) or
the root template

If you know the exact coordinates for each task, you can accurately position and rotate unit tasks.
However, if you do not know the precise coordinates of the task positions, you can also move and
rotate the tasks visually.

➢ To numerically move and rotate unit tasks

1. Open the composite template (or root template) in the Composite Template Editor.
2. In the Composite Template Editor, right-click the task and select Edit Task Properties. (In the
Main View pane, you must select the task first.)
3. In the Task Properties dialog box, click the General tab.
4. In the Position section, set the following properties:
a. In the X and Y fields, enter the coordinates to position the task within the parent template. In
the Composite Template Editor, the green cross hairs signify the origin, with the positive
quadrant indicated in a brighter color.
b. If necessary, in the Task Angle field, enter the number of degrees to rotate the task.
5. Click OK.
6. Click .

➢ To visually move unit tasks within a composite template

1. In the Composite Template Editor Main View pane, select one or more tasks to move.
2. Click .
3. Click and drag the selected tasks to the desired position.
4. Click .

CyberOptics Corporation 239

Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

➢ To visually rotate unit tasks within a composite template

1. In the Composite Template Editor Main View pane, select one or more tasks to rotate.
2. Click and then click the selected task.
Each time you click the mouse button, the selected tasks rotate by 90° .
3. Click .

➢ To delete a unit task from a composite template

1. Open the composite template in the Composite Template Editor.
2. In the Main View pane, select the unit task or tasks to delete.
3. Select Edit > Delete.
4. If a confirmation message asks whether you really want to delete the task, click Yes.
5. Click .

240 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Inspecting Composite Tasks

Inspecting Composite Tasks

Within the Composite Template Editor, you can inspect a composite task, which can be comprised of
other composite and unit tasks. Composite templates are not themselves physically inspected;
instead, a composite task's pass or fail status depends on the inspection results of the unit tasks
within them.

➢ To inspect a composite task

1. Open the composite template in the Composite Template Editor.
2. If not done already, define the inspection logic for the template. For instructions, see Defining
Inspection Logic on page 242.
3. On the Inspect menu, click Inspect or click the Inspect button in the Main View pane.
By default, all the unit tasks must pass their inspections for the composite task to pass its
inspection (this depends on the inspection logic you defined). The composite task icon turns
green if it passes and red if it fails its inspection. The passed or failed status of each unit task
also displays in color, with passed instances displayed in green, failures in red, and tasks that
were not inspected in blue.
4. View inspection results in the Inspection Results pane.
5. If one or more unit tasks failed inspection, select the failed task in the Inspection Results pane,
and view the individual results in the Details pane. Then do one of the following:
Add the current task as an example in the model.
Create a new model associated with the unit template for the task
Edit the current model geometry or examples.
Edit the current template for the task. In the Unit Template Editor, you may need to adjust
the tolerances or search area.

➢ To stop an in-progress inspection

● In the Composite Template Editor, select Inspect > Stop.
The inspection stops immediately and the composite task is classed as a failure.

CyberOptics Corporation 241

Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

Defining Inspection Logic

By default, composite tasks pass inspection only if every unit task within the composite template
passes its inspection. However, you can change this, so that the composite task will pass inspection
even though some of the unit tasks fail their inspections. You might want to change the inspection
logic when the visual appearance of a component varies (for example, when many component
vendors supply the same component type).

➢ To define inspection logic

1. In the Composite Template Editor, click the Properties button.
2. In the Composite Template Properties dialog box, click the Inspection tab.
3. In the Task Inspection field, select one of the following:
● All tasks (AND logic): the composite task passes inspection only if all of its locators and
unit tasks pass their individual inspections.
● Best task (OR logic): the composite task passes inspection if all of its locators pass their
inspections and if any of its unit tasks pass inspection. With this option, all of the unit tasks
are inspected, and the composite passes if the unit task with the best probability passes.
● First found (OR logic): the composite task passes inspection if all the task's locators pass
inspection and at least one unit task passes its inspection. As soon as one unit task passes, no
further unit tasks are inspected; this can speed inspections since as few as one unit task can
be inspected within the composite template.
● Percentage (OR logic): the composite task passes inspection if all the task's locators pass
inspection and if a specified percentage of the template's unit tasks passed their inspections.
4. If you selected Percentage in the Task Inspection field, enter the percentage of unit tasks that
must pass inspection in the Percentage field.
5. Specify how the composite task inspection should respond if any locators fail:
● To have the system ignore failed locators and continue inspecting unit tasks even if one or
more locators fails its inspection, select Yes in the Ignore Failed Locators field. The composite
task may still pass inspection, depending on whether the unit tasks pass and what type of
inspection logic is selected in the Task Inspection field.
● To stop the composite task inspection (causing the composite task to fail) if it encounters a
failed locator, select No in both the Ignore Failed Locators and Let Locators Fail and
Continue fields.
● To continue inspecting other locators and unit tasks if a locator fails, but to force the
composite template to still fail its inspection, select No in the Ignore Failed Locators field,
and select Yes in the Let Locators Fail and Continue.
6. In the Rotation for Single Locator field, select one of the following:
● Select Yes to have the system rotate a coordinate frame around a single locator by the amount
of degrees between the expected locator position and where the inspection found the locator.
For example, if the system finds a locator 4 degrees from where it expected to find it, the
system rotates the coordinate frame 4 degrees in the same direction as the errant locator.
- or -
● Select No to enable the system to translate the frame only; the frame will not be rotated.
7. Click OK.

242 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Inspecting Composite Tasks

Disabling Tasks
You can disable individual unit or composite tasks during inspections. Although disabled tasks
remain defined in the assembly, they are not inspected. This is useful, for example, if you are
producing a panel with some components missing or that have been replaced with a different
component; rather than creating a new assembly or permanently deleting the tasks, you can just
disable the tasks temporarily.

➢ To disable tasks during inspections

1. In the Composite Template Editor, right-click the task and select Edit Task Properties. (In the
Main View pane, you must select the task first.)
2. In the Task Properties dialog box in the General section, set the Enabled field to No.
3. Click OK.

➢ To list all disabled tasks

1. In the Assembly Editor Find pane, select Tasks from the Find drop-down list.
2. Click the Search Disabled Tasks button.

3. Clear the unlabeled Filter text box.

4. Click Search.

Disabling Operator Disagree Option

You can disable the operator’s choice to disagree with a failure identified by the QX Series System.
This is useful for ensuring that a specific task failure is reviewed closely before disagreeing with
the result.

➢ To disable the operator disagree option

1. Right-click the task in any editor.
2. Select Edit > Task Properties.
3. In the Task Properties dialog box, set the Disagree Enabled option to No.
When set to No, the operator must classify the failure in some manner other than disagree, or
request an override by an individual with access privileges to do so.

CyberOptics Corporation 243

Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

Defining Voting Composites

You can define a composite template as a voting composite, which is a composite template that passes
inspection only if a specified percentage of its child tasks pass inspection. Typically, all of the
composite template's locators must pass their inspection before inspecting its child tasks.

➢ To define a voting composite

1. Do one of the following:
● In the Composite Template Editor, click or select Edit > Properties.
● In the Assembly Editor, right-click a composite task or template and then click Edit Template
Properties.

2. In the Composite Template Properties dialog box, click the Inspection tab.
3. In the Task Inspection field, select Percentage.
4. In the Percentage field, enter the percentage of child tasks that must pass inspection for the
composite template to pass.
5. Click OK.

244 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Inspecting Composite Tasks

Rejecting Outliers
Outliers are tasks that return a probability value outside a specified rejection factor. You can specify
which of a composite template's child templates should be tested for outliers during inspections.
When testing outliers, the system compares the inspection probabilities for each of the template's
tasks; if the probability for a task falls outside the norm defined collectively by the template's tasks,
the outlier will fail inspection.

This is useful, for example, for pin inspections. Lighting differences between QFPs placed in
different board locations can make it difficult to determine a probability threshold that adequately
discriminates against bad pins everywhere on the panel. Using outlier rejection, if the probability
returned by the inspection of one or two pins differs significantly from the other pins, it is likely
that those pins are bad, and should fail inspection.

➢ To reject outliers during inspections

1. Do one of the following:
● In the Composite Template Editor, click or select Edit > Properties.
● In the Assembly Editor, right-click a composite task or template and then click Edit Template
Properties.

2. In the Composite Template Properties dialog box, click the General tab.
3. Click in the Reject Outliers field, and then click .
4. In the Reject Outliers dialog box, select the check box next to each template for which you want
outlier rejection enabled.
5. In the Rejection Factor text box, type the factor that defines acceptable variation. Valid values
are 1 to 1e +100.
The determination of outliers is based on the orders of magnitude specified in the Rejection
Factor text box. For example, 1e+100 indicates that any task with a probability that differs by
more than two orders of magnitude is considered an outlier.
6. Click OK.
7. In the Composite Template Properties dialog box, click OK.

Reporting Composite Inspection Results

Composite tasks are not physically inspected; instead, a composite task's pass or fail status depends
on the inspection results of the unit tasks within them. When you inspect a composite template, you
can designate whether to see the results of the inspection of the composite task in addition to the
individual unit tasks within the composite.

➢ To display composite results in addition to individual results

1. In the Composite Template Editor, click .
2. In the Composite Template Properties dialog box, select the General tab.
3. In the Component field, select Yes.
4. Click OK.
The composite results appear in the Inspection Results pane, highlighted with green for pass,
red for failure, and light blue for tasks that were not inspected.

CyberOptics Corporation 245

Chapter 6: Defining Composite Templates

246 QX Series System Software User Guide

 7 Inspecting Images and
Analyzing Results

Inspecting Images in the Assembly Editor 248

Analyzing Inspection Results 250

Using Statistician 255

About Measurement Frames 261

Creating Height Maps (Measurement Systems Only) 264

Generating Hotspot Images 265

Performing Repeatability Studies - Overview 266

CyberOptics Corporation
Chapter 7: Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results

Inspecting Images in the Assembly Editor

Inspections are typically performed on the Inspection Station. You can use the Assembly Editor to
test new assembly programs or to debug existing assemblies.

When you start an inspection, the QX Series System stitches the image and inspects the fiducials
before beginning the component inspection. If the Stitcher fails its inspection, the root task turns
red, the inspection process stops, and the status bar displays the reason for the failure.

If the fiducials fail their inspection, the root task and the failed fiducials turn red, the inspection
process stops, and the status bar informs you that the board has failed.

If the Stitcher and fiducials pass their inspections, the inspection process continues and the entire
assembly is inspected.

If all the components pass their inspections, both the root task and the component tasks turn green.

However, if any component fails its inspection, the root task and the failed component(s) are
displayed in red, but the passed components are displayed in green.

Inspecting Stored Images

You can inspect stored images in the Assembly Editor to test the assembly programming process.
CyberOptics recommends that you also inspect new, fully programmed assemblies in the
Assembly Editor on a range of stored board images before you release the assembly to production.
This enables you to correct any problems before they reach the production line.

➢ Inspecting an image
1. Open an assembly in the Assembly Editor and load a stored image.
2. Select Inspect > Stored Image.
The system first stitches the image and then inspects the fiducials and components using the
data in the current assembly. If any fiducial fails its inspection, the inspection stops, and the task
icons for the failed fiducials and the root task turn red. If all the fiducials pass their inspection,
the component inspections continue.
If any component fails its inspection, the task icons for the failed components and the root task
turn red, and the board inspection is classified as a failure. If everything passes its inspection,
all the task icons, including the root task, turn green, and the board is classified as a pass.

248 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Inspecting Images in the Assembly Editor

Inspecting Live Images

Typically, live inspections of boards are performed in the Inspection Station, after the board is in
production. However, if an assembly requires testing or immediate debugging, you can perform live
inspections on the QX Series System using the Assembly Editor.

➢ To inspect a single live image

1. Turn the Mode Control switch on the QX Series machine to Off Line mode.
2. With the assembly open in the Assembly Editor, select Inspect > Inspect Live (Once).
3. On the QX Series machine, press the Reset/Start button.
The QX Series System inspects the next board to arrive at the conveyor and displays the results
in the Panel Layout and Inspection Results panes. No subsequent inspections are performed.

➢ To start a continuous live inspection using the Assembly Editor

1. Turn the Mode Control switch on the QX Series machine to Inspect mode.
2. On the QX Series machine, press the Reset/Start button.
3. Open an assembly in the Assembly Editor and select Inspect > Inspect Live (Continuous).
4. After each inspection, the system displays the results in the Panel Layout pane and in the
Inspection Results pane.

➢ To stop an inspection
● With an inspection in progress, select Inspect > Stop.

Inspecting Image Sequences

Inspecting image sequences is very useful during the training phase of assembly programming
because you can simulate a production run using stored images off-line. Image sequences are also
used for R&R studies.

➢ Inspecting image sequences

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Image > Load Sequence and open the image sequence file.
2. To use the image sequence file for training purposes, enable the failure collection options.
For more information, see Working with Training Sets on page 198.
3. On the Assembly Editor toolbar, select the Save Results check box.
4. Select Inspect > Stored Sequence.
The system inspects each image in the sequence in turn. When all inspections are complete, the
final image in the sequence remains displayed in the Panel Layout pane and the Inspection
Results pane displays the inspection results for the image.
5. Examine the inspection results.

CyberOptics Corporation 249

Chapter 7: Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results

Analyzing Inspection Results

After you inspect an assembly in the Assembly Editor or in the Composite Template Editor, you can
specify which inspection results to view, and in what order. This enables you to quickly locate
specific results for analysis.

If a component fails its inspection, first check the component on the image and the board, if possible,
to see whether it is a false failure or a genuine failure. The failure reasons assigned by the system
are displayed in the Inspection Results pane. If the component produced a false failure, analyze the
reason for the failure to help you decide what corrective action to take. Some examples of corrective
action are described in Failure Causes and Corrective Action on page 252.
1. Perform an inspection In the Assembly Editor or the Composite Template Editor,.
2. In the Inspection Results pane, click to show failed tasks.
The system displays a list of the names of the failed tasks and the reasons for their failures in the
Inspection Results pane.
3. Click a failed task to display the detailed inspection results in the Details pane. The Details
image displays the currently selected task, and the smaller, inset image displays a golden
example of the model.
The system also highlights the task icon in yellow and highlights the task position on the board
with a yellow cross-hair in the Panel Layout pane.

250 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Analyzing Inspection Results

4. Analyze the reason for the failure using the information in Table 5.
5. If the result is a false failure, use the buttons on the Details pane toolbar to make the appropriate
changes.
Add the current task as an example in the model.
Create a new model.
Edit the current model.
Edit the current template.

See Also
● Editing Model Geometry on page 174
● Adding Failed Examples to a Model on page 189
● Editing the Examples in the Model on page 197

Sorting Results
Use the Results filters to specify which inspection results to view, and in what order. This enables
you to quickly locate specific results for analysis.

➢ To sort results
1. In the Assembly Editor or Composite Task Editor select View > Result Filters.
2. In the Results Options dialog box, set the options to sort results:
a. Results list: If you select Show Passes and clear Show Failures, or vice versa, only passes or
failures will be listed in the Inspection Results pane. If you select both Show Passes and
Show Failures, passes, failures, and tasks that have not been inspected will be listed.
b. Errors list: Select the types of errors that you want reported in the Inspection Results pane.
For a description of each error, click Help in the Results Options dialog box.
c. Sorting: Choose a sorting item and order.
d. Filtering: If desired, specify a filter option to display only specific tasks, templates, or
models. Type all or part of the task, template, or model name in the text box to display those
results. For example, select Template and then enter the template name to view inspection
results for the tasks that are instances of that template.
3. Click OK.

CyberOptics Corporation 251

Chapter 7: Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results

Failure Causes and Corrective Action

Table 5. Failure Causes and Corrective Action
Reason for False Cause Corrective Action
Failure

Not Found The model is not adequately trained. Add more examples to the
model.

The model cannot rotate sufficiently Increase the angular search

to adequately find the component. value (Angle ). Make sure the
search time does not increase
excessively.

The search area is not large enough. Increase the size of the model
search area.

Wrong Polarity The CAD for this instance is wrong. Check the CAD file.

The model cannot adequately Edit the model geometry to

discriminate between 0° and 180° improve its discrimination.
and thus finds a better match at
180°.

Non-Existent Model The model has been removed from Redefine the model and save it
disk and the system cannot find the to disk.
appropriate model.

Symmetry The Symmetry failure message is None.

redundant.

Ambiguous Both bad and good models are Verify that the threshold is
defined and the system cannot appropriately set.
adequately determine the best Populate the model with more
probability fit. (That is, a good examples.
probability fit was found for both the
bad model and the component and
the good model and the component.)

Out of Position The model found the component Increase the size of the tolerance
outside the tolerance box. box. If you have specific
tolerances you must abide to;
you should not just increase the
tolerance box to quickly fix an
isolated problem.
Improve the model so it finds the
component accurately.

Bad Model Found A good probability fit was found Check the bad model setup and
between the bad model and the edit the model if necessary.
component.

Not Enough Examples The system has been configured to Add more examples to the
flag unpopulated models. model.

Search Timed Out The search exceeded the time-out Increase the time-out period in
period specified in the template the template.
properties. Check the model to make sure
the system is not processing too
much data in the model when it is
searching. Consider using
inactive areas.

Angle Out of Range The angle returned after the Increase the angular tolerance in
inspection is greater than the allowed the template.
angular tolerance.

252 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Analyzing Inspection Results

Table 5. Failure Causes and Corrective Action

Reason for False Cause Corrective Action
Failure

No Model Defined No model is associated with this Add a model to the template.
template.

The model has been switched off. Switch the model back on.

Undefined The template has not been marked Finish defining the template and
as defined. mark the template as Defined.

Height The example was found in the first Add examples to the model.
(Measurement systems image but not the second.
only)

Editing Barcodes and Lot Codes

Barcodes and lot codes enable you to easily identify results from inspections performed in the
Assembly Editor.

When an image is inspected, the system inserts the barcode or image name in the Bar Code field in
the Assembly Properties dialog box. However, you can change this value if desired.

Using lot codes, you can group a sequence of inspections so that you can easily identify the results
later. Lot codes are useful for repeatability studies because the resulting inspections can be accessed
easily in the Statistician. You typically change the lot code for each image sequence that you inspect.

➢ To edit the barcode or lot codes

1. Before inspecting an assembly, click in the Assembly Editor.
2. In the Assembly Properties dialog box, in the Barcode or Lot Code fields, enter the barcode or
lot code as appropriate.
3. Click OK.

i Note: Barcodes and lot codes are temporary; they are not saved with the assembly.

CyberOptics Corporation 253

Chapter 7: Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results

Defining Permitted Board Warp and Stretch

On Measurement systems, inspections can compensate for some amount of board warp and stretch.
For this to happen, you must enable the board warp and stretch tests for the assembly. If you are
testing for board stretch, you must also define which templates represent board-level fiducials that
can be used to determine board stretch.

At the end of an inspection, the system tests against both the warp and stretch tolerances. If the
board fails either test, the inspection fails and the reason for the failure is recorded and displayed in
the History pane in the Inspection Station and a message is displayed at the Rework Station when
the result is loaded.

➢ To enable testing of permitted board warp and stretch

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly > Edit Properties or click .
2. In the Assembly Properties dialog box, set the Test Board Stretch value to Yes.
3. For the Stretch Percentage value, type the amount of permitted stretch as a percentage.
4. Set the Test Board Warp value to Yes.
5. For the Warp Factor value, type the amount of permitted warp, in millimeters.
6. Click OK.

254 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Using Statistician

Using Statistician
When boards are inspected in the Inspection Station or the Assembly Editor, the results of the
inspection can be stored in a Results folder within the QX Series environment. Statistician can then
be used to analyze the inspection results for measurement studies. Although you can use the
Statistician with any QX Series System, the measurement studies features make the Statistician
primarily a Measurement Machine application.

Getting Started
Stitch and Inspect an image to save results for analysis.

In the Stitcher Editor, define image positions and create stitch locators with the following criteria:
● In the Image Position Editor, make sure overlaps are set to 15mm.
● In the Stitcher Editor, be sure to mark stitch patches in the narrow 5 mm overlap areas to assist
in building a surface map.

Set the results storage options as follows:

● In the System Properties> Results Storage tab, make sure that the Results to Store is greater
than zero.
● In the Assembly Editor for the image to study, select Save Results in the toolbar.

Opening an Assembly in the Statistician

➢ To open the assembly
1. On the Launch Pad, click Statistician.
2. In the Statistician, select File > Open Assembly.
3. In the Assembly Selector dialog box, select the appropriate assembly and click Open.
In the Statistician, the Templates list displays all the templates contained in the currently loaded
assembly. The Instances list displays all the tasks contained in the currently open assembly. If
you select specific templates in the Templates list, the Instances list displays the tasks associated
with the selected template.

CyberOptics Corporation 255

Chapter 7: Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results

Displaying Inspection or Stitching Task Data

Within the Statistician, you can view the results of either the inspection or the stitching task. The
default setting is to display the results of the inspection.

➢ To display inspection task data

● In the Statistician, select View > Inspection Task.

➢ To display stitching task data

● In the Statistician, select View > Stitching Task.
The display changes to show the Stitch Tasks list which contains all of the stitch points contained
within the stitching task. You can filter the data further to show the stitch patches created in the
vertical overlaps between opposing cameras, and in this way view inspection data for surface
reconstructions.
Stitch tasks have different search types: feature detection (denoted by the text feature), image
stitching (denoted by the text stitch) and surface reconstruction (denoted by the text surface). You
can search on and analyze the stitch tasks by search type by entering the relevant search type
text (feature, stitch, or surface) in the Filter text box.

Filtering Data
In the Statistician, you can filter the Templates, Instances, and Stitching Tasks lists to display only
specific items.

➢ To filter list items

● To search for a specific item, type all or part of the item name (case sensitive) in the Filter text
box and press ENTER.
● When entering text, use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard character to replace unknown text. For
example, to display resistor templates in the Templates list, type *R*. The system displays all
templates containing the letter R (case sensitive).
● To list all items, type an asterisk (*) and press ENTER.

➢ To display all of the child tasks for a composite task

● With an assembly open in the Statistician, select View > Summarise Report.
The system uses the Component property for composite templates to decide whether to display
the child tasks.

Note: When Summarise Report is not selected, the system displays all of the child tasks for the
i composite template in the Instances list.

➢ To display passed instances only

● In the Statistician, select View > All-Pass Instances Only. The Instances list displays only those
instances that passed their inspections. Select this option when using Advanced R&R
Calculations option.

256 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Using Statistician

Selecting Items
The Templates list displays all the templates contained in the currently loaded assembly. The
Instances list displays all the tasks contained in the currently open assembly. These lists are visible
only when View > Inspection Task is selected, which is the default setting.

If you select specific templates in the Templates list, the Instances list displays the tasks associated
with the selected template. When you select items in the Instances list, the templates associated
with the selected tasks display in the Templates list.

➢ To select items in the Templates and Instances lists

● To select a single template or task, click the item.
● To select multiple templates or tasks, click each item.
● To select all items currently visible in a list, click .

➢ To deselect items in the Templates and Instances lists

● To deselect a single item, click the highlighted item.
● To deselect all selected items, click .

Note: By default, clicking an item does not automatically deselect previously selected items, so you
i can select multiple items just by clicking them. You can change this default behavior for the
Instances list, enabling you to select only one instance at a time; to override the default, select View
> Single Instance Selection option.

Sorting the Instances List

You can sort instances according to name, results, or status. You can sort results data using the mean
or standard deviation values.

➢ To sort the instance list

1. In the Statistician, select Edit > Sort Task List.
2. In the Sort Task List dialog box, click the desired sort options.
3. Click OK.

Viewing Clones of Master Templates

If you use the master template name to filter information in the Templates list, the system displays
only the master template; it does not automatically display its related cloned templates. However, you
can display the clones for any listed master templates.
1. With an assembly open in the Statistician, select the master template that contains the clones to
view.
2. Select View > Expand Masters.
The system expands the master template, displaying all of its clones in the Templates list and all
the clones' associated instances in the Instances list.

CyberOptics Corporation 257

Chapter 7: Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results

Viewing Task Details

You can view and analyze details, such as angle, probability, etc. for an individual task in the Results
window.

➢ To view task details

1. With the assembly open in the Statistician, select the inspection task (View> Stitching Task or
View Inspection Task).
2. Select the template of interest.
3. In the Instances list, select the task to analyze.
4. Select View > Details.
The Results window opens and displays the task number, X, Y, angle, height (Measurement
systems only), probability, and status of the selected instance.
5. After you view the results, click OK to close the Results window.

258 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Using Statistician

Selecting Results in the Statistician

When boards are inspected in the Inspection Station or the Assembly Editor, the result of the
inspection is stored in a Results folder within the QX Series environment. The most recent
inspection result is always stored with index number 1. With each subsequent inspection, the
system increments each result index number by one. The maximum number of results stored in this
folder is set on the Result Storage tab of the System Properties dialog box. When the results
storage file reaches capacity, the system removes the oldest result (the result with the highest index
number) from the Results folder, creating space for the newest result to be stored.

You can analyze the results and statistics for single or multiple inspections. Selections made in the
Key options and Instances list determine which results are shown in the Summary of results for
selected tasks and Statistics sections.
● If you open one inspection result in the Statistician and select multiple instances in the Instances
list, the results are given for all the selected instances.
● If you open more than one inspection result in the Statistician and select one instance in the
Instances list, the results reflect the data for the selected task from every inspection task
currently loaded.
● If you open more than one inspection result in the Statistician and select multiple instances in
the Instances list, the results reflect the data for all the selected tasks for every inspection task
currently loaded.

➢ To select results by index number

If results have been stored from previous inspections, you must know the number of subsequent
inspections so that you can select the correct results using the index option. For example, to select
the results of nine inspections, but five inspections were made with this assembly since the data of
interest was collected, you would enter 6 in the First field and 15 in the Last field.
1. Open an assembly in the Statistician.
2. In the Key section, select the Index option.
3. Do one of the following:
● To select the most recent inspection result, in the Range For section, type 1 in both the First
and Last text boxes.
● To select more than one inspection result, in the Range For section, in the First text box,
type 1. In the Last text box, type the number of results to see. For example, typing 1 for First
and 9 for Last selects the nine most recent inspections.

➢ To select results by barcode

If you use a handheld barcode reader with your QX Series System or if you defined the images
using the Bar Code text box in the Assembly Properties, you can select results according to their
barcode.
1. Open an assembly in the Statistician.
2. In the Key section, select the Bar Code option.
The system displays a list of the barcodes associated with the currently loaded assembly.
3. Select the appropriate barcode from the Barcodes list.
The system displays the results data associated with the selected barcode.

CyberOptics Corporation 259

Chapter 7: Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results

➢ To select results by lot code

You can assign a lot name to a group of inspections made in the Assembly Editor or the Inspection
Station. Inspection results that are stored with a lot code are very easy to load into the Statistician,
particularly if subsequent inspections have been made with the assembly. The lot code always
defines the same lot of results, so you do not have to remember the index numbers and keep track of
how many inspections have recently been made with the assembly in order to find and load
previous results into the Statistician.
1. Open an assembly in the Statistician.
2. In the Key section, select the Lot option.
The system displays a list of the lot codes associated with the currently loaded assembly.
3. From the Lots list, select the appropriate lot code.
The system displays the results data associated with the selected lot code.

260 QX Series System Software User Guide

 About Measurement Frames

About Measurement Frames

The data within an assembly can be considered from several different frames of reference. In the
Statistician, you can report results in a variety of frames.
● Local frame: The frame of reference for an individual task relative to the task's nominal
position, which is defined in the CAD data or when the task is created in the root task. In the
following diagram, the offset reported using the local frame would report a negative value for
both X and Y.

● Top frame: The frame of reference defined relative to the root task. The origin is defined as the
centroid of the root task. The offset value for each component is relative to the component, but the
values are reported using the top, or root task's, coordinate frame. The following diagram shows
the coordinate frame for a board with one component placed on the board. The offset between
the component on the board and where the task was found is shown in the diagram. If you select
the top frame to report the results, the offset of the component is calculated using the root task's
coordinate frame. Therefore, the offset in X and Y would be reported as positive values because
the offset between the component and the model is in a positive direction within the top (board)
frame.

CyberOptics Corporation 261

Chapter 7: Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results

Selecting Measurement Frames

When selecting the measurement frames for composite tasks, consider also the child tasks. For
example, if all tasks use the top frame except one IC, which is using its local frame, the child tasks of
the selected IC would use their parent frame, that is, the IC's local frame. All tasks use their parent
frame to report the results, so when you select the top frame option, all tasks use their parent frame,
which is the (board) top frame.

➢ To select the measurement frame

1. In the Statistician, select Measurement Frame > Advanced.
2. In the Coordinate Measurement Frames dialog box, click the Select Frames option.
3. To choose the tasks you want reported in the local frame, select the appropriate tasks in the
Frames list and then click the --> button.
The system places the tasks in the Selected Frames list.
4. Click OK.

➢ To remove items from the Selected Frames list

1. In the Coordinate Measurement Frames dialog box, select the task to remove from the
Selected Frames list.
2. Click Remove.
The system removes the selected task from the list and replaces it back in the Frames list.
3. Click OK.

➢ To change how the position of the component is reported

By default, when Statistician displays results in the Statistics section and prints results in extracted
statistics files, it reports the x and y information as an offset from nominal. You can report the
absolute coordinates of where the model found the component only if the data is reported in its top
frame.
1. In the Statistician, select Measurement Frame > CAD Frame or Measurement Frame > Conveyor
Frame.
2. Select Measurement Frame > Measurement Type > Absolute Position.
3. To return the display to the offset from nominal values, select Measurement Frame >
Measurement Type > Offset From Nominal.

262 QX Series System Software User Guide

 About Measurement Frames

Plotting Statistics
You can plot the statistics loaded into the Statistician as trends, a scatter plot, or as a histogram, or
you can use the Statistician to display failure details.
1. With the assembly open in the Statistician, select the templates of interest.
2. In the Instances list, select the instances to plot.
3. Select File > Plot > Results.
4. In the Results Plotter dialog box, select the desired check boxes to plot results. You can create
the following types of plots:
● Trends
● Scatter plots
● Histograms
● Failures
5. Click Apply to display the selected graphs.
6. When you are done viewing the graphs, click OK to close all the plot windows and the Results
Plotter dialog box.

Note: In the Results Plotter dialog box, you must click Apply to create the graphs; if you click OK,
i the windows containing the graphs close automatically.

Saving Statistics
You can save the statistics reported in the Statistician to an extracted file that you can import into a
third-party statistical or spreadsheet application. The data printed to the extracted statistics file
includes the assembly name, barcode, index, component, x, y, height, angle, probability, and status.

➢ To save statistics
1. In the Statistician, select File > Print.
2. In the Print Statistics dialog box, select the desired options.
3. Click OK.
After you make your print selection and click OK, the relevant statistics are printed to the
ExtractedStats folder within the QX Series environment. The path and file name of the file are
displayed in the status bar in the Statistician window.

CyberOptics Corporation 263

Chapter 7: Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results

Creating Height Maps

(Measurement Systems Only)
In the Statistician, QX Series measurement systems can draw height maps that plot the height
estimate of every selected stitch patch.
1. In the Statistician, select View > Stitching Task to display the stitching tasks.
2. Select the desired stitch patches.
3. Select the inspections for which to view results.
4. Select File > Plot > Height Map.
The Plot patch height map dialog box opens.
5. If you selected more than one inspection result using the Key options, you can change the scale
of the graph. Click and to change the value in the index of result text box to the
desired value.
6. Click OK.

264 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Generating Hotspot Images

Generating Hotspot Images

Using the Statistician, you can generate a color-coded image that highlights areas of a board that
represented trouble spots during the inspections being analyzed. The image plots the standard
deviations of the inspection results for selected components, using a color-coding scheme. After you
generate a hotspot image, you can view the image in the Assembly Editor.

➢ To generate hotspot images

1. Open an assembly in the Statistician and select the inspections with results to view.
2. Select Measurement Frame > Conveyor Frame.
3. Select Measurement Frame > Measurement Type > Absolute Position.
4. Select the required tasks and wait for the statistics to be calculated.
5. Select File > Image Stats.
6. In the Image Statistics dialog box, select the desired options and click OK. Wait for the image to
be generated.
7. In the Assembly Editor, select Image > Load Stored Image. Navigate to the folder where the QX
Series application is installed, and select “error_image.ks”. (Do not choose “error_image.bmp,”
located in the same folder).

Notes
● The color scale of the image is stretched to fit the data. This means that although hotspots are
visible, they are not necessarily significant.
● Different hotspot images are not quantitatively comparable.

CyberOptics Corporation 265

Chapter 7: Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results

Performing Repeatability Studies - Overview

Repeatability studies test the QX Series System using nine images of the same board, each inspected
one time. The system performs advanced calculations on the results of the nine inspections and
reports a percentage value indicating the repeatability performance of the QX Series machine.
1. Create an assembly with which to capture the images and program the inspection task for the
repeatability study.
2. Define the image positions and collect a set of good training images (five or more images) with
which to perform the study. All images should be captured on a calibrated system and checked
for any image acquisition problems (lined images, skewed mosaic images, and so on).
3. Create an image sequence file that contains the correct directory path and file names:
a. Calibrate the QX Series System.
b. Capture at least nine image files of the same board.
c. Save these images and create an image sequence file.
4. Open the assembly and import the CAD data.
5. Create a stitching task based on the first image in the image sequence file. Select Warp for the
surface model (Measurement machines).
6. Set up the fiducials (see Defining Fiducials for Repeatability Studies on page 267).
7. Train the fiducial models on a training set of five or more images; if this is not possible, use the
first image from the image sequence. Add any necessary examples to the model. The model
should contain approximately 40 examples after training (if that number of fiducials can be seen
in the training set available).
8. Test the fiducials and stitching task (see Testing the Stitching Task and Fiducials on page 269).
9. If necessary, edit the fiducials or stitching task, as follows:
● If many stitch points fall outside the recommended value, revisit the stitching task and check
the Stitcher for errors such as height or poor stitch features. Edit any necessary stitch patches.
● If any of the fiducials fall outside the recommended limit, try improving the fiducial model
or template to improve the results. You can improve the sd values of the fiducials in the
template editor by refining models, adding examples to the model, editing the model
geometry, or changing the model search properties.
10. Set up the components (see Defining Components for Repeatability Studies on page 270).
11. Inspect the image sequence using the good stitching task and fiducials.
12. Analyze the data (see Analyzing the Data in Repeatability Studies on page 272).

266 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Performing Repeatability Studies - Overview

Defining Fiducials for Repeatability Studies

When setting up repeatability studies, you must add a minimum of three fiducial tasks to the
assembly to create a reliable coordinate frame. These fiducials must be situated with two in the first
row of image groups and one in the last. Dropping six fiducials evenly spread across the board will
create the most reliable coordinate frame, taking translation, rotation, scale, and tilt into account.

If the board has fiducials that vary in appearance, you should create a model for each different
appearance so that the model is as discriminative as possible. You can either add these models to the
Good Models list for a single template or create separate templates.

➢ To set up fiducial models

1. Open the model in the Model Editor.
2. Build the model.
3. Make the task icon symmetrical and the same size as the feature. To make the task icon
symmetrical, double-click the task icon and type the appropriate values in the Width and Height
fields in the Extent Properties dialog box.
4. Create an active area 1-1/2 to 2 pixels larger than the task icon extent. Center the active area on
the task icon and make the icon symmetrical.
a. On the Geometry tab of the Model Editor, double-click the active area.
b. In the Active Area Properties dialog box, type 0 in the X and Y text boxes.
c. In the Width and Height fields, type the appropriate measurements to create a symmetrical
shape. This is important for refining the model.
5. Check the model diagnostics to ensure that no edge data is missing or chopped off, updating the
model geometry as necessary.
6. Define the model with symmetry (depending on the shape of the fiducial).
7. Optimize the model for accuracy. (Select Model > Properties and set the Discrimination field to
Low.)

8. Seed the model for the fiducials with a minimum of five good examples before training it on the
training set of boards. After training, populate the model with approximately 40 examples.
9. Auto-align the model examples (using the appropriate symmetry value for the component shape)
until the mean movement is <0.1um.
10. Check the stability of the model.
a. In the Tester pane of the Model Editor, search for the feature with the Drag and Search tool
at 0° .
b. Change the Angle Search field to 180°.
c. Click to repeat the last search. In the Tester pane, the movement should be at the
submicron level.
11. If the model is not stable, view the model diagnostics, watching for good, clean-edged data.
Amend the size of the active area if necessary, then re-refine the model. If this does not stabilize
the model, try adding more good examples to the model.
12. Save the model.

➢ To define fiducial template properties

1. Open the fiducial template open in the Unit Template Editor.

CyberOptics Corporation 267

Chapter 7: Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results

2. Make the search area large enough for the system to accurately find the fiducial (approximately
4-5mm larger than the model).
3. Make the tolerance box larger than the search area.
4. Select Edit > Properties.
5. In the Unit Template Properties dialog box, click the Search tab.
6. Set the following properties under the Miscellaneous heading:
● Board Fiducial Field: Yes
● Height Correction: Stereo
● Fixed Angle: Yes
7. Set the following properties under the Tolerances heading:
● Probability Threshold: 1.00e-010
● Angle +/- 5°
8. Set the following property under the Search Area heading:
● Search Angle +/- 2°

9. Under the Search heading, set the minimum and maximum search levels to 2, 0. The optimum
values depend somewhat on the size of the fiducial. To find out which search levels to use, look at
the data used at each resolution level in the Model Diagnostics window.

➢ To test the fiducial templates and models

1. In the Assembly Editor, select Inspect> Locators only.
2. Inspect the first training image.
3. Select each fiducial in turn and view the Details pane to ensure that the model has accurately
located the fiducial.
4. If the model is not finding the fiducials, add more examples to the model and auto-align the
model again. Inspect the first image in the image sequence with Locators only switched on.

268 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Performing Repeatability Studies - Overview

Testing the Stitching Task and Fiducials

After setting up the fiducials and the stitching task, test the fiducials for repeatability.

➢ To test the stitching task and fiducials

1. With the assembly loaded in the Assembly Editor, select Inspect > Locators Only.
2. For each image sequence to test, specify a lot code to identify the inspection results for the image
sequence and then inspect the image sequence.
3. Open the assembly in the Statistician.
4. In the Statistician, in the Key section, select the Lot Code option and then select the appropriate
lot code from the Lot Codes list.
The system displays the results data associated with the selected lot code.
5. Test the stitching task as follows:
a. Select View > Stitching Task.
b. In the Filter text box above the Stitch tasks list, type *.stitch.
c. Select Edit > Sort Task List.
d. In the Sort Task List dialog box, select X and Mean, and then click Apply. In the Statistician
Instances list, select the first (largest) instance and view its mean value in the statistical table.
This value should be between 5 and 10 microns.
e. In the Sort Task List dialog box, select Y and Mean, and then click Apply. In the Statistician
Instances list, select the first (largest) instance and view its mean value in the statistical table.
This value should be between 5 and 10 microns.
f. In the Sort Task List dialog box, select X and SD, and then click Apply. In the Statistician
Instances list, select the first (largest) instance and view its rms sd value in the statistical
table. This value should be between 5 and 10 microns.
g. In the Sort Task List dialog box, select Y and SD, and then click OK. In the Statistician
Instances list, select the first (largest) instance and view its rms sd value in the statistical
table. This value should be between 5 and 10 microns.
h. If any stitch points fall outside these limits, visit the stitching task, analyze the data, and fix
the problem if possible. If only one stitch point falls outside the limit, delete this stitch point
from the stitching task if possible.
6. Test the fiducials, as follows:
a. Select View > Inspection Task.
b. Select the fiducial template from the Templates list.
c. Sort the fiducials by sd in x. Select the first (largest) instance in the Instances list and view
its rms sd value in the statistical table. This value should be approximately 5 microns.
d. Sort the fiducials by sd in y. Select the first (largest) instance in the Instances list and view its
rms sd value in the statistical table. This value should be approximately 5 microns.
e. If the fiducials are not repeatable, review the model for number of examples, stability, and
refinement. You may need to edit the number of examples in the model, refine the model, or
apply symmetry to the model.
7. When both stitching task and fiducials are correct, close the Statistician, and return to the
Assembly Editor where you can program the components for the repeatability study.

CyberOptics Corporation 269

Chapter 7: Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results

Defining Components for Repeatability Studies

In a repeatability study, after you have set up the stitching task and defined the fiducials, and have
tested them for repeatability, you can program the component tasks. This includes defining the
component models, defining the templates, and training the component models.

➢ To set up component models for repeatability studies

1. Open the model in the Model Editor.
2. Build the model.
3. Create an active area that is 1-1/2 to 2 pixels greater than the task icon (or 0.1mm greater than
the model extent).
a. On the Geometry tab of the Model Editor, click .
b. Double-click the active area.
c. In the Active Area Properties dialog box, click Center to center the active area on the task
icon.
d. In the Width and Height fields, type the appropriate measurements to create a symmetrical
shape. This is important for refining the model.
4. Check the model diagnostics to ensure that no edge data is missing or chopped off, amending
the model geometry as necessary.
5. Define the model with the appropriate symmetry (depending on the shape of the component).
6. Optimize the model for accuracy. (Select Model > Properties and set the Discrimination field to
Low.)
7. Seed the model with a minimum of five good examples before training it on the training set of
boards, then populate the model with 100 to 200 examples (use the Update Models feature to
quickly add the examples).
8. Auto-align the model examples (using the appropriate symmetry value for the component shape)
until the mean movement is <0.1um.
9. Check the stability of the model.
a. In the Tester pane of the Model Editor, search for the feature with the Drag and Search tool
at 0° .
b. Change the Angle Search field to 180° .
c. Click to repeat the last search. In the Tester pane, the movement should be < 3
10. If the model is not stable, view the model diagnostics, watching for good, clean-edged data.
Amend the size of the active area if necessary, then re-refine the model. If this does not stabilize
the model, you may need to add more good examples.
11. Save the model.

270 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Performing Repeatability Studies - Overview

➢ To define component template properties

1. With the template open in the Unit Template Editor, select Edit > Properties.
2. In the Unit Template Properties dialog box, click the Search tab.
3. On the Search tab, set the following properties under the Miscellaneous heading:
● Height Correction: Stereo
● Fixed Angle: Yes
4. Define the tolerances as follows:
● The tolerance box should be set to 25% off pad
● Probability Threshold: 1.00e-06
● Angle +/- 10°

5. Resize the search area to be greater than the tolerance box so that Out of Position errors can be
reported. For example, an 0402 component setup should include:
a. Task icon: 1.0 X 0.5mm task icon
b. Tolerance box: 1.25 X 0.75mm
c. Search area: 1.45 X 0.95mm
6. Set the Search Angle +/- to 10°.
7. Set the minimum and maximum search levels. The search levels depend on the size and quality
of the diagnostic data for each component. To decide which search level to use, open the Model
Diagnostics window and review the data for each resolution level. Use the appropriate level
depending on the quality of the data.
For example, 0402 components and smaller should use a 1,0 search and an 0805 component will
likely use a 2, 0 search.

➢ To train component models

1. In the Assembly Editor, select the Assembly > Training Options.
2. In the Training Options dialog box, select Update Model in the Action field.
3. In the Training Option field, select Collect Passes and Failures.
4. In the Templates list, select the check box for each component template.
5. Click OK.
6. In the Assembly Editor toolbar, select the Train Assembly check box.
7. Inspect the image in the Assembly Editor. All examples on the board are added to the models.
8. Each model should contain 100 to 200 examples. If any model is not fully populated, leave the
Update Models property switched on for that template and continue to inspect images to collect
more examples. After all the models are fully populated, switch off the Update Models
properties in the Training Options dialog box.
9. Check each model carefully to verify that the examples are all correct. Delete any incorrect
examples and any examples in excess of the 200-example limit.
10. Auto-align the models.
11. Inspect the rest of the images in the training set, editing the template and model where
necessary.

CyberOptics Corporation 271

Chapter 7: Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results

Analyzing the Data in Repeatability Studies

The system calculates data on the nine inspections and displays statistical data in the lower window
of the Statistician. You can also generate R & R and ANOVA data from the Statistician.

➢ To analyze the data in repeatability studies

1. After inspecting an image sequence for the repeatability study, open the assembly in Statistician.
2. Select the barcode, the lot code, or select the nine inspections.
3. Analyze each component type in the Statistician. The rms sd value in the Statistician is a good
indication of how well the components are performing. The rms SD values should be as shown
in the following table.

Component SD X SD Y
Size

0402 <3.3um <3.3um

0603 <4.5um <4.5um

0805 <5.7um <5.7um

1206 <9um <9um

➢ To perform advanced repeatability calculations

1. With the assembly open in the Statistician, select the templates for which to view data.
2. In the Statistician, select View > All-Pass Instances Only.
3. In the lower window, enter the Specification Width for the component type's acceptable process
width.
4. Filter the data in the Templates and Instances lists by template type. (Different component types
typically have different process-width specifications, so the advanced R&R calculations are
usually carried out on a component-type basis.)
5. Select View > Advanced R and R Calculations.
6. In the Instances list, select the appropriate instances.
The Statistician performs its usual statistical calculations on the selected data while the
advanced R&R calculation is made. When the advanced calculation is complete, the Advanced
R and R Data dialog box opens, where you can view the results of the calculations.

7. Do any of the following to view the necessary data:

● By default, the Advanced R and R Data dialog box opens with the x values displayed. To
change the display between x and y data, click the Show X Values and Show Y Values
buttons.
● The Advanced R and R Data dialog box can display either ANOVA or repeatability data.
The default is to display R&R (repeatability) data. To switch between the two sets of data,
click the Show ANOVA and Show R&R buttons.

➢ To analyze ANOVA data

Analyze each component type in the ANOVA table, which provides a full statistical analysis of the
results. This table must contain data only for passed components and for components with the same
process width (dimensions). Follow these steps to display the ANOVA table:

272 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Performing Repeatability Studies - Overview

1. In the Statistician, select the appropriate templates from the Templates list.
2. Select View > Expand Masters.
3. Select View > All-Pass Instances Only.
4. Select View > Advanced R and R Calculations.
The system puts a check mark next to the Advanced R and R Calculations menu item to indicate
that the calculations are switched on.
5. In the Specification Width field, enter the appropriate value.
6. To select all the (passed) components and display the ANOVA table, click in the Instances
list.
7. Verify that the measurement figures are correct according to your repeatability requirements.
For example, the sigma value (in the Measurement R and R section of the table) must be greater
than 3 in both X and Y.

➢ To save advanced R&R data

1. In the Advanced R and R Data dialog box, click Save.
2. In the Save R and R Data dialog box, create or select the library in which to save the advanced
R&R data.
3. In the File name text box, type the name for the file where you want to save the data.
4. Click Save and then click Close.

➢ To stop the advanced repeatability calculations

● In the Advanced R and R Data dialog box, press the ESC key.

Exporting Repeatability Data

(Measurement Systems Only)
R&R data is generated and analyzed during repeatability studies. You can export the stored data
into a third-party statistical or spreadsheet application for further analysis.

➢ To export R&R data

1. In the Statistician Instances list, select that tasks to export.
2. Select File > Export R+R Data.
3. In the Export R+R Data dialog box, navigate to the folder and type the name for the file that
will contain the exported data.
4. Click Save.

CyberOptics Corporation 273

Chapter 7: Inspecting Images and Analyzing Results

274 QX Series System Software User Guide

 8 Synchronizing Data

About the System Repository 276

Synchronizing Assemblies 277

Synchronizing Individual Models and Templates 279

Overriding the Synchronization Process 281

CyberOptics Corporation
Chapter 8: Synchronizing Data

About the System Repository

The QX Series System helps reduce programming and debugging time by enabling you to share
templates and models among many assemblies on one system or even among assemblies across
multiple networked systems. To manage the shared data, the QX Series System uses two types of
repository:
● Assemblies, which contain only the templates and models used to inspect a single board.
● The system repository, which contains templates and models that can be shared among different
assemblies.

Assemblies can be synchronized with the system repository or can remain independent of the
shared system data. When you edit models and templates in a local assembly, the assembly data no
longer matches the data in the system repository. The QX Series System software tools enable you to
resynchronize the data when necessary by updating the local assembly with more recent models
and templates from the system repository, and by committing more recent models and templates
from the local assembly to the system repository.

Assembly
Product 1

UPDATE THE DATA

When an assembly is Any changes made in an

opened, the data in the assembly can be committed
assembly should be updated to the system repository and
with the data from the system shared among multiple
repository assemblies

COMMIT THE DATA

System Repository

COMMIT THE DATA

COMMIT THE DATA

UPDATE
UPDATE THE
THE DATA
DATA UPDATE THE DATA

Assembly Assembly
Product 2 Product 3

276 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Synchronizing Assemblies

Synchronizing Assemblies

Caution: When synchronizing data make sure that you do not overwrite newer definitions with
older definitions. Overwriting the system repository data with the data from an assembly can affect
other production-ready assemblies. Test all the changes to an assembly before you commit the data
to the system repository, particularly when many programmers access the system repository data.

CyberOptics recommends that you update local templates and models from the system repository
before you begin editing the assembly. This will help ensure that you are working with the most
recent, most reliable data.

➢ To synchronize an assembly with the system repository

1. Open an assembly in the Assembly Editor.
The system compares the models and templates in the assembly with those in the system
repository. If there are differences, the word “Unsynchronized” appears in the Assembly Editor
title bar.
2. Load the board image.
3. On the File menu, click Synchronise.
The Global Synchronise wizard opens and displays the templates and models in the assembly
that do not match those in the system repository. Each unsynchronized assembly item is
prefixed with a letter indicating what action to take to synchronize the data with the system
repository.

Because the synchronization process is controlled in stages, the Global Synchronise wizard does
not necessarily display all the unsynchronized templates and models at each step.
To quickly view all unsynchronized models and templates in the assembly, click Show All.
While in Show All mode, you are prevented from continuing with the synchronization process.
To continue synchronizing the assembly, click Actions.
4. Follow the instructions in the Global Synchronise wizard to synchronize the data in the
assembly.
Because you have created new templates and models in the assembly, you must add the new
assembly data or commit the assembly changes to the system repository. Committing the
assembly changes to the system repository automatically saves the current assembly. Updating
the assembly data with the system repository data does not automatically save the assembly.
After updating, you must save the current assembly in the Assembly Editor.

CyberOptics Corporation 277

Chapter 8: Synchronizing Data

5. When the Global Synchronise wizard displays “Step 3,” click Synchronise.
6. After the synchronization process is complete, click Close to return to the Assembly Editor.

➢ To synchronize assemblies when opened

You can configure the system to always use the most recent model and template definitions, whether
this is assembly or system data, when you open an assembly in the Inspection Station.
1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties.
2. Select the Miscellaneous tab.
3. In the Sychronize section, select the Run Synchronised System.
4. Click OK.

278 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Synchronizing Individual Models and Templates

Synchronizing Individual Models and

Templates
When you open a template or model within an assembly, you can update the template or model
definition with the definition stored in the system repository, thus overwriting the current definition
in the assembly. Or you can commit the definition of the local template or model to the system
repository, thus overwriting the current definition in the system repository. Committing the edited
templates and models in an assembly to the system repository allows the definitions to be shared
among many different assemblies.

➢ To synchronize an individual model or template definition

1. Open an assembly in the Assembly Editor.
2. Load the board image.
3. To update a model definition, select the desired model and launch the Model Editor.
- or -
To update a template definition, select the desired template and launch its associated Template
Editor.
4. In the Model Editor or Template Editor, select File > Read From System to overwrite the model or
template definition in the local assembly with the model or template definition from the system
repository.
5. Click to save the changes and close the Model Editor or Template Editor.

➢ To commit an individual model or template definition

1. Open an assembly in the Assembly Editor.
2. Load the board image.
3. To commit a model definition, select the desired model and launch the Model Editor.
- or -
To commit a template definition, select the desired template and launch its associated Template
Editor.
4. In the Model Editor or Template Editor, select File > Save and Write to System to overwrite the
model or template definition in the system repository with the model or template definition from
the local assembly.
5. Click to save the changes and close the Model Editor or Template Editor.

CyberOptics Corporation 279

Chapter 8: Synchronizing Data

➢ To commit only new models and templates

1. Open an assembly in the Assembly Editor.
The system compares the models and templates in the assembly with those in the system
repository, looking for differences. If there are differences, the word “Unsynchronized”appears in
the Assembly Editor title bar.
2. In the Assembly Editor, select File > Synchronise.
3. In the Global Synchronise - Models and Templates dialog box, click Advanced.
4. In the Advanced (Update/Commit) Options dialog box, click Commit NEW.
5. In the message that asks if you want to proceed, click OK.
6. When the process is complete, in the Advanced (Update/Commit) Options dialog box, click
Cancel.

7. In the Global Synchronise wizard, click Close.

280 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Overriding the Synchronization Process

Overriding the Synchronization Process

Using the Global Synchronise wizard, you can synchronize differences between an assembly and
the system repository using a structured process that assures that the most recent data is copied to
both the assembly and the system repository. However, you can override the structured
synchronization process and either commit all the assembly data to the system repository or update
all the assembly data from the system repository. CyberOptics recommends that you do this only
with extreme care, because you could accidentally overwrite newer data with older, less accurate
information and possibly affect other production-ready assemblies.

➢ To commit all changes to the system repository

1. Open an assembly in the Assembly Editor.
2. In the Assembly Editor, select File > Synchronise.
3. In the Global Synchronise - Models and Templates dialog box, click Advanced.
4. In the Advanced (Update/Commit) Options dialog box, click Commit All.
5. In the message that asks if you want to proceed, click OK.
6. When the process is complete, in the Advanced (Update/Commit) Options dialog box, click
Cancel.

7. In the Global Synchronise wizard, click Close.

➢ To update all unsynchronized objects in the local assembly

1. Open an assembly in the Assembly Editor.
2. In the Assembly Editor, select File > Synchronise.
3. In the Global Synchronise - Models and Templates dialog box, click Advanced.
4. In the Advanced (Update/Commit) Options dialog box, click Update All.
5. In the message that asks if you want to proceed, click OK.
6. When the process is complete, in the Advanced (Update/Commit) Options dialog box, click
Cancel.
7. In the Global Synchronise wizard, click Close.

CyberOptics Corporation 281

Chapter 8: Synchronizing Data

Viewing All Unsynchronized Objects

When you are synchronizing differences between a local assembly and the shared system
repository, the Global Synchronize dialog box displays lists of the unsynchronized templates and
the unsynchronized models. The Global Synchronise dialog box controls how the data is
synchronized by guiding you through the three-step synchronization process. This means that not
all unsynchronized templates and models are necessarily shown for each step. If desired, you can
list all unsynchronized models and templates.

➢ To view unsynchronized objects

1. Open an assembly in the Assembly Editor.
The system compares the models and templates in the assembly with those in the system
repository, looking for differences. If there are differences, the word “Unsynchronized”appears in
the Assembly Editor title bar.
2. In the Assembly Editor, select File > Synchronise.
3. In the Global Synchronize dialog box, click Show All.

Note: While in Show All mode, you are prevented from continuing with the synchronization
i process. To continue synchronizing the assembly, click Actions.

Viewing Active Objects

When multiple assemblies share the same models or templates from the system repository, the
system displays a message stating which models and templates are shared when the assemblies are
open at the same time. You can view these shared objects in the Assembly Editor.

➢ To view active objects

● In the Assembly Editor, select View > Active Objects.
The system highlights the objects that are shared by the opened assemblies.

282 QX Series System Software User Guide

 9 Improving Discrimination

Testing a Changed Template for Discrimination 284

Running Blank Board Studies 285

Analyzing the Reasons for Poor Discrimination 288

Editing the Stitching Task to Improve Discrimination 290

Verifying that the Fiducials Are Locating Correctly 295

Editing a Model to Improve Its Discrimination 296

Editing a Template to Improve Its Discrimination 300

CyberOptics Corporation
Chapter 9: Improving Discrimination

Testing a Changed Template for

Discrimination
You can make sure that changed templates still discriminate between good components and bad
components by creating and inspecting a bad training set.

➢ To test discrimination
1. Create a bad training set using a “golden”blank board so that you can collect golden examples of
blank pads. When creating the bad training set, collect both passes and failures so that you
create a bad training set for every template.
2. In the Assembly Editor, open the assembly to test.
3. Open and edit the composite and unit templates as needed.
4. In the Unit or Composite Template Editor, select Training Set > Load Bad Set.
5. Select Inspect > Inspect Training Set.
6. In the Training Set pane, select Failure in the Sort By list, and then click .
7. Examine the inspection results in the Training Set pane. All of the items in the training set
should fail inspection, since the bad training set contains only examples of blank pads and other
tasks that should fail.
8. If you have any passed components (false passes), edit the template or model as needed to
improve its discrimination.

284 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Running Blank Board Studies

Running Blank Board Studies

After editing the templates and models for a production assembly, test the discrimination of the
models in the assembly against a blank board. Running blank board studies helps prevent
components that should fail inspection from passing. In blank board studies, an unpopulated,
pasted board is inspected. Because the board contains no components, every component inspection
task should fail (although fiducials should still pass); any task that does not fail is considered a false
acceptance.

Although you should try to achieve a low false call rate (around 100 ppm), you should also be able
to achieve 0 false acceptances.
● If you inspect boards in the pre-reflow stage, obtain an image of a single, blank, pasted board.
After you capture the image, you can return the board to the production line for component
placement.
● If you inspect boards in the post-reflow stage, obtain images of a sequence of blank boards that
have been pasted and then reflowed. After you capture the images, you must dispose of the
boards.

Note: If you are going to use production training sets in conjunction with a blank board study,
i make sure that you delete all existing production training sets for the assembly before you run the
blank board studies.

Running a Study on One Blank Board

➢ To run a study on one board
1. In the Assembly Editor, open the assembly to test.
2. Obtain an image of a blank, pasted board. After you capture the image, you can return the
board to the production line for component placement.
3. In the Assembly Editor, load the image of the blank board.
4. To inspect the blank board image, select Inspect > Stored.
5. In the Inspection Results pane, click .
The system displays only those tasks that passed their inspection.
6. Make sure that there are no passed components (the fiducials must still pass the inspection). If
there are false passes, edit the templates or models as needed to improve their discrimination.

CyberOptics Corporation 285

Chapter 9: Improving Discrimination

Running a Study on a Sequence of Blank Boards

(post-reflow)
To use failure collection in conjunction with a blank board study, you must make sure that all
existing training assemblies are deleted before you run the blank board studies.

➢ To run a study on a sequence of boards

1. Make sure the failed task assemblies have all been deleted.
2. In the Assembly Editor, open the assembly to test.
3. Create an image sequence of a series of boards that have been pasted and then reflowed. After
you capture the images, you must dispose of the boards.
4. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly > Training Options.
The Training Options dialog box opens.

a. In the Actions field, select Add to Bad Training Set.

b. In the Training Option field, select Collect Passes.
c. Click OK to save the options and close the Training Options dialog box.
5. Load the sequence of blank board images into the Assembly Editor.
6. On the Assembly Editor toolbar, select the Train Assembly check box.
7. Inspect the image sequence.
If any component passes its inspection, the system creates a bad training set for the passed
component.

286 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Running Blank Board Studies

8. Check to see if any bad training sets were created for the components (ignore training sets for
fiducials, since these should still pass inspection).
a. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly > Training Sets.
b. In the Local Training Sets dialog box, select Bad Training Sets from the Training Set
Type list.
c. If there are false passes, double-click the training set name to open the associated Template
Editor.
d. Edit the template or model to improve its discrimination.
e. Save the changes to the template or model.
9. After you are done using the training assemblies, delete them.

CyberOptics Corporation 287

Chapter 9: Improving Discrimination

Analyzing the Reasons for Poor

Discrimination
If your assembly is producing a high false-call rate or a false acceptance rate above 0 ppm, edit the
data in your assembly to improve its discrimination.

First identify the reasons for poor discrimination, and then edit the relevant object to improve
assembly performance. Use the following table to help identify the reason for and possible solution
to the problem. Editing the data and implementing the solutions are discussed later in this section.

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

The high false call rate is due to The Stitcher Editor is not Check the height map for any
many “Out of Position” errors, but stitching correctly. obvious problems.
the root task does not appear to
align with the images very well. Make sure the fiducial stitch
patches locate correctly; if they do
not, edit them. You will probably
have to restitch the image if the
fiducial stitch patches need moving.

Make sure the Stitcher Editor is well

populated with stitch patches.

The fiducials are not locating Verify that the fiducials are locking
correctly. on to the correct feature.

Populate the fiducial model

adequately (50-150 examples).

Check the examples in the fiducial

model to ensure that they are all
legitimate and aligned correctly.

Refine the model to align the

examples.

Verify that the model has symmetry

enabled (if applicable).

288 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Analyzing the Reasons for Poor Discrimination

Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution

One component type is causing a Components with different Create different models for the
high false call rate. appearances are used to build different component styles.
the boards.

The data in the model does not Populate the model so that it
adequately describe the includes all the legitimate variations
variation in the part. of the component. If the
appearance of the component
varies greatly, you may have to
create multiple models for that
component type.

Ensure that the active area does

not include too much background
data.

Ensure that the examples in the

model are legitimate and well
aligned. Refine the model as
necessary.

The high false call rate is due to The angular tolerance set in the Edit the angular tolerance value in
many “Angle Out of Range” errors template is too tight. the template.
but the components are not overly
skewed.

Some components have passed The model contains too much Reduce the size of the active area
the blank board study. background information. to include less background
information.

The model contains poor data. Check the examples in the model
for incorrect or poor examples.
Refine the model as necessary.

CyberOptics Corporation 289

Chapter 9: Improving Discrimination

Editing the Stitching Task to Improve

Discrimination
Any edits made to the stitching task should always be done on the image used to originally define
the stitching task.

Checking the Height Map for Problems

(Measurement Systems Only)
➢ To check the height map
1. Open the assembly in the Assembly Editor.
2. Select Assembly > Edit Stitcher to open the Stitcher Editor.
3. In the Stitcher Editor, select the View > Surface Plot.
The Plot Height Surface dialog box opens.

290 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Editing the Stitching Task to Improve Discrimination

4. Click Apply.
The Non-linear Surface Height Map opens.

X = The width of the board as defined by the image area in the Image Positions Editor.
Y = The length of the board as defined by the image area in the Image Positions Editor.
Z = The height of the boards surface in relation to the system plane of calibration.
A good stitching task should produce a flat or slightly warped height map. If the height map
shows excessive warpage or occasional peaks and troughs, recheck the camera setup, system
calibration, and stitching task.
5. Edit the stitching task by verifying that the fiducials locate accurately and that the Stitcher Editor
is well populated.
The stitch patches must not stitch on components or any other feature with height, nor should the
stitch patches be placed on large holes that the system could potentially see through.

CyberOptics Corporation 291

Chapter 9: Improving Discrimination

Verifying That the Fiducial Stitch Patches Are Locating

Correctly
➢ To check fiducial stitch patch results
1. Open the assembly in the Assembly Editor.
2. Select the Assembly > Edit Stitcher menu to open the Stitcher Editor.
3. In the Stitcher Editor, change the view to the fiducial view (select View > Fiducials).
The system puts a check mark next to the Fiducials menu item and displays the fiducials.
4. To open the Stitch Point Results window, select View > Results.

292 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Editing the Stitching Task to Improve Discrimination

5. Double-click a fiducial stitch patch.

The Results for Fiducial window opens and displays the result for the selected fiducial stitch
patch.

The task icon should have located on the correct feature. If the task icon has located on something
else, you must do one of the following:
● Increase the search area using the Resize tool so that the model can find the feature reliably.
Make sure other features with the same appearance do not appear in the increased search
area.
● Delete the fiducial stitch patch and use something else. If you choose a different fiducial
stitch patch, you must restitch the image. (Alternatively, you can use the Reset Models
feature.
● Move the fiducial stitch patch onto another, more reliable, feature. If you move the fiducial
stitch patch onto a different feature, you must restitch the image. (Alternatively, you can use
the Reset Models feature.
6. Close the Results for Fiducial window.
7. Close the Stitch Point Results window.

CyberOptics Corporation 293

Chapter 9: Improving Discrimination

Using Reset Models in the Stitcher Editor

➢ To reset models
1. In the Stitcher Editor, change the view to the Stitch Patch view (select View > Fiducials).
The system removes the check mark next to the Fiducials menu item and displays the stitch
patches.
2. Select the Edit > Reset Models menu.
The Stitcher Editor runs, the stitch patches move, and each model is reset according to the result
of the feature detection search.
3. Save the stitching task (File > Save) and exit from the Stitcher Editor (File > Exit).
4. In the Assembly Editor, save the changes to the assembly.

Populating the Stitching Task

➢ To populate the stitching task
1. In the Stitcher Editor, if the stitching task is poorly populated, place more stitch patches on the
image.
2. Save the changes to the stitching task.

294 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Verifying that the Fiducials Are Locating Correctly

Verifying that the Fiducials Are Locating

Correctly
➢ To verify fiducials
1. In the Assembly Editor, in the After Loading an Image field, select Inspect All Locators.
2. Click Inspect.
3. When the inspection is finished, in the Inspection Results panel, click .
4. In the Results Options dialog box, clear the Show Tasks check box and ensure that the Show
Locators check box is selected.

5. In the Filtering list, select Model.

6. Click OK to save the settings and close the Results Options dialog box.
The system displays only the locator results in the Inspection Results pane.
7. In the Inspection Results pane, click each fiducial task name in turn and view the image in the
Details pane to make sure the task icon accurately locks on to the fiducial.

8. If the task icon does not align with the fiducial feature, you must edit the model or template as
described in subsequent pages.

CyberOptics Corporation 295

Chapter 9: Improving Discrimination

Editing a Model to Improve Its Discrimination

To maximize discrimination in the model, the model should:
● Not include too much background in the active area
● Contain only legitimate examples
● Contain only well aligned examples
● Contain approximately 50-150 examples

The procedures for editing a model to improve its discrimination are similar for fiducials and
components. The differences are noted in the relevant sections.

After viewing the Model Diagnostics, you can also:

● Randomly remove examples by sub-sampling as described in Deleting Examples from a Model
on page 190.
● Refine the model as described in Automatically Aligning Examples on page 193.

Viewing Model Diagnostics

The Model Diagnostics dialog box provides a visual representation of how the QX Series System
views the data contained within a model. You can use model diagnostics to ensure that the model
definition (geometry and examples) is clear and well defined by:
● Viewing the effects of active and inactive areas. For example, you can verify that active areas
have been defined such that edge data is included in the model; including the edge data
improves the performance of the modeling system. If you find that the data has poor or missing
edge data, change the model geometry to include this information.
● Viewing the full range of examples in the model. If you see unexpected variations in the
examples, you may want to examine the examples in more detail and remove examples if
necessary.
● Viewing the model examples at different resolution levels, to help you determine how to set the
Minimum Search Level on the General tab of the Model Properties dialog box.

➢ To view the data included in the model geometry

1. In the Model Editor, select Model > Diagnostics.
The Model Diagnostics window opens.
2. In the Mode pane, select the associated check boxes for the modes of variation to view.
3. In the Resolution Level field, select the resolution level at which to view the data.

Note: The resolution at which the data is searched can be specified on the Search tab of the Unit
i Template Properties dialog box.

4. In the Animation Speed field, specify the speed at which to animate the images. The greater
the number, the faster the animation.
5. In the No. of SD’s field, specify the number of standard deviations to use during animation.
6. Click to view the animation based on your current selections.

296 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Editing a Model to Improve Its Discrimination

7. When you are done viewing the animation, click .

Using a 1206 capacitor as an example, the diagnostics should look similar to the diagnostics
shown in the following figure.

In the above image, you can clearly see the outline of the component without viewing too much
background information, such as the pads. The edges are clear - not cut off, and there is no “noise”in
the model.

CyberOptics Corporation 297

Chapter 9: Improving Discrimination

If the model diagnostics display too much background data or not enough component edge data, the
model diagnostics may appear as shown in the following figures.

If your diagnostics are similar to the above examples, you should consider editing the model
geometry.
8. Click Close to close the Model Diagnostics window.

298 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Editing a Model to Improve Its Discrimination

Deciding Which Examples to Delete from the Model

Verify the examples in the model to make sure each example is legitimate. If the model contains
incorrect examples, delete them.

The following figures show a Good example and two incorrect examples.

1206 Capacitor –
Good Example

0805 Resistor –
Wrong part (delete)

Missing Part
(delete)

Note: When using the CyberOptics template library to program models on the QX Series System,
i delete the examples provided in the model and add examples from your specific assembly.

CyberOptics Corporation 299

Chapter 9: Improving Discrimination

Editing a Template to Improve Its

Discrimination
You can edit template properties to help improve a high false call rate. However, you should not
increase the tolerances to reduce the false call rate so much that it causes the false-acceptance rate to
increase.

➢ To edit a template to improve discrimination

1. In the Assembly Editor, double-click the task icon to open the template in its associated Template
Editor.

300 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Editing a Template to Improve Its Discrimination

2. In the Template Editor click .

The Unit Template Properties dialog box opens.

3. Edit the relevant template properties.

4. Click OK to save the changes and close the Template Properties dialog box.
5. In the Template Editor click to save the template and exit from the Template Editor.
6. In the Assembly Editor click to save the assembly.
7. Synchronize the assembly with the system repository.
8. Run a blank board study on the assembly to ensure that the changes have not caused a
false-acceptance problem.

i Note: You must allow a period of production before you can assess the effects of the changes.

CyberOptics Corporation 301

Chapter 9: Improving Discrimination

302 QX Series System Software User Guide

 10 System Administration

Using the Inspection Cell Editor 305

Saving and Loading Images 306

Viewing Camera Properties 308

Loading Firmware Files 309

Adjusting Conveyor Width 310

Calibrating the Conveyor Width Adjuster 311

Setting the Conveyor Speed 314

Setting the Conveyor Direction 315

Configuring SMEMA 316

Calibrating the Cameras 317

Aligning the Cameras 318

Setting the Home Offset 319

Setting Up Cameras 320

Calibrating the QX Series System 321

Saving an Image of the Calibration Target 324

Enabling and saving lighting calibration 325

Changing the Task Visibility 326

Testing the Inspection Cell Settings 327

Testing the System Barcode Reader 328

Testing Hardware Signals 328

Testing the System Barcode Reader 328

Configuring and deleting full results 332

CyberOptics Corporation
Chapter 10: System Administration

Configuring shop floor 333

Enabling clone functionality 334

Using an NG Stacker 335

Using Existing Assemblies on QX600 337

Calibrating the distance between the two SIMs 323

Generating .R file for pass board 338

Configuring pause time in the Rework Station 341

304 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Using the Inspection Cell Editor

Using the Inspection Cell Editor

The inspection cell contains information about the hardware setup of the QX Series System, such as
the number of cameras used, camera aperture settings, and calibration results. The QX Series
software uses this information to correctly capture images during inspections. The Inspection Cell
Editor enables you to view and edit properties in the inspection cell, set the camera apertures, and
check the system hardware, barcode reader, and check and adjust conveyor settings.

If you make changes to inspection cell properties, you must save the cell for the changes to be
applied. You can also create a copy of an inspection cell or save changes to the current cell without
overwriting the original cell properties.

➢ To open an inspection cell

1. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
2. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select File > Open Cell.
3. In the Open Cell dialog box, select the desired library and inspection cell.
4. Click Open.

➢ To save changes
● In the Inspection Cell Editor, select File > Save Cell.

➢ To save a copy of an inspection cell

1. In the Inspection Cell Editor, open the inspection cell you want to copy.
2. Select File > Save Cell As.
3. In the Save Cell dialog box, select or create a library in which to save the cell.
4. Type a name for the new inspection cell in the Cells list.
5. Click Save.

CyberOptics Corporation 305

Chapter 10: System Administration

Saving and Loading Images

You can save camera images and load existing camera images using the Inspection Cell Editor.

➢ To save camera images

1. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select File > Save Image.
2. In the Save Mosaic Image dialog box, navigate to the folder where the image should be stored,
and enter a name for the image.
3. Click Save to save the image with the current name.

➢ To load a stored image

1. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
2. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select File > Load Image.
3. In the Load Mosaic Image dialog box, select the library where the image is stored.
4. Select the image name.
5. Click Open.

306 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Viewing Images in the Inspection Cell Editor

Viewing Images in the Inspection Cell Editor

When a board is in position under the QX Series cameras, the system captures an image of the
board and displays the image in the Inspection Cell Editor. You can switch between viewing the live
image and the still image.

In addition, when you capture an image in the Inspection Cell Editor, the system displays the entire
image captured by all the installed cameras. You also can display each camera image individually.

➢ To view live or still images

1. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
2. Open an inspection cell.
3. In the Inspection Cell Editor, do one of the following:
● To view a live image, click the Live button.
● To view a still image, click the Still button.

➢ To display the image captured by one camera

1. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
2. In the Camera section, click the number of the camera that corresponds to the image you want to
view.
For example, if you click camera 5, the system displays only the image captured by camera 5. A
cross-hair in the center of the Image window marks the center of the image.

CyberOptics Corporation 307

Chapter 10: System Administration

Viewing Camera Properties

Camera positions are adjusted and the system calibrated during installation. After the cameras are
set up and the system has passed calibration, the cameras should not need to be readjusted.

For detailed information about camera setup, refer to the QX500/QX500-X System Hardware
Manual.

➢ To view camera properties

1. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
2. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select a camera in the Camera section.
3. Select Camera> Properties
Typically, camera field of view properties must be reset to their default values if you re-align the
cameras or move the QX Series machine, thus moving the cameras. You can reset properties here
by clicking Set to Defaults or by calibrating the cameras (calibrating the cameras automatically
resets the field of view).
4. Click Cancel to close the dialog box without making changes, or OK to save your changes and
close the dialog box.

308 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Loading Firmware Files

Loading Firmware Files

Occasionally, CyberOptics may supply you with firmware upgrades for the MicroLYNX, Omron
and ELMO controller. Use the Inspection Cell Editor to upgrade or re-install the QX Series System
firmware as needed.

➢ To upload the firmware file

1. Ensure that the upper door of the QX Series machine is securely closed, and then press the
Reset/Start button.
2. Start the QX Series application and log on as a programmer or hardware engineer.
3. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
4. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select File > Conveyor Setup.
5. In the Conveyor Setup dialog box, select the firmware file from the list.
6. Click Load Firmware.
7. Click OK at the confirmation prompt.
8. When the firmware file has been uploaded, a message appears indicating the status of the
firmware installation. Click OK to close the dialog box and continue.
9. Click Settings to configure the conveyor settings if needed, or click Close to close the dialog
box and return to the Inspection Cell Editor.

CyberOptics Corporation 309

Chapter 10: System Administration

Adjusting Conveyor Width

The QX Series conveyor consists of a fixed rail on the operator side of the machine and an adjustable
rail on the opposite side. You can automatically adjust the conveyor width using the QX Series
software, or you can manually adjust conveyor width.

Adjusting the Conveyor Width Automatically

➢ To adjust the conveyor width automatically
1. Put the QX Series machine in Off Line mode.
2. Open the upper door of the QX Series machine and remove any boards from the conveyor.
3. Close the door to the QX Series machine.
4. Start the QX Series application and log on as a programmer.
5. Press the Reset/Start button and allow the machine to reset itself.
6. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
7. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select Conveyor > Adjust Width.
A message appears asking you to verify that the machine is in Off Line mode and there are no
boards in the machine.
8. Click OK.
9. If the width of the QX Series conveyor has been manually adjusted, home the conveyor as
described in Homing the Conveyor on page 312.
10. In the Conveyor Width Adjuster dialog box, type the panel width (in millimeters) in the New
Width text box, and then click Go To.
11. Verify that the conveyor width is correct, as follows:
a. Place the board on either the upstream or downstream conveyor section adjoining the QX
Series machine.
b. Manually move the board along the conveyor section, through the QX Series machine, and
along the next conveyor section in the line. The board should fit snugly between the rails and
move smoothly without catching.
c. If the conveyor width is not correct, in the Conveyor Width Adjuster dialog box, click Fine-
Tune, and then click Widen by 0.5mm or Narrow by 0.5mm until the width is correct.

12. When the width is correct, click Close.

13. Click OK at the prompt to put the machine in Inspect mode before starting an in-line
inspection.
14. Close the Inspection Cell Editor and put the QX Series machine in Inspect mode.

See Also
● Calibrating the Conveyor Width Adjuster on page 311
● Loading Firmware Files on page 309

310 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Calibrating the Conveyor Width Adjuster

Adjusting the Conveyor Width Manually

Both the QX Series conveyor and the optional half-meter access conveyor consist of a fixed rail on the
operator side of the system and an adjustable rail on the opposite side. Both conveyors can be
adjusted manually using a crank handle. Refer to the QX500/QX500-X System Hardware Manual
for information about how to adjust the conveyor manually.

Calibrating the Conveyor Width Adjuster

The QX Series System accepts boards of different widths. You can automatically adjust the QX Series
conveyor width using the QX Series software, but before doing so, the conveyor width adjuster must
be calibrated. CyberOptics calibrates the conveyor width adjuster before shipping the QX Series
machine, so you will not typically need to do this.

➢ To calibrate the conveyor width adjuster

1. Log on to the QX Series application as a programmer.
2. Verify that there are no boards in the QX Series machine:
3. On the QX Series machine, turn the Mode Control switch to Off Line mode.
4. Open the upper door of the QX Series machine and remove any boards from the QX Series
conveyor.
5. Close the door to the QX Series machine.
6. Press the Reset/Start button and allow the machine to reset itself.
The amber light on the signal tower should flash.
7. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
8. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select Conveyor > Adjust Width.
9. In the Conveyor Width Adjuster dialog box, click Fine-Tune, and then click Re-Calibrate.
The Conveyor Width Calibration Wizard opens. Follow the prompts in the wizard; press F1 or
click Help for details about using each dialog box in the wizard.

Notes

i ● If you manually adjust the width of the conveyor using the crank handle, the position of the
conveyor will have changed independently of the software. In this case, you must home the
conveyor before you can automatically adjust the conveyor width again.
● To set the conveyor direction, see Loading Firmware Files on page 309.

CyberOptics Corporation 311

Chapter 10: System Administration

Homing the Conveyor

Homing the conveyor resets the conveyor to its widest cross-width position. If you have manually
adjusted the conveyor width, you must re-home the conveyor using the Conveyor Width Adjuster
dialog box. As a best practice, CyberOptics also recommends that you re-home the conveyor after
engaging the Emergency Stop button or defeating the safety interlock switch to resynchronize the
stepper motor controller with the QX Series System.

➢ To home the conveyor

1. On the QX Series System, turn the Mode Control switch to OFFLINE mode.
2. Remove any boards from the conveyor and shut the doors of the QX Series machine.
3. Start the QX Series application and log on as a programmer or hardware engineer.
4. Press the Reset/Start button on the QX Series.

Note: If you open the upper door at any time while adjusting the conveyor width, you must
i restart the stepper motor controller again after you close the door and before interacting further
with the QX Series software. To restart the stepper motor controller, press the Reset/Start button.
If the stepper motor controller is working, the green light on the signal tower turns on.

5. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.

6. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select Conveyor >Adjust Width.
A message appears asking you to verify that there are no boards in the machine and that the
machine is in OFFLINE mode.
7. Verify that there are no boards in the machine and that the machine is in OFFLINE mode and
and then click OK.
8. In the Conveyor Width Adjuster dialog box, click Fine-Tune.
The Additional Movements section appears.

9. Click Go Home.
10. If a confirmation message appears asking if you want to return the conveyor to the home
position, click Yes.
The adjustable conveyor rail moves to its home position.

312 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Homing the Conveyor

11. Click Close to exit the Conveyor Width Adjuster dialog box.
The conveyor belts move as the system attempts to locate a board, and a message appears asking
you to set the QX Series to Inspect mode before starting an in-line inspection.
12. Click OK.
The conveyor belts move as the system again attempts to locate a board.

CyberOptics Corporation 313

Chapter 10: System Administration

Setting the Conveyor Speed

Use the Inspection Cell Editor to access the settings to control conveyor speed. Use caution when
adjusting conveyor speeds, as small changes can affect system performance.
● Make sure that load and unload speeds match the settings of other equipment on the line. This
reduces the risk of stitcher errors, prevents belts from slipping, and helps keep the belts tacky.

➢ To set the conveyor speed

1. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
2. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select File > Conveyor Setup.
3. In the Conveyor Setup dialog box, click Settings.
4. In the Conveyor speed section, set the following values:

Value For QX Series System For Flex System

Load speed Speed at which the conveyor moves when Speed at which the conveyor moves when
transferring a panel from the upstream transferring a panel from the
conveyor on to the QX Series System upstream conveyor onto the Flex system
conveyor. You can enter values from 10 to 350 conveyor. You can enter values from 10 to
mm/s. By default, the load speed is set to 225 1000
mm/s. mm/s, however, load speeds slower than 65 to
70 mm per second may cause the machine
to time out when loading a panel from the
upstream conveyor.

Unload speed Speed at which the conveyor moves when Speed at which the conveyor moves when
transferring a panel from the QX Series transferring a panel from the
System conveyor on to the downstream Flex system conveyor onto the downstream
conveyor. You can enter values from 10 to 350 conveyor. You can enter values from 10 to
mm/s. By default, the unload speed is set to 1000 mm/s.
225 mm/s.

Indexing The acceleration of the conveyor as it moves to The acceleration of the conveyor as it moves to
acceleration capture the next image during image capture the next
acquisition. You can enter values from 10 to image during image acquisition. You can enter
400 mm/s2. By default, the indexing values from 10 to 2000 mm/s2.
acceleration is set to 200 mm/s2.

Indexing The deceleration of the conveyor as it moves The deceleration of the conveyor as it moves
deceleration upon completing an image acquisition during upon completing an
indexing. You can enter values from 10 to 400 image acquisition during indexing. You can
mm/s2. By default, the indexing deceleration is enter values from 10 to 2000 mm/s2.
set to 200 mm/s2.

Indexing speed Not applicable for QX Series Systems. Speed at which the conveyor moves when
acquiring an image during
indexing. You can enter values from 10 to 500
mm/s.

5. Click OK. The settings are saved to the file D:\QX500\Config\FirmwareConfiguration.xml.

To use the same settings on another system, copy the file to its QX500\Config directory.
6. Restart the QX Series application after making changes to the conveyor settings or after copying
a new Firmware Configuration.xml file to the directory.

314 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Setting the Conveyor Direction

Setting the Conveyor Direction

By default, the QX Series System loads panels from the conveyor to the left of the machine and
unloads them after inspection to the conveyor on the right side of the machine. You can change the
direction of panel flow by accessing conveyor settings using the Inspection Cell Editor.

➢ To set the conveyor direction

1. On the QX Series Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
2. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select File > Conveyor Setup.
3. In the Hardware Test dialog box, click Settings.
4. In the Miscellaneous conveyor settings section, select the direction of the conveyor motion.
● Left-to-right means that the upstream machine is to the left of QX Series and the
downstream machine is to the right of QX Series (default setting).
● Right-to-left means that the upstream machine is to the right of QX Series and the
downstream machine is to the left of QX Series.
Right-to-left conveyor motion will impact cycle times because the QX Series System can only
acquire images from left-to-right. When running in the right-to-left direction, the panel is loaded
from the conveyor on the right side of the machine, brought to the left side of the machine,
homed, then inspected from left-to-right and unloaded to the conveyor on the left of the machine.
5. Click OK. The settings are saved to the file D:\QX500\Config\FirmwareConfiguration.xml.
To use the same settings on another system, copy the file to its QX500\Config directory.
6. Restart the QX Series application after making changes to the conveyor settings or after copying
a new Firmware Configuration.xml file to the directory.

CyberOptics Corporation 315

Chapter 10: System Administration

Configuring SMEMA
Use the Inspection Cell Editor to set the SMEMA signals and polarity used for communication in
the production line.

➢ To set SMEMA signal polarity

1. On the QX Series Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
2. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select File > Conveyor Setup.
3. In the Hardware Test dialog box, click Settings.
4. In the SMEMA signals section, set the Downstream Output signals to one of three
configurations:

Select these Pin “x” options …

To configure … Pins 3+4 Pins 5+6 Pins 7+8*

Board available Board available Not Used Not Used

Good board available Board available Good board available Not Used

Good/bad Good board available Not Used Bad board available

board available

*Note: To use pins 7 and 8 you must use a SMEMA converter cable (8013043) that connects between
i the QX Series SMEMA cable and the downstream equipment. Contact CyberOptics Service and
Support for more information.

5. In the SMEMA signals section, set the signal polarity:

● Standard polarity: Standard polarity means that a true signal is indicated by high voltage
(30V) and a false signal is indicated by low voltage (<0.8V).
● Reverse polarity: Reverse polarity means that a false signal is indicated by high voltage
(30V) and a true signal is indicated by low voltage (<0.8V).
6. Click OK. The settings are saved to the file D:\QX500\Config\FirmwareConfiguration.xml.
To use the same settings on another system, copy the file to its QX500\Config directory.
7. Restart the QX Series application after making changes to the conveyor settings or after copying
a new Firmware Configuration.xml file to the directory.

316 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Calibrating the Cameras

Calibrating the Cameras

Before programming an assembly, you should calibrate the system to re-align the cameras. In
addition, you should calibrate your system as part of regular system maintenance. If your work site
is thermally stable, calibration can be performed weekly. If humidity levels are high at your site, you
should perform calibration daily for measurement systems and weekly for non-measurement
systems.

Note: This section is applicable only for the Flex System.

The calibration process consists of the procedures listed below. Follow these steps in the order given
for the best calibration results.
● Aligning the Cameras on page 318
● Setting the Home Offset on page 319
● Setting Up Cameras on page 320
● Save the Inspection Cell (File > Save Cell)
● Calibrating the QX Series System on page 321

CyberOptics Corporation 317

Chapter 10: System Administration

Aligning the Cameras

To align the cameras, work on one camera at a time from the back of the QX Series System a to the
front. Aligning the camera positions in this way helps prevent accidental bumping of the cameras
and subsequent readjustments. Refer to the QX500/QX500-X System Hardware Manual for locations
of the adjustment screws and images of the calibration target alignment.

Before you start:

● Make sure that the lights in the QX Series System have been running for a minimum of 30
minutes.
● Make sure that the glass on the calibration target is firmly pressed against the bottom and left
stops of the target’s support frame.

➢ To align the cameras

1. On the QX Series System, set the Mode Control switch to Off Line mode.
2. Log in to the QX Series application as a programmer or hardware engineer.
3. On the QX Series System, press the Reset/Start button.
4. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
5. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select Conveyor > Adjust Width and adjust the conveyor rails for the
width of the calibration target.
6. Open the doors to the QX Series System and defeat the safety interlock switch.
7. From the front of the machine, manually position the calibration target on the QX Series System
conveyor so that the center row of roundels (row 5) on the lower glass plate of the target are
accurately aligned with the center-mark scribed on the QX Series System. Make sure that the
calibration target fits snugly on the fixed rail of the conveyor.
8. In the Inspection Cell Editor in the Camera section, click Live.
The system displays a live image of the calibration target.
9. Use the Skew, X, and Y adjustment screws on the camera to correctly align the camera X and Y-
axes to the target as follows:
● Adjusting the Skew axis rotates the camera at an offset from the center of the camera field of
view and affects the camera position in X and Y. Therefore, you should adjust the Skew axis
first.
● Turn the X adjustment screw to the left to move the camera display image to the left; turn the
screw to the right to move the display image to the right.
● Turn the Y adjustment screw clockwise to move the camera display image down; turn the
screw counterclockwise to move the display image up.

Refer to the QX500/QX500-X System Hardware Manual for locations of the adjustment screws.
10. Align the camera positions as follows:
● For non-measurement machines, line up all cameras on the center roundels of a pattern.
● For measurement machines, line up the odd-numbered cameras, except camera 1, on the
cross-hairs between patterns. Line up camera 1 so that the left-most column of roundels is
aligned with the right-most green intersection line. Line up the even-numbered cameras on
the center roundels of a pattern.
11. After all cameras have been aligned correctly, select File > Save Cell.

318 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Setting the Home Offset

Setting the Home Offset

After the cameras have been aligned, set the home offset position. This is the position where the
center row of roundels on the lower plate of the calibration target is aligned with the center-line mark
scribed on the QX Series machine.

➢ To set the home offset

1. On the QX Series machine, turn the Mode Control switch to Off Line and allow the conveyor to
reset itself.
2. Remove any boards from the conveyor.
3. Press the Reset/Start button on the QX Series machine and allow the conveyor to reset.
4. Start the QX Series application and log on as a programmer or hardware engineer.
5. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
6. A message appears asking if you want to adjust the conveyor width. Do one of the following:
● If the conveyor is already set to the correct width for the calibration target, click No.
● If you must change the conveyor width to fit the calibration target, click Yes and adjust the
conveyor width for the target.
7. From the conveyor opening on the right side of the machine, manually position the calibration
target on the QX Series conveyor so that the target is blocking the exit sensor. The raised plate of
the calibration target should be closest to the inside of the machine.
8. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select Conveyor > Set Home Offset.
Follow the instructions in the Home Offset Wizard. For more detailed information, press F1 or
click Help or refer to the QX500/QX500-X Hardware Manual.
9. After setting the home offset, in the Inspection Cell Editor, select File > Save Cell.
10. Carefully remove the calibration target from the conveyor and store it in a safe place.
11. Press the Reset/Start button to reset the conveyor.

CyberOptics Corporation 319

Chapter 10: System Administration

Setting Up Cameras
The Camera Setup Wizard guides you through the process of setting up each camera. Most of the
adjustments are made by the system software, however you will need to focus each camera.

➢ To set up the cameras

1. In the Inspection Cell Editor in the Camera section, click Live.
The system displays a live image of the calibration target.
2. Select Camera > Setup Wizard.
The Camera Setup Wizard opens, which will guide you through the setup process. Run the
adjustments on each camera individually, as prompted by the Setup Wizard.
a. Move the Camera Properties dialog box aside so that you can see the image in the
Inspection Cell Editor.
b. Click Next at the Welcome page.
c. On the Available Cameras page select the first camera to adjust.

Note: As you adjust the cameras, test the results by closing the door to the machine and comparing
i the values with the values displayed when the door is open. Compensate for any differences when
adjusting the cameras with the door open.

d. Turn the focus adjustment collar (the lower collar on the camera lens) for the selected camera
lens slowly and steadily in a counterclockwise direction until the slider in the Manual Focus
page begins to reduce in value.
e. Then turn the focus collar in a clockwise direction until the slider reaches its maximum
value and then begins to reduce again.
f. Turn the focus collar one last time in a counterclockwise direction again to fine-tune the
focus until the Focus slider bar reaches its maximum value.

Caution: If you turn the focus adjustment collar too quickly, the system will not be able to collect
enough data points to accurately calculate the appropriate optimal position.

g. Lock the focus collar with the focus adjustment locking screw.
3. After the camera is focused, click Next.
4. The Color Balance page opens. No intervention is required while the system balances the camera
color. Click Next when the Progress field indicates that a color file has been selected.
5. The Shutter Speed page opens. No intervention is required while the system determines the
correct shutter speed for the camera. Click Finish when the Progress field indicates that the
shutter speed has been set.
6. The Camera Setup Wizard asks whether additional cameras need to be set up. Click Yes to set
up the next camera, or No when all cameras are complete.
7. When you select Yes, the wizard returns to the Available Camera page of the wizard. Select the
next camera and complete the setup. Repeat for each camera in the system.
8. When finished, Select File> Save Cell in the Inspection Cell Editor.

320 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Calibrating the QX Series System

Calibrating the QX Series System

Calibration should be performed once a month, before inspecting or capturing images of a new
board, and after you have installed a new version of the QX Series software. You may also want to
calibrate the cameras if you are experiencing false out-of-position errors.

The QX Series System is calibrated in Off Line mode using a glass calibration target and a specific
calibration assembly file. Before beginning calibration, make sure that the glass plates of the
calibration target are fitted snugly against the left and bottom stops of the target’s support frame.

If the glass plates feel loose, finger-tighten the plastic buttons and the capscrews to secure the plates
into position. Overtightening the capscrews can cause distortion or lead to fractures in the glass
plates.

Caution: Do not disassemble the calibration target. System calibration and performance are
dependent on a correctly assembled calibration target.

➢ To calibrate the QX Series System

1. On the QX Series System, turn the Mode Control switch to Off Line mode and allow the
conveyor to reset itself.
2. Remove all panels from the conveyor.

Note: If you open the upper door of the QX Series System to check for boards you will need to
i restart the stepper motor controller after closing the door and before continuing with calibration.

3. Press the Reset/Start button on the QX Series System and allow the conveyor to reset itself.
The amber light on the signal tower should flash.
4. On the Launch Pad, click Calibrator.
5. If the system has not been calibrated before, a message appears asking if you want to adjust the
conveyor width. Click Yes. If the conveyor width is already correct, go to step 8.
A message prompts you to ensure that there are no boards in the machine and that the machine
is in Off Line mode.
6. Verify that the machine is in Off Line mode and that there are no boards in the machine and
then click OK.
The Conveyor Width Adjuster dialog box opens and displays the width associated with the
calibration assembly.
7. If necessary, adjust the conveyor as described in Adjusting Conveyor Width on page 310, using
the calibration target width (460 mm).
8. Position the calibration target on the conveyor at the home sensor.
The system draws the calibration target into the machine, captures the images, and then
positions the target with the leading edge slightly over the center scribe mark on the QX Series
System.

CyberOptics Corporation 321

Chapter 10: System Administration

9. If you are prompted to put the machine in Inspect mode before inspecting in-line, click OK, but
leave the machine in Off Line mode.
The Calibrator opens the calibration assembly used in the previous session and displays the
name of the assembly in the title bar.
10. Verify that the name of the calibration assembly matches the serial number printed on the
calibration target. If the name of the assembly does not match, open the correct assembly.
11. In the Calibrator, select Image > Live.
The system resets the cell, indexes the calibration target and then displays the image of the lower
plate. Make sure that the machine is not bumped or vibrating excessively during the image
acquisition process.
12. Select Calibration > Start.
If a message appears stating that there are cameras with badly set apertures, do one of the
following:
● If you are confident that the camera apertures are at their optimal settings, click Yes to
continue. (The target value for the image intensity is displayed on the Hardware tab of the
System Properties dialog box).
● If the camera apertures are set incorrectly, click No and run the camera setup wizard as
described in Setting Up Cameras on page 320.
The QX Series System takes approximately five minutes to finish the calibration and display a
message stating whether the calibration passed or failed. During the process, each camera is
checked, one at a time on each plate (upper and lower).
● If the calibration passed, the QX Series System displays green squares around all the
roundels. The message board passed should also appear in the Status Bar.
● If the calibration failed, the QX Series System displays red squares around the failed roundels.
13. In the Calibration Statistics panel, verify the results of the calibration. The mean should be 0.2 or
less and the standard deviation should be 10.0 or less.
14. Select View > Image > Raised to view the results for the upper plate of the calibration target.
Verify the results in the Calibration Browser and Calibration Statistics panel. Both plates must
pass calibration for the QX Series System to correctly capture images.

Note: To view the calibration results in more detail, select View > Results to open the Results
i Window.

15. If the calibration is not successful, check the camera setup and correct any problems (see Setting
Up Cameras on page 320).
16. After a successful calibration, select File > Save Calibration.
17. Select File > Exit to close the Calibrator.
18. Carefully remove the calibration target from the conveyor and store it in a safe place.

322 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Calibrating the distance between the two SIMs

Calibrating the distance between the two

SIMs
The following feature is applicable for QX Series L type machines.

You can choose to manually or automatically calibrate the distance between the two SIMs.

The distance between the two SIMs must be estimated before applying the normal calibration
procedure.

➢ To calibrate the distance between the two SIMs

1. Capture an image and inspect.
2. If there are failed tasks, the software adjusts the SIM distance roughly to a more accurate value
according to the position of the passed tasks. For example, if the distance is set to 170mm and
there are failed tasks in SIM2. The System automatically adjusts the distance of the SIM in the
range of 172 to 173. Once this adjustment is completed, the failed tasks pass. Otherwise, the
process gets into a loop of capturing image and inspecting for over a period of time. After about
10 minutes of inspection, the System then selects an average value.The estimated distance
between the SIMs is a value of the LiveInspectionCell class.
3. From the launch pad, click Calibrator.
4. To automatically adjust the distance between the two SIMs, from the Calibrator dialog, navigate
to Calibration > Adjust SIM Distance > Auto adjust.
Or
5. To Manually adjust the distance between the two SIMs, from the Calibrator dialog, navigate to
Calibration > Adjust SIM Distance > Manual adjust.
6. Once the calibration process is completed, navigate to File >Save Calibration to save the
calibrated distance between the two SIMs.
7. The changed SIM distance also gets automatically displayed at System Properties >
Miscellaneous tab > Sim to sim distance.

CyberOptics Corporation 323

Chapter 10: System Administration

Saving an Image of the Calibration Target

When calibrating the system, you can save the calibration image and use it to examine data off-line.
However, you must not use stored calibration images to calibrate the QX Series System.

➢ To save an image of the calibration target

1. In the Calibrator, select Image > Save.
2. In the Save Mosaic Image dialog box, select the directory in which to save the image.
3. In the File Name text box, type a name for the image file.
4. Click Save.

At the beginning of the inspection, the System resets the DIO signal to Off. Once the inspection is
over, and if the panel is found no good (NG), the System then sets the DIO signal to On. Thereby,
signaling the NG Stacker to stop inspecting the panel and store it in a slot.

324 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Enabling and saving lighting calibration

Enabling and saving lighting calibration

You can enable the lighting, restore old calibration and save illumination summary by using the
lighting calibration feature.

➢ To enable and save lighting calibration

1. On the Launch Pad, click Calibrator.
2. Select Lighting.
3. Position the calibration target on the conveyor at the home sensor.
4. Click Image> Live.
5. Adjust the calibration target such that System screen is completely covered as blank screen
without any openings.
6. Select Calibrator > Select and choose the SIM serial number. (This step is applicable only for
the QX500-L System.)
7. Select Calibration > Start.
In the Illumination Calibration Summary window, a message appears, stating that the calibration
is successful and completed.
8. Select File > Save Calibration.
Note: The new calibration factor is saved in the SIM.
9. To restore the old calibration factor, select File > Restore calibration.
10. To save the illumination summary, select Summary > Save.

CyberOptics Corporation 325

Chapter 10: System Administration

Changing the Task Visibility

When you are using the Calibrator, you can configure the visibility of different symbols used in the
calibration assembly, such as task icons, search areas, and drift values. By default, only the model
task icons are visible.

➢ To change the task visibility

In the Calibrator, select Properties > Visibility and select or clear the desired option, as described
below:

Select To display

Task Icon The position of each task as defined in the root task. For calibration
assemblies, this displays the nominal position of each roundel.

Search Area The search area defined in the roundels template.

Tolerance The tolerance box defined in the roundels template.

Model The position of the model task icon after each inspection of the
roundels. This is the default option.

Show Drift The drift between the just completed calibration and the previous
calibration, on a per camera basis. The drift values appear in the
Calibration Statistics table.

Rank Errors This option is always disabled.

326 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Testing the Inspection Cell Settings

Testing the Inspection Cell Settings

The inspection cell contains information about the hardware setup of the QX Series System, such as
the number of cameras used, camera aperture settings, and calibration results.

➢ To test the inspection cell settings

1. On the QX Series machine, set the Mode Control switch to Inspect.
2. Start the QX Series application and log in as a programmer or hardware engineer.
3. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
4. Adjust the conveyor rails (QX Series machine and half-meter access conveyor, if applicable) for the
width of the calibration target.
5. Manually position the calibration target on the QX Series conveyor upstream from the home
sensor or on the conveyor section covering the exit sensor.
6. Ensure that the safety interlock switch has been defeated.
7. Press the Reset/Start button on the QX Series machine to feed the calibration target into the
conveyor.
The calibration target moves past the home sensor, returns, and stops with the leading edge of
the target at the home sensor.
8. In the Inspection Cell Editor, click the Live button to view the live image.
9. Maximize the dialog box to see the image more clearly.
10. Select Conveyor> Jog.
11. In the Jog Conveyor dialog box, type 5 in the Jog Index box, and then click . The system
jogs the conveyor to the right 5 millimeters.
12. Enter a smaller increment in the Jog Index text box and click . Continue jogging the conveyor
until the green cross-hairs are aligned on the middle row of roundels.
13. Click OK to save the settings and close the Jog Conveyor dialog box.

CyberOptics Corporation 327

Chapter 10: System Administration

Testing the System Barcode Reader

The Barcode Reader Test Panel dialog box enables you to test the functionality of the optional
barcode reader on the QX Series machine.

➢ To test the barcode reader

1. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
2. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select Test > Barcode Reader.
3. In the Barcode Reader Test Panel dialog box, select the Use Barcode Reader check box.
4. Send a board through the system.
5. Click Read Code.
The scanned barcode should display in the Bar Code text box of the Barcode Reader Test
Panel dialog box.

6. Click Cancel to close the Barcode Reader Test Panel dialog box.

Testing Hardware Signals

Use the Hardware Test dialog box to test input and output signals on the QX Series hardware.

➢ To test hardware signals

1. On the Launch Pad, click Inspection Cell Editor.
2. In the Inspection Cell Editor, select Test > Hardware.
3. In the Hardware Test dialog box, test the hardware settings as follows:
● Input: The Input fields indicate the position of the Mode Control switch, the SMEMA signals,
and the sensor settings using a value of True or False.
● Conveyor: Use the Conveyor fields to test the movement of the QX Series conveyor.
● Output: Use the Output fields to test the SMEMA signals, half-meter access conveyor signals,
and signal tower light (lamp) settings. To test a hardware output item, click the appropriate
Check button and observe the system behavior.
● Conveyor Settings: Click this button to adjust conveyor direction, speed, and SMEMA
configuration.
4. After you have finished testing, click OK to close the Hardware Test dialog box.

328 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Configuring tower light and upstream SMEMA control

Configuring tower light and upstream

SMEMA control
You can customize the tower light from a set of preconfigured tower light and upstream SMEMA
control options. The configuration must be changed manually in order to take effect.
Note: Ensure that you use a text editor (Windows Notepad) or any other equivalent tool.

➢ To configure the tower light and upstream SMEMA control

1. Navigate to the folder where you have installed the QX Series application.
2. Double-click EnvironmentVariables.cfg.
3. In the EnvironmentVariables.cfg file, search for IS_CUSTOMER=Default.If not found,
then type IS_CUSTOMER=Default, where “Default” is the default customer.
To configure for a specific customer, type IS_CUSTOMER=ABC, where ABC refers to the
customer name.
4. Navigate to the following location, [QX500 installed directory]\config.
5. Double-click cellstate.ini file.

The following is a sample of cellstate.ini file.

Note: ERROR=I is applicable only for Release 6.0.7. CyberOptics recommends that you do not change
ERROR=I.

For more information on configuring the alarm patterns, see Configuring Alarm Patterns for
Hardware Events on page 24.

CyberOptics Corporation 329

Chapter 10: System Administration

Use the following configuration keys to customize the light tower.

Description
Configuration Keys Alarm response types

R,r Red lamp Presence or absence of this

key turns on or turns off the
Red light.

G,g Green lamp Presence or absence of this

key turns on or turns off the
Green light.

B,b Blue Lamp Presence or absence of this

key turns on or turns off
Blue light.

Y, y Amber Lamp Presence or absence of this

key turns on or turns off the
Amber light.

U,u Upstream SMEMA Presence or absence of this

key enable or disables
upstream SMEMA.

H,h Horn Presence or absence of this

key turns on or turns off the
sound.

I, I Ignores all responses Ignores all the settings.

The following is an example to configure the light tower and upstream SMEMA.
Configuration Red Green Blue Amber Horn Upstream
SMEMA
START=RG On On Off Off Off Off
START=GU Off On Off Off Off On

STOP=YH Off Off Off On On Off

STOP=R On Off Off Off Off Off

IDLE=RGBA On On On On Off Off

IDLE=rgba On On On On Off Off

ERROR= Off Off Off Off Off Off

ERROR=I No Action

330 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Configuring tower light and upstream SMEMA control

.
Configuration Red Green Blue Amber Horn Upstream
SMEMA
IDLE=RGBY On On On On Off Off

START=GU Off On Off Off Off On

STOP=Y Off Off Off On Off Off

ERROR=I No Action

CyberOptics Corporation 331

Chapter 10: System Administration

Configuring and deleting full results

You can delete full results in the Rework Station by configuring, ResultsWhenUnloading and then
deleting the results in the Rework Station.

➢ To configure and delete the full results

1. Navigate to the folder where you have installed the QX Series application.
2. Double-click SystemProperties.ini.
3. Locate DeleteResultsWhenUnloading and set the value from 0 to 1.
4. Click Unload button in the Rework Station for changes to take effect.

332 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Configuring shop floor

Configuring shop floor

You can configure shop floor to stop the system from continuing to inspect and review.

➢ To configure shop floor

1. Create a Stop folder. For example, D:\Stop.
2. Open EnvironmentVariables.cfg.
3. Type IS_STOP_FLOOR_STOP=D:\QX500\Shopfloor\stop.alm.
4. In My Documents, create stop.alm file.
5. Click Enter.
A STOP sign is displayed on the monitor.
Note: The system continues to inspect the current board. However, the system stops inspecting any
other boards. To enable the inspection, delete the stop.txt file from the shop floor.

CyberOptics Corporation 333

Chapter 10: System Administration

Enabling clone functionality

The cloning functionality supports two level of clone functions, component level and template
level.You can now choose templates or components in the Assembly Editor and modify them as
clones of selected master template or component.

➢ Template level cloning

1. To enable template level cloning, choose a template and right-click.
2. Click Clones of master.
3. From the Master selector dialog box, select a master clone.
The Master template and the cloned slave template appears in the Find Panel view.
4. To undo the cloned template, right-click on the cloned template and click Undo last cloning.
Note: The Undo last cloning button will clear only the previous cloned template. The template
modifies back to its original status.

➢ Component level cloning

1. To enable component level cloning, choose components and right-click.
2. Click Clones of component.
3. From the Master Selector dialog box, select a master clone.
The Master component and the cloned slave component appears in the Find Panel view.
4. To undo the cloned component, right-click on the cloned component and click Undo last cloning.
Note: The Undo last cloning button clears only the previous cloned component. The component
modifies back to its original status.
You cannot clone components and templates together. The cloning function is not enabled when
you choose both components and templates.

334 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Using an NG Stacker

Using an NG Stacker
After inspection is completed, the AOI system communicates the status of the panel to the NG
Stacker. Based on the panel status, the NG Stacker allows the good panels to pass through and stops
the failed panels and collects it in slots. During Offline Defect Review, you can request the
corresponding panel from the NG Stacker.

The AOI System communicates with the NG stacker in the following ways.
● Serial Port communication: Before an inspection starts, the AOI sends a message to the NG
Stacker to record the next available slot number in the output XML file.
● SMEMA communication: Before an inspection starts, the AOI resets the SMEMA signal to Off.
After the inspection is completed, if the panel fails, the SMEMA signal is set to On. This notifies
the NG Stacker to stop the panel and collect it in the slot.

➢ Configuring Serial Port communication

1. On the Launch Pad, click System Properties and then select the Hardware tab.
2. In the Serial Ports section, select Enable NG Stacker.
3. From the NG Stacker list, choose a port. By default, the NG Stacker port is set to com5.
Note: CyberOptics recommends that you do not change the default com5 port setting. com1
connects the PLC (RS422) and com2 connects to the external barcode reader (RS232).
4. Click Configure.
The NG Stacker window opens.
5. In the Port Setting section, set the NG port settings based on the system configuration.
In the Protocol section, select the following values.
– Header (STX=0x02) - Select this option to send and receive the signal between AOI and NG
Stacker in the format: [STX][command][ETX], (STX = 0x02, EXT = 0x03).
– Acknowledgement (ACK=0x06) - Select this option for the NG Stacker to acknowledge the
request for next available slot number from the AOI System.
– Send command with CR - Select this option to send the command with carrier return
(CR).
– Send command with LF - Select this option to send the command with line feed (LF).
6. In the Testing section, click the following option.

CyberOptics Corporation 335

Chapter 10: System Administration

– Get next available slot number - Click this button to request for the next available slot
number.
– Eject board - Click this button to eject a particular board.
– Review Pass - Click this button to view the passed boards reviewed by the Rework Station.
– Review Fail - Click this button to view the failed boards reviewed by the Rework Station.
– Slot number - Type the slot number to eject a particular board.
7. Click Ok.

➢ SMEMA (DIO) Communication

At the beginning of the inspection, the System resets the DIO signal to Off. Once the inspection is
over, and if the panel is found no good (NG), the System then sets the DIO signal to On. Thereby,
signaling the NG Stacker to stop inspecting the panel and store it in a slot.

336 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Using Existing Assemblies on QX600

Using Existing Assemblies on QX600

Assembly files created on AOI Systems that are installed with SIM110/SIM100 (QX500, QX500-L,
QX500-D, QX100 and QX100i can be used on QX600 by performing the following steps on each
assembly.
Note

i ● Changing the overlap region, reteaching stitching point and adjusting the search levels improves
the inspection speed. You can load an assembly without making any changes. However, the
inspection speed is limited.

1. Open the assembly on the QX600 System.

2. Capture a live image of the assembly.
3. In the Image Position Editor, change overlap region to 9mm.
4. Resize or realign the root task if necessary.
5. In the Assembly Editor, select Assembly> Edit Stitcher to open the Stitcher Editor.
6. Remove all stitch points and create new stitch points for entire assembly.
7. Delete the examples for each model and train the models with examples from the images
acquired on QX600.
8. Adjust the Maximum Search Levels for the Unit Template by increasing the value by 1. For
example, if the Minimum Search level set to 1 and the maximum to 3, change the Maximum to
4.

CyberOptics Corporation 337

Chapter 10: System Administration

Generating .R file for pass board

From QX Series v6.5 Release onwards, .R file can now be generate XML file output for the passed
boards along with the .I files.

➢ To view the .R and .I files generated

1. To generate the .R XML file in the Inspection station, navigate to System Properties > Result
Storage.

2. Select, Never review passed panel, pass board check box.

Note: By default, Never review passed panel pass board is selected. The .R XML file is generated
once the inspection is completed.
3. To generate the .R XML file in the Rework station, navigate to System Properties > Result
Storage.

4. Select, Save skeleton result for passed panel, pass board check box. The .R XML file is
generated once the review is completed in the Rework Station.

338 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Exporting Assembly into XML file format

Exporting Assembly into XML file format

The QX Series System exports the assembly structure to a standard XML file format.

The QX Series Software exports the XML file to a predefined path. The XML file generated contains
the assembly details. The folder path the XML file is generated is, [QX software folder]\XML_OUT.
For example, if the QX Series Software is installed at C:\QX, then the XML file is exported to
C:\QX\XML_OUT.

➢ To export an assembly into XML file format

1. In the Assembly Editor, navigate to File > Export Assembly As XML.
2. From the Export Options dialog, choose to export data for locator tasks or export to parent
information.
3. Click OK.

CyberOptics Corporation 339

Chapter 10: System Administration

Automatically releasing a panel

The System can automatically release a panel after the inline review is committed instead of
pressing the Start button. The System sends a release panel signal to the PLC after the results are
committed in the inline review.

This feature is applicable only for the QX Series System.

➢ To automatically release a panel

1. From the Launch pad, choose System Properties.
2. Select Inspection & Rework Stations tab.
3. Select Auto release panel check box.
Note: Auto release panel is applicable only for the inline review station. Ensure that the Pass
failed boards downstream check box is selected. However, when the Pass failed boards
downstream check box is selected, the Auto release panel check box is grayed out.
4. Click OK.

340 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Configuring pause time in the Rework Station

Configuring pause time in the Rework

Station
You can configure the pause time to review the defects in the Rework Station. The defects can be
reviewed one at a time in a timely way without speeding. The pause time unit is configured in
Milliseconds (ms).

➢ To configure the pause time in the rework station

1. Navigate to Configuration > systemProperties.ini > PauseNavigateInMilliseconds.
2. Set the "PauseNavigateInMilliseconds=1000 or a particular time. The unit is in Milliseconds.
The default value is 0.
3. Navigate to System Properties > Inspection & Rework Stations.
4. Choose Add "Ignore defect" entry.
5. Click OK.
Note: Configuring pause time in the Rework Station for reviewing defects is applicable only for
False Call, NG and Pass defect buttons.

CyberOptics Corporation 341

Chapter 10: System Administration

342 QX Series System Software User Guide

Appendix

A Detailed Component
Settings

IPC Class 344

Pre-Reflow Inspections 344

Passive Components 344
Plastic 2-pin Devices 345
SOTs 346
SOIC / TSOP / SSOP (SOPs in general) 347
SOJs 349
QFP 350
PLCC/CLCC 351

Post-Reflow Inspections 352

Passive Components 352
Plastic 2-pin Devices 353
SOTs 354
SOIC / TSOP / SSOP (SOPs in general) 355
SOJs 359
QFP Bodies 360
QFP Joints 361
PLCC/CLCC 363

Post-Wave Solder Joint Inspections 364

Passive Components 364
Plastic 2-pin Devices 365
SOTs 366
SOIC / TSOP / SSOP (SOPs in general) 367
SOJs 371
QFP Bodies 371
QFP Joints 372
PLCC/CLCC 372
Through-Hole Joints 373
Through Hole Component Inspections (Top Side) 374
Default conveyor speed for SIM120/QX600 375

CyberOptics Corporation
Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

IPC Class
The information in this section pertains to inspections done in accordance with IPC610C Class 2.
For passive component inspections, this requires that the component must be at least 50% on the
pad, and assumes that pads are the same width as the part.

Pre-Reflow Inspections
System Properties
When programming for pre-reflow inspection, the primary emphasis is on the body and the text
markings. Go to the System Properties, Miscellaneous page and set the Defaults for New Models
and set the Active area expansion to 0.1 for x and 0.1 for y.

Passive Components
Table 6 shows task sizes and active areas for various components. If there are markings on the
component, enclose them in an inactive area to make the system ignore the markings and then set
up a separate inspection for the markings.

Table 6. Common Passive Component Settings

Name Metric Task Task Active Active Tolerance Tolerance Search Search
Name Size Size Area Area X Y Area X Area Y
X Y X Y

0402 1005 1.0 0.5 1.2 0.7 1.5 1.0 1.7 1.2

0603 1608 1.6 0.8 1.8 1.0 2.2 1.6 2.4 1.8

0805 20125 2.0 1.25 2.2 1.45 2.6 2.5 2.8 2.7

1206 3216 3.2 1.6 3.4 1.8 3.8 3.2 4.0 3.4

1210 3225 3.2 2.5 3.4 2.7 3.8 5.0 4.0 5.2

1812 4832 4.8 3.2 5.0 3.4 5.5 6.4 5.7 7.0

Template Properties
● Extend active area by 0.1 mm on all sides
● Search angle +/- 15
● Tolerance probability threshold: 1e-12
● Tolerance angle: 12

344 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Pre-Reflow Inspections

Plastic 2-pin Devices

Generally, plastic-bodied 2-pin devices are either diodes or tantalum capacitors. Program these
components with one active area as specified in Table 7 and with an inactive area to mask the text.
● Text inspections, if desired should be a separate task.
● Do not mix black and yellow bodies in the same model.
Table 7. Plastic 2-pin Component Settings
Case EIA Task Task Active Active Tolerance Tolerance Search Search
Size Name X Y Area Area X Y Area X Area Y
X Y

A 3216-18 3.2 1.6 3.4 1.8 4.3 2.8 4.5 3.0

B 3528-21 3.5 2.8 3.7 3.0 4.6 5.0 4.8 5.2

C 6032-28 6.0 3.2 6.2 3.4 7.2 5.4 7.4 5.6

D 7343-31 7.3 4.3 7.5 4.5 8.5 6.7 8.7 6.9

E 7260-38 7.3 6.0 7.5 6.2 8.5 10.1 8.7 10.3

R 2012-12 2.0 1.3 2.2 1.5 3.5 2.2 3.7 2.4

S 3216-12 3.2 1.6 3.4 1.8 4.3 2.8 4.5 3.0

T 3528-12 3.5 2.8 3.7 3.0 4.6 5.0 4.8 5.2

U 6032-15 6.0 3.2 6.2 3.4 7.2 5.4 7.4 5.6

V 7343-20 7.3 4.3 7.5 4.5 8.5 6.7 8.7 6.9

X 7343-43 7.3 4.3 7.5 4.5 8.5 6.7 8.7 6.9

Most of the time this package is a polarized part. Make sure to set the test for polarity and to train
the model sufficiently to differentiate between the two directions

Template Properties
● Test for polarity =Yes
● Angle tolerance = 8
● Search angle = +/- 10
● Probability threshold = 1e-12

CyberOptics Corporation 345

Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

SOTs

Table 8. SOT Component Settings

SOT-23 SOT-323 SOT-223
(TO-236AB) (SC-70)

Task Size 2.9 x 1.3 2.0 x 1.25 6.5x3.5

Active Areas Size 0.65 x 0.65 0.55 x 0.55 1.3x.8

Single lead side n/a n/a 3.2x.8

Locations

X -0.75 -0.72 -2.3

Y 0 0 -1.75

X 0.75 0.72 0
Y 0.95 0.65 -1.75

X 0.75 0.72 2.3

Y -.095 -0.65 -1.75

X (single lead) n/a n/a 0

Y (single lead) n/a n/a 1.75

Properties

Table 9. SOT Component Properties

SOT-23 SOT-323 SOT-223
(TO-236AB) (SC-70)

Model

Discrimination high high high

Contrast correction enabled yes yes yes

Correct areas separately yes yes yes

Return worst probability no no no

Template

Probability threshold 1e-12 1e-12 1e-12

Out of position width 1.6 1.55 7.5

Out of position height 3.4 2.5 4.5

Search area angle 8 8 8

Search area angle +/- 10 10 10

Search area width 1.8 1.75 7.7

Search area height 4.0 2.7 4.7

346 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Pre-Reflow Inspections

SOIC / TSOP / SSOP (SOPs in general)

SOPs should be set up with 2 active areas, one along each bank of leads. The chart below will give
you the dimensions for many common SOPs.
Table 10. SOIC/TSOP/SSOP Settings
Name Pitch Task Task Act. Act. Active Active Tol. X Tol. Y Search Search
Size Size Area Area Pos. X Pos. Y Area X Area Y
X Y X Y

SO-08 1.27 4.9 3.9 4.5 1.0 0.0 1.95 5.4 4.4 5.6 4.6

SO-14 1.27 8.7 3.9 8.3 1.0 0.0 1.95 9.2 4.4 9.4 4.6

SO-16 1.27 9.9 3.9 9.6 1.0 0.0 1.95 10.4 4.4 10.6 4.6

SOP-08 1.27 5.4 5.3 4.5 1.0 0.0 2.65 5.9 5.8 6.1 6.0

SOP-14 1.27 9.1 5.3 8.3 1.0 0.0 2.65 9.6 5.8 9.8 6.0

SOP-16 1.27 10.2 5.3 9.6 1.0 0.0 2.65 10.7 5.8 10.9 6.0

SOM-14 1.27 9.9 5.6 8.3 1.0 0.0 2.8 10.4 6.1 10.6 6.3

SOM-16 1.27 11.2 5.6 9.6 1.0 0.0 2.8 11.7 6.1 11.9 6.3

SOL-16 1.27 10.3 7.5 9.6 1.0 0.0 3.75 10.8 8.0 11.0 8.2

SOL-18 1.27 11.6 7.5 10.9 1.0 0.0 3.75 12.1 8.0 12.3 8.2

SOL-20 1.27 12.8 7.5 12.2 1.0 0.0 3.75 13.3 8.0 13.5 8.2

SOL-24 1.27 15.4 7.5 14.7 1.0 0.0 3.75 15.9 8.0 16.1 8.2

SOL-28 1.27 17.9 7.5 17.2 1.0 0.0 3.75 18.4 8.0 18.6 8.2

SOL-32 1.27 20.8 7.5 19.8 1.0 0.0 3.75 21.3 8.0 21.5 8.2

SOL-40 1.27 26 7.5 24.8 1.0 0.0 3.75 26.5 8.0 26.7 8.2

TSOP-28 0.55 8 13.4 7.9 1.0 0.0 6.7 8.28 13.9 8.48 14.1

TSOP-32 0.5 8 14 8.0 1.0 0.0 7.0 8.25 14.5 8.45 14.7

TSOP-32 0.5 8 20 8.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 8.25 20.5 8.45 20.7

TSOP-40 0.5 10 14 10.0 1.0 0.0 7.0 10.25 14.5 10.45 14.7

TSOP-40 0.5 10 20 10.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 10.25 20.5 10.45 20.7

TSOP-48 0.5 12 20 12.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 12.25 20.5 12.45 20.7

TSOP-56 0.5 14 20 14.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 14.25 20.5 14.45 20.7

SSOP-08 0.65 3.0 5.3 2.8 1.0 0.0 2.65 3.3 5.8 3.5 6.0

SSOP-14 0.65 6.2 5.3 4.75 1.0 0.0 2.65 6.5 5.8 6.7 6.0

SSOP-16 0.65 6.2 5.3 5.4 1.0 0.0 2.65 6.5 5.8 6.7 6.0

SSOP-20 0.65 7.2 5.3 6.7 1.0 0.0 2.65 7.5 5.8 7.7 6.0

SSOP-24 0.65 8.2 5.3 8.0 1.0 0.0 2.65 8.5 5.8 8.7 6.0

SSOP-28 0.65 10.2 5.3 9.3 1.0 0.0 2.65 10.5 5.8 10.7 6.0

SSOP-34 1.0 17.9 7.5 17.2 1.0 0.0 3.75 18.25 8.0 18.45 8.2

CyberOptics Corporation 347

 Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

Table 10. SOIC/TSOP/SSOP Settings (Continued)

Name Pitch Task Task Act. Act. Active Active Tol. X Tol. Y Search Search
Size Size Area Area Pos. X Pos. Y Area X Area Y
X Y X Y

SSOP-36 0.8 15.4 7.5 14.4 1.0 0.0 3.75 15.75 8.0 15.95 8.2

SSOP-44 0.8 17.9 7.5 17.8 1.0 0.0 3.75 18.25 8.0 18.45 8.2

SSOP-48 0.635 15.9 7.5 15.45 1.0 0.0 3.75 16.2 8.0 16.4 8.2

SSOP-48 1.0 25.0 7.5 24.2 1.0 0.0 3.75 25.35 8.0 25.55 8.2

SSOP-56 0.635 18.4 7.5 18.0 1.0 0.0 3.75 18.7 8.0 18.9 8.2

SSOP-64 0.8 25.6 7.5 25.8 1.0 0.0 3.75 25.95 8.0 26.15 8.2

SSOP-64 0.8 26.3 12.0 25.8 1.0 0.0 6.0 26.65 12.5 26.85 12.7

Template Properties
● Angle tolerance = 3
● Search angle = +/- 5
● Probability threshold = 1e-12

If the component you are working on is not listed

1. Create a task icon the size of the plastic body.
2. Create an active area along each bank of leads that is 0.2 mm longer than lead-end to lead- end
on the side and is 1 mm tall.
The active areas should be symmetrical about the part and should be half on the body and half
on the leads as shown below.

Active Area

Task Icon

Active Area

3. Set the tolerance along the lead side to the task size plus the lead size (half of the pitch).
4. Along the other side, generally the task size plus 0.5 mm works best.
5. Set search area to 0.2 mm bigger than the tolerance in each direction.

348 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Pre-Reflow Inspections

SOJs
SOJs should be set up with two active areas, one along each bank of leads. Table 11 provides the
dimensions for many common SOJs.

Table 11. SOJ Settings

Name Task Task Active Active Active Active Tol. X Tol. Y Search Search
Size Size Area X Area Y Pos. X Pos. Y Area X Area Y
X Y

SOLJ-18 11.5 7.5 10.9 0.6 0 3.75 12.1 8.0 12.3 8.2

SOLJ-20 12.8 7.5 12.2 0.6 0 3.75 13.3 8.0 13.5 8.2

SOLJ-24 15.4 7.5 14.7 0.6 0 3.75 15.9 8.0 16.1 8.2

SOLJ-28 17.9 7.5 17.2 0.6 0 3.75 18.4 8.0 18.6 8.2

SOLJ-32 20.8 7.5 19.8 0.6 0 3.75 21.3 8.0 21.5 8.2

Template Properties
● Angle tolerance = 3
● Search angle = +/- 5
● Probability threshold = 1e-12

If the component you are working on is not listed

1. Create a task icon equal to the size of the plastic body.
2. Create an active area along each bank of leads that is 0.2 mm longer than lead-end to lead-end on
the side and is 0.6 mm tall.
The active areas should be symmetrical about the part and should be half on the body and half
on the leads similar to the way that the SOICs are set up (see page 348).

CyberOptics Corporation 349

 Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

QFP
Set up QFPs with four active areas, one along each bank of leads. The active areas should be 1.0 mm
tall and fall half on the body and half on the leads. To calculate the length of the active area on any
side, take the number of leads times the pitch and add 0.2 mm. Table 12 provides dimensions for
some common parts. Watch the inspection times on these components as they are large and may
need to have min./max level adjusted.
Table 12. QFP Settings
Pkg Pitch Task Task Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Vert. Vert. Vert. Vert.
Size Size Active Active Pos. X Pos. Y Active Active Pos. Posit.
X Y Area X Area Y Area Area X Y
X Y

QFP44 0.8 10.0 10.0 9.0 1.0 0.0 5.0 1.0 9.0 5.0 0.0

QFP44 1.0 14.0 14.0 11.2 1.0 0.0 7.0 1.0 11.2 7.0 0.0

QFP52 0.65 10.0 10.0 8.65 1.0 0.0 5.0 1.0 8.65 5.0 0.0

QFP52 1.0 14.0 14.0 13.2 1.0 0.0 7.0 1.0 13.2 7.0 0.0

QFP64 0.5 10.0 10.0 8.2 1.0 0.0 5.0 1.0 8.2 5.0 0.0

QFP64 0.8 14.0 14.0 12.8 1.0 0.0 7.0 1.0 12.8 7.0 0.0

QFP64 1.0 14.0 20.0 13.2 1.0 0.0 10.0 1.0 19.2 7.0 0.0

QFP80 0.65 14.0 14.0 13.2 1.0 0.0 7.0 1.0 13.2 7.0 0.0

QFP80 0.8 14.0 20.0 13.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 1.0 19.4 7.0 0.0

QFP100 0.5 14.0 14.0 12.7 1.0 0.0 7.0 1.0 12.7 7.0 0.0

QFP100 0.65 14.0 20.0 13.2 1.0 0.0 10.0 1.0 19.7 7.0 0.0

QFP120 0.8 28.0 28.0 24.22 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 24.2 14.0 0.0

QFP128 0.5 14.0 20.0 13.2 1.0 0.0 10.0 1.0 19.2 7.0 0.0

QFP128 0.8 28.0 28.0 25.8 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 25.8 14.0 0.0

QFP136 0.8 28.0 28.0 27.4 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 27.4 14.0 0.0

QFP144 0.5 20.0 20.0 18.2 1.0 0.0 10.0 1.0 18.2 14.0 0.0

QFP144 0.65 28.0 28.0 23.6 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 23.6 14.0 0.0

QFP160 0.65 28.0 28.0 26.2 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 26.2 14.0 0.0

QFP184 0.5 28.0 28.0 23.2 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 23.2 14.0 0.0

QFP208 0.5 28.0 28.0 26.2 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 26.2 14.0 0.0

QFP240 0.5 32.0 32.0 30.2 1.0 0.0 16.0 1.0 30.2 16.0 0.0

QFP256 0.4 28.0 28.0 25.8 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 25.8 14.0 0.0

QFP304 0.4 40.0 40.0 38.2 1.0 0.0 20.0 1.0 38.2 20.0 0.0

Template Properties
● Tolerance box = task size + half of the lead pitch
● Search area= 0.2 mm larger than the tolerance box
● Angle tolerance = 3
● Search angle = +/- 5
● Probability threshold = 1e-12
350 QX Series System Software User Guide
 Pre-Reflow Inspections

PLCC/CLCC
Set up PLCCs (and CLCCs) with four active areas, one along each bank of leads. The active areas
should be 0.6 mm tall and fall half on the body and half on the leads. To calculate the length of the
active area on any side take the number of leads times the pitch (1.27 mm) and add 0.2 mm. Table 13
provides the dimensions for some common parts.
Table 13. PLCC/CLCC Settings
Package Task Task Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Vert. Vert. Vert. Vert.
Size Size Active Active Position Position Active Active Pos. X Pos. Y
X Y Area X Area Y X Y Area X Area Y

PLCC18 7.4 12.5 5.28 0.6 0.0 6.25 0.6 7.82 3.7 0.0

PLCC20 8.9 8.9 7.82 0.6 0.0 4.45 0.6 7.82 4.45 0.0

PLCC28 11.5 11.5 9.1 0.6 0.0 5.75 0.6 9.1 5.75 0.0

PLCC32 11.5 14.0 9.1 0.6 0.0 7.0 0.6 11.65 5.75 0.0

PLCC44 16.6 16.6 14.2 0.6 0.0 8.3 0.6 14.2 8.3 0.0

PLCC52 19.1 19.1 16.7 0.6 0.0 9.55 0.6 16.7 9.55 0.0

PLCC68 24.2 24.2 21.8 0.6 0.0 12.1 0.6 21.8 12.1 0.0

PLCC84 29.3 29.3 26.9 0.6 0.0 14.65 0.6 26.9 14.65 0.0

Template Properties
● Tolerance box = task size + 0.6 mm
● Search area = 0.2 mm larger than the tolerance box
● Angle tolerance = 3
● Search angle = +/- 5
● Probability threshold = 1e-12

Watch the inspection time on these components as they are large and may need the min./max
levels adjusted.

CyberOptics Corporation 351

Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

Post-Reflow Inspections
When programming for post-reflow inspection, in addition to checking the body and the markings,
solder joints should be checked also. This section describes how to set up body and solder joint
inspections.

System Properties
Since the emphasis is on the joints and the components, go to the System Properties, Miscellaneous
page and set the Defaults for New Models and set the Active area expansion to 0.3 for x and 0.1 for
y.

Passive Components
For passive components, the solder joint and the body are inspected at the same time. Table 14
provides settings for the task sizes and active areas that should be used for various components. If
there are markings on the component set an inactive area to make the system ignore the markings
and perform a separate inspection for the markings.

Table 14. Passive Component Settings

Name Metric Task Task Active Active Tolerance X Tolerance Y Search Search
Name Size Size Area Area Area X Area Y
X Y X Y

0402 1005 1.0 0.5 1.6 0.7 1.5 1.0 1.7 1.2

0603 1608 1.6 0.8 2.2 1.0 2.2 1.6 2.4 1.8

0805 20125 2.0 1.25 2.6 1.45 2.6 2.5 2.8 2.7

1206 3216 3.2 1.6 3.8 1.8 3.8 3.2 4.0 3.4

1210 3225 3.2 2.5 3.8 2.7 3.8 5.0 4.0 5.2

1812 4832 4.8 3.2 5.6 3.4 5.5 6.8 5.7 7.0

Template Properties
● Angle tolerance = 12
● Search angle = +/- 5
● Probability threshold = 1e-12

The general rule is to expand the active area at least 0.1 mm larger than the component on the non-
termination sides and expand the active area to the end of the curved part of the joint on the sides
with the terminations.

Set the search area box to be 0.1 larger on all sides.

352 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Post-Reflow Inspections

Plastic 2-pin Devices

Generally plastic two-pin devices are either diodes or tantalum capacitors. Program these
components with one active area as specified in Table 15 and with an inactive area to mask the text.
● Text inspections, if desired should be a separate task.
● Do not mix black and yellow bodies in the same model.
● It is not possible to perform accurate solder joint inspections on these parts, but you may be able
to catch major defects. The joint inspection should be combined with the body as a single
inspection task.
Table 15. Plastic 2-pin Devices
Case EIA Task Task Active Active Tolerance Tolerance Search Search
Size Name X Y Area Area X Y Area X Area Y
X Y

A 3216-18 3.2 1.6 3.8 1.8 4.3 2.8 4.5 3.0

B 3528-21 3.5 2.8 4.1 3.0 4.6 5.0 4.8 5.2

C 6032-28 6.0 3.2 6.6 3.4 7.2 5.4 7.4 5.6

D 7343-31 7.3 4.3 7.9 4.5 8.5 6.7 8.7 6.9

E 7260-38 7.3 6.0 7.9 6.2 8.5 10.1 8.7 10.3

R 2012-12 2.0 1.3 2.6 1.5 3.5 2.2 3.7 2.4

S 3216-12 3.2 1.6 3.8 1.8 4.3 2.8 4.5 3.0

T 3528-12 3.5 2.8 4.1 3.0 4.6 5.0 4.8 5.2

U 6032-15 6.0 3.2 6.6 3.4 7.2 5.4 7.4 5.6

V 7343-20 7.3 4.3 7.9 4.5 8.5 6.7 8.7 6.9

X 7343-43 7.3 4.3 7.9 4.5 8.5 6.7 8.7 6.9

Most of the time this package is a polarized part. Make sure to set the test for polarity and to train
the model sufficiently to differentiate between the two directions

Template Properties
● Test for polarity: Yes
● Angle tolerance = 8
● Search angle = +/- 10
● Probability threshold = 1e-12

CyberOptics Corporation 353

Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

SOTs

Table 16. SOT Component Settings

SOT-23 SOT-323 SOT-223
(TO-236AB) (SC-70)

Task Size 2.9 x 1.3 2.0 x 1.25 6.5 x 3.5

Active Areas Size 0.90 x 0.65 0.75 x 0.55 1.3 x 1.5

Single lead side n/a n/a 3.2 x 1.5

Locations

X -1.15 -1.05 -2.3

Y 0 0 -3.5

X 1.15 1.05 0
Y 0.95 0.65 -3.5

X 1.15 1.05 2.3

Y -.095 -0.65 -3.5

X (single lead) n/a n/a 0

Y (single lead) n/a n/a 3.5

Properties
Table 17. SOT Component Properties
SOT-23 SOT-323 SOT-223
(TO-236AB) (SC-70)

Model

Discrimination high high high

Contrast correction enabled yes yes yes

Correct areas separately yes yes yes

Return worst probability yes yes yes

Template

Probability threshold 1e-12 1e-12 1e-12

Out of position width 1.6 1.55 7.5

Out of position height 3.4 2.5 4.5

Search area angle 8 8 8

Search area angle +/- 10 10 10

Search area width 1.8 1.75 7.7

Search area height 4.0 2.7 4.7

354 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Post-Reflow Inspections

SOIC / TSOP / SSOP (SOPs in general)

When setting up SOPs, the body and the solder joints (pins) should be set up separately. Set up the
body for the SOPs with two active areas, one along each bank of leads. Table 18 and Table 19 provide
dimensions for many common SOPs.
Table 18. SOIC/TSOP/SSOP Settings – Bodies
Name Pitch Task Task Active Active Active Active Tol. X Tol. Y Search Search
Size Size Area Area Pos. X Pos. Y Area X Area Y
X Y X Y

SO-08 1.27 4.9 3.9 4.5 1.0 0.0 1.95 5.4 4.4 5.6 4.6

SO-14 1.27 8.7 3.9 8.3 1.0 0.0 1.95 9.2 4.4 9.4 4.6

SO-16 1.27 9.9 3.9 9.6 1.0 0.0 1.95 10.4 4.4 10.6 4.6

SOP-08 1.27 5.4 5.3 4.5 1.0 0.0 2.65 5.9 5.8 6.1 6.0

SOP-14 1.27 9.1 5.3 8.3 1.0 0.0 2.65 9.6 5.8 9.8 6.0

SOP-16 1.27 10.2 5.3 9.6 1.0 0.0 2.65 10.7 5.8 10.9 6.0

SOM-14 1.27 9.9 5.6 8.3 1.0 0.0 2.8 10.4 6.1 10.6 6.3

SOM-16 1.27 11.2 5.6 9.6 1.0 0.0 2.8 11.7 6.1 11.9 6.3

SOL-16 1.27 10.3 7.5 9.6 1.0 0.0 3.75 10.8 8.0 11.0 8.2

SOL-18 1.27 11.6 7.5 10.9 1.0 0.0 3.75 12.1 8.0 12.3 8.2

SOL-20 1.27 12.8 7.5 12.2 1.0 0.0 3.75 13.3 8.0 13.5 8.2

SOL-24 1.27 15.4 7.5 14.7 1.0 0.0 3.75 15.9 8.0 16.1 8.2

SOL-28 1.27 17.9 7.5 17.2 1.0 0.0 3.75 18.4 8.0 18.6 8.2

SOL-32 1.27 20.8 7.5 19.8 1.0 0.0 3.75 21.3 8.0 21.5 8.2

SOL-40 1.27 26 7.5 24.8 1.0 0.0 3.75 26.5 8.0 26.7 8.2

TSOP-28 0.55 8 11.8 7.9 1.0 0.0 6.7 8.28 12.3 8.48 12.5

TSOP-32 0.5 8 12.4 8.0 1.0 0.0 7.0 8.25 12.9 8.45 13.1

TSOP-32 0.5 8 18.4 8.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 8.25 18.9 8.45 19.1

TSOP-40 0.5 10 12.4 10.0 1.0 0.0 7.0 10.25 12.9 10.45 13.1

TSOP-40 0.5 10 18.4 10.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 10.25 18.9 10.45 19.1

TSOP-48 0.5 12 18.4 12.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 12.25 18.9 12.45 19.1

TSOP-56 0.5 14 18.4 14.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 14.25 18.9 14.45 19.1

SSOP-08 0.65 3.0 5.3 2.8 1.0 0.0 2.65 3.3 5.8 3.5 6.0

SSOP-14 0.65 6.2 5.3 4.75 1.0 0.0 2.65 6.5 5.8 6.7 6.0

SSOP-16 0.65 6.2 5.3 5.4 1.0 0.0 2.65 6.5 5.8 6.7 6.0

SSOP-20 0.65 7.2 5.3 6.7 1.0 0.0 2.65 7.5 5.8 7.7 6.0

SSOP-24 0.65 8.2 5.3 8.0 1.0 0.0 2.65 8.5 5.8 8.7 6.0

SSOP-28 0.65 10.2 5.3 9.3 1.0 0.0 2.65 10.5 5.8 10.7 6.0

CyberOptics Corporation 355

 Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

Table 18. SOIC/TSOP/SSOP Settings – Bodies (Continued)

Name Pitch Task Task Active Active Active Active Tol. X Tol. Y Search Search
Size Size Area Area Pos. X Pos. Y Area X Area Y
X Y X Y

SSOP-34 1.0 17.9 7.5 17.2 1.0 0.0 3.75 18.25 8.0 18.45 8.2

SSOP-36 0.8 15.4 7.5 14.4 1.0 0.0 3.75 15.75 8.0 15.95 8.2

SSOP-44 0.8 17.9 7.5 17.8 1.0 0.0 3.75 18.25 8.0 18.45 8.2

SSOP-48 0.635 15.9 7.5 15.45 1.0 0.0 3.75 16.2 8.0 16.4 8.2

SSOP-48 1.0 25.0 7.5 24.2 1.0 0.0 3.75 25.35 8.0 25.55 8.2

SSOP-56 0.635 18.4 7.5 18.0 1.0 0.0 3.75 18.7 8.0 18.9 8.2

SSOP-64 0.8 25.6 10.1 25.8 1.0 0.0 3.75 25.95 10.6 26.15 10.8

SSOP-64 0.8 26.3 12.0 25.8 1.0 0.0 6.0 26.65 12.5 26.85 12.7

Template Properties
● Angle tolerance = 3
● Search angle = +/- 5
● Probability threshold = 1e-12

If the component you are working on is not listed, create a task with active areas as shown and
described on page 348.

356 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Post-Reflow Inspections

Solder Joints
When setting up the solder joint inspections for these devices, use Table 19 for pin task size, pins
composite size and component composite size.
● Do not set up the corner pins as locators or box locators.
● Within each type, if the pin size for the task is the same, you may use the same model. This will
significantly speed up programming and the time that it takes to reduce false call rates.

Table 19. SOIC/TSOP/SSOP Settings – Solder Joints

Pkg. Pitch Pins/ Camp. Camp. Pins Pins Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin Pin
Side Task X Task Y Task X Task Y lot. X lot. Y Task Task
Size X Size Y

SO-08 1.27 4 5.9 7.8 5.4 7.3 1.905 3 0.6 1.3

SO-14 1.27 7 9.7 7.8 9.2 7.3 3.81 3 0.6 1.3

SO-16 1.27 8 10.9 7.8 10.4 7.3 4.445 3 0.6 1.3

SOP-08 1.27 4 6.4 9.7 5.9 9.2 1.905 3.95 0.6 1.3

SOP-14 1.27 7 10.1 9.7 9.6 9.2 3.81 3.95 0.6 1.3

SOP-16 1.27 8 11.2 9.7 10.7 9.2 4.445 3.95 0.6 1.3

SOM-14 1.27 7 10.9 9.4 10.4 8.9 3.81 3.8 0.6 1.3

SOM-16 1.27 8 12.2 9.4 11.7 8.9 4.445 3.8 0.6 1.3

SOL-16 1.27 8 11.3 12.1 10.8 11.6 4.445 5.15 0.6 1.3

SOL-18 1.27 9 12.6 12.1 12.1 11.6 5.08 5.15 0.6 1.3

SOL-20 1.27 10 13.8 12.1 13.3 11.6 5.715 5.15 0.6 1.3

SOL-24 1.27 12 16.4 12.1 15.9 11.6 6.985 5.15 0.6 1.3

SOL-28 1.27 14 18.9 12.1 18.4 11.6 8.255 5.15 0.6 1.3

SOL-32 1.27 16 21.8 12.1 21.3 11.6 9.525 5.15 0.6 1.3

SOL-40 1.27 20 27 12.1 26.5 11.6 12.065 5.15 0.6 1.3

TSOP- 0.55 24 9 14.7 8.5 14.2 6.325 6.7 0.25 0.8

28

TSOP- 0.5 16 9 15.5 8.5 15 3.75 7 0.25 1

32

TSOP- 0.5 16 9 21.5 8.5 21 3.75 10 0.25 1

32

TSOP- 0.5 20 11 15.5 10.5 15 4.75 7 0.25 1

40

TSOP- 0.5 20 11 21.5 10.5 21 4.75 10 0.25 1

40

TSOP- 0.5 24 13 21.5 12.5 21 5.75 10 0.25 1

48

TSOP- 0.5 28 15 21.5 14.5 21 6.75 10 0.25 1

56

CyberOptics Corporation 357

Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

Table 19. SOIC/TSOP/SSOP Settings – Solder Joints (Continued)

Pkg. Pitch Pins/ Camp. Camp. Pins Pins Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin Pin
Side Task X Task Y Task X Task Y lot. X lot. Y Task Task
Size X Size Y

SSOP- 0.65 4 4 9.8 3.5 9.3 0.975 3.9 0.33 1.5

08

SSOP- 0.65 7 7.2 9.8 6.7 9.3 1.95 3.9 0.33 1.5
14

SSOP- 0.65 8 7.2 9.8 6.7 9.3 2.275 3.9 0.33 1.5
16

SSOP- 0.65 10 8.2 9.8 7.7 9.3 2.925 3.9 0.33 1.5
20

SSOP- 0.65 12 9.2 9.8 8.7 9.3 3.575 3.9 0.33 1.5
24

SSOP- 0.65 14 11.2 9.8 10.7 9.3 4.225 3.9 0.33 1.5
28

SSOP- 1 17 18.9 12.2 18.4 11.7 8 5.15 0.4 1.4

34

SSOP- 0.8 18 16.4 12.2 15.9 11.7 6.8 5.15 0.35 1.4
36

SSOP- 0.8 22 18.9 12.2 18.4 11.7 8.4 5.15 0.35 1.4
44

SSOP- 0.635 24 16.9 12.2 16.4 11.7 7.3025 5.15 0.33 1.4
48

SSOP- 1 24 26 12.2 25.5 11.7 11.5 5.15 0.4 1.4

48

SSOP- 0.635 28 19.4 12.2 18.9 11.7 8.5725 5.15 0.33 1.4
56

SSOP- 0.8 32 26.6 15.4 26.1 14.9 12.4 6.85 0.35 1.2
64

SSOP- 0.8 32 27.3 15.94 26.8 15.44 12.4 7.12 0.35 1.2
64

Template Properties
● Probability threshold = 1e-8
● Out of position = off

For the models, make the active area 0.1 mm larger than the task size on all sides. Set
discrimination to high.

358 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Post-Reflow Inspections

SOJs
It is not possible to perform solder joint inspection of any kind on SOJs. Body inspection for SOJs
should be set up with two active areas, one along each bank of leads. Table 20 provides the
dimensions for many common SOJs.
Table 20. SOJ Settings
Name Task Task Active Active Active Active Tol. X Tol. Y Search Search
Size Size Area X Area Y Position Position Area X Area Y
X Y X Y

SOLJ-18 11.5 7.5 10.9 0.6 0 3.75 12.1 8.0 12.3 8.2

SOLJ-20 12.8 7.5 12.2 0.6 0 3.75 13.3 8.0 13.5 8.2

SOLJ-24 15.4 7.5 14.7 0.6 0 3.75 15.9 8.0 16.1 8.2

SOLJ-28 17.9 7.5 17.2 0.6 0 3.75 18.4 8.0 18.6 8.2

SOLJ-32 20.8 7.5 19.8 0.6 0 3.75 21.3 8.0 21.5 8.2

Template Properties
● Angle tolerance = 3
● Search angle = +/- 5
● Probability threshold = 1e-12

If the component you are working on is not listed:

1. Create a task icon equal to the size of the plastic body.
2. Create an active area along each bank of leads that is 0.2 mm longer than lead-end to lead-end on
the side and is 0.6 mm tall. The active areas should be symmetrical about the part and should be
half on the body and half on the leads similar to the way that the SOICs are set up (see
page 348).

CyberOptics Corporation 359

 Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

QFP Bodies
Set up QFP bodies with four active areas, one along each bank of leads. The active areas should be
1.0 mm tall and fall half on the body and half on the leads. To calculate the length of the active are
on any side take the number of leads times the pitch and add 0.2 mm. The chart below will give you
the dimensions for some common parts.

When setting up QFPs, set up separate tasks for the body and the solder joints (pins). Set up the
body with 4 active areas, one along each bank of leads.
● The active areas should be 1.0 mm tall and fall half on the body and half on the leads.
● To calculate the length of the active area on any side, take the number of leads times the pitch
and add 0.2 mm.
● Table 21 provides dimensions body inspections, Table 22 provides dimensions for joint
inspections.
● Watch the inspection times on these components as they are large and may need to have min./
max level adjusted.
Table 21. QFP Settings – Bodies
Pkg. Pitch Task Task Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Vert. Vert. Vert. Vert.
Size Size Active Active Pos. X Pos. Y Active Active Pos. Pos.
X Y Area X Area Y Area X Area Y X Y

QFP44 0.8 10.0 10.0 9.0 1.0 0.0 5.0 1.0 9.0 5.0 0.0

QFP44 1.0 14.0 14.0 11.2 1.0 0.0 7.0 1.0 11.2 7.0 0.0

QFP52 0.65 10.0 10.0 8.65 1.0 0.0 5.0 1.0 8.65 5.0 0.0

QFP52 1.0 14.0 14.0 13.2 1.0 0.0 7.0 1.0 13.2 7.0 0.0

QFP64 0.5 10.0 10.0 8.2 1.0 0.0 5.0 1.0 8.2 5.0 0.0

QFP64 0.8 14.0 14.0 12.8 1.0 0.0 7.0 1.0 12.8 7.0 0.0

QFP64 1.0 14.0 20.0 13.2 1.0 0.0 10.0 1.0 19.2 7.0 0.0

QFP80 0.65 14.0 14.0 13.2 1.0 0.0 7.0 1.0 13.2 7.0 0.0

QFP80 0.8 14.0 20.0 13.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 1.0 19.4 7.0 0.0

QFP100 0.5 14.0 14.0 12.7 1.0 0.0 7.0 1.0 12.7 7.0 0.0

QFP100 0.65 14.0 20.0 13.2 1.0 0.0 10.0 1.0 19.7 7.0 0.0

QFP120 0.8 28.0 28.0 24.22 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 24.2 14.0 0.0

QFP128 0.5 14.0 20.0 13.2 1.0 0.0 10.0 1.0 19.2 7.0 0.0

QFP128 0.8 28.0 28.0 25.8 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 25.8 14.0 0.0

QFP136 0.8 28.0 28.0 27.4 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 27.4 14.0 0.0

QFP144 0.5 20.0 20.0 18.2 1.0 0.0 10.0 1.0 18.2 14.0 0.0

QFP144 0.65 28.0 28.0 23.6 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 23.6 14.0 0.0

QFP160 0.65 28.0 28.0 26.2 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 26.2 14.0 0.0

QFP184 0.5 28.0 28.0 23.2 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 23.2 14.0 0.0

360 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Post-Reflow Inspections

Table 21. QFP Settings – Bodies (Continued)

Pkg. Pitch Task Task Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Vert. Vert. Vert. Vert.
Size Size Active Active Pos. X Pos. Y Active Active Pos. Pos.
X Y Area X Area Y Area X Area Y X Y

QFP208 0.5 28.0 28.0 26.2 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 26.2 14.0 0.0

QFP240 0.5 32.0 32.0 30.2 1.0 0.0 16.0 1.0 30.2 16.0 0.0

QFP256 0.4 28.0 28.0 25.8 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 25.8 14.0 0.0

QFP304 0.5 40.0 40.0 38.2 1.0 0.0 20.0 1.0 38.2 20.0 0.0

Template Properties
● Tolerance box = task size + half of the lead pitch
● Search area= 0.2 mm larger than the tolerance box
● Angle tolerance = 3
● Search angle = +/- 5
● Probability threshold = 1e-12

QFP Joints
When setting up the solder joint inspections (pins) for QFPs:
● Set up the corner leads as box locators.
● The composite task for the pins should include all of the pins inside of it.
● The component task should be the largest of all the boxes.
● If the size of the lead, the pitch of the leads and the pad design are the same, models may be
shared between components for the joints (pin).
● Also if there is no difference in the design of the corner pads, they may share the same model as
the middle leads. The more sharing that can take place the quicker the program will stabilize
and false call rate drop.

Table 22 provides information for setting up the inspection tasks.

Table 22. QFP Settings – Joint Inspection
Pkg. Pitch # Pins # Pins Comp. Comp. Pins Pins Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin Pin
Horiz. Vert. Task X Task Y Task Task loc. X loc.Y Task Task
X Y Size Size
X Y

QFP44 0.8 11 11 17.22 13.70 16.72 13.20 4.00 6.16 0.35 0.88

QFP44 1 11 11 17.70 17.70 17.20 17.20 5.00 8.16 0.35 0.88

QFP52 0.65 13 13 13.70 13.70 13.20 13.20 3.90 6.16 0.3 0.88

QFP52 1 13 13 17.70 17.70 17.20 17.20 6.00 8.16 0.35 0.88

QFP64 0.5 16 16 13.70 13.70 13.20 13.20 3.75 6.16 0.22 0.88

QFP64 0.8 16 16 17.70 17.70 17.20 17.20 6.00 8.16 0.35 0.88

QFP64 1 13 19 19.20 25.20 18.70 24.70 -8.91 9.00 0.4 0.88

QFP80 0.65 20 20 17.70 17.70 17.20 17.20 6.18 8.16 0.35 0.88

CyberOptics Corporation 361

Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

Table 22. QFP Settings – Joint Inspection (Continued)

Pkg. Pitch # Pins # Pins Comp. Comp. Pins Pins Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin Pin
Horiz. Vert. Task X Task Y Task Task loc. X loc.Y Task Task
X Y Size Size
X Y

QFP80 0.8 16 24 19.46 25.46 18.96 24.96 -8.16 9.20 0.35 0.88

QFP100 0.5 25 25 16.50 16.50 16.00 16.00 6.00 7.70 0.22 0.60

QFP100 0.65 20 30 19.46 25.46 18.96 24.96 8.60 8.99 0.3 0.88

QFP120 0.8 30 30 31.70 31.70 31.20 31.20 11.60 15.16 0.35 0.88

QFP128 0.5 26 38 19.46 25.46 18.96 24.96 -8.16 9.25 0.22 0.88

QFP128 0.8 32 32 31.70 31.70 31.20 31.20 12.40 15.16 0.35 0.88

QFP136 0.8 34 34 31.70 31.70 31.20 31.20 13.20 15.16 0.35 0.88

QFP144 0.5 36 36 22.50 22.50 22.00 22.00 8.75 10.70 0.22 0.60

QFP144 0.65 36 36 31.70 31.70 31.20 31.20 11.38 15.16 0.3 0.88

QFP160 0.65 40 40 31.70 31.70 31.20 31.20 12.68 15.16 0.3 0.88

QFP184 0.5 46 46 31.10 31.10 30.60 30.60 11.25 15.00 0.22 0.60

QFP208 0.5 52 52 31.10 31.10 30.60 30.60 12.75 15.00 0.22 0.60

QFP240 0.5 60 60 35.10 35.10 34.60 34.60 14.75 17.00 0.22 0.60

QFP256 0.4 64 64 31.10 31.10 30.60 30.60 12.60 15.00 0.18 0.60

QFP304 0.5 76 76 43.10 43.10 42.60 42.60 18.75 21.00 0.22 0.60

Template Properties
● Probability threshold = 1e-8
● Out of position = off
● Turn on Outlier reject at 5000

For the models, make the active area 0.1 mm larger than the task size on all sides. Set
discrimination to high.

362 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Post-Reflow Inspections

PLCC/CLCC
It is not possible to perform solder joint inspection on any PLCC or CLCC. Set up PLCCs (and
CLCCs) with four active areas, one along each bank of leads. The active areas should be 0.6 mm tall
and fall half on the body and half on the leads. To calculate the length of the active area on any side
take the number of leads times the pitch (1.27 mm) and add 0.2 mm. Table 23 provides the
dimensions for some common parts.
Table 23. PLC/CLCC Settings
Package Task Task Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Vert. Vert. Vert. Vert.
Size Size Active Active Position Position Active Active Pos. X Pos. Y
X Y Area X Area Y X Y Area X Area Y

PLCC18 7.4 12.5 5.28 0.6 0.0 6.25 0.6 7.82 3.7 0.0

PLCC20 8.9 8.9 7.82 0.6 0.0 4.45 0.6 7.82 4.45 0.0

PLCC28 11.5 11.5 9.1 0.6 0.0 5.75 0.6 9.1 5.75 0.0

PLCC32 11.5 14.0 9.1 0.6 0.0 7.0 0.6 11.65 5.75 0.0

PLCC44 16.6 16.6 14.2 0.6 0.0 8.3 0.6 14.2 8.3 0.0

PLCC52 19.1 19.1 16.7 0.6 0.0 9.55 0.6 16.7 9.55 0.0

PLCC68 24.2 24.2 21.8 0.6 0.0 12.1 0.6 21.8 12.1 0.0

PLCC84 29.3 29.3 26.9 0.6 0.0 14.65 0.6 26.9 14.65 0.0

Template Properties
● Tolerance box = task size + 0.6 mm
● Search area= 0.2 mm larger than the tolerance box
● Angle tolerance = 3
● Search angle = +/- 5
● Probability threshold = 1e-12

Watch the inspection time on these components as they are large and may need the min./max
levels adjusted.

CyberOptics Corporation 363

Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

Post-Wave Solder Joint Inspections

When programming for post-wave-solder inspection, in addition to checking the body and the
markings, solder joints should be checked also. This section describes setting up body and solder
joint inspections.

System Properties
Since the emphasis is on the joints and the components, go to the System Properties, Miscellaneous
page and set the Defaults for New Models and set the Active area expansion to 0.3 for x and 0.1 for
y.

Passive Components
For passive components, the solder joint and the body are inspected at the same time. Table 24
provides the task sizes and active areas that should be used for various components. If there are
markings on the component set an inactive area to make the system ignore the markings and
perform a separate inspection for the markings.

Table 24. Passive Component Settings

Name Metric Task Task Active Active Tolerance Tolerance Search Search
Name Size Size Area Area X Y Area X Area Y
X Y X Y

0402 1005 1.0 0.5 1.6 0.7 1.5 1.0 1.7 1.2

0603 1608 1.6 0.8 2.2 1.0 2.2 1.6 2.4 1.8

0805 20125 2.0 1.25 2.6 1.45 2.6 2.5 2.8 2.7

1206 3216 3.2 1.6 3.8 1.8 3.8 3.2 4.0 3.4

1210 3225 3.2 2.5 3.8 2.7 3.8 5.0 4.0 5.2

1812 4832 4.8 3.2 5.6 3.4 5.5 6.8 5.7 7.0

Template Properties
● Angle tolerance = 12
● Search angle = +/- 15
● Probability threshold = 1e-12

The general rule is to expand the active area at least 0.1 mm larger than the component on the non-
termination sides and expand the active area to the end of the curved part of the joint on the sides
with the terminations.

Set the search area box to be 0.1 larger on all sides.

364 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Post-Wave Solder Joint Inspections

Plastic 2-pin Devices

Generally plastic two-pin devices are either diodes or tantalum capacitors. These should be
programmed with one active area as specified in Table 25 with an inactive area to mask the text.
● Text inspections, if desired, should be a separate task.
● Do not mix black and yellow bodies in the same model.
● It is not possible to perform accurate solder joint inspections on these parts, but you may be able
to catch major defects. The joint inspection should be combined with the body as a single
inspection task.
Table 25. Plastic 2-pin Devices
Case EIA Task Task Active Active Tolerance Tolerance Search Search
Size Name X Y Area Area X Y Area X Area Y
X Y

B 3528-21 3.5 2.8 4.1 3.0 4.6 5.0 4.8 5.2

C 6032-28 6.0 3.2 6.6 3.4 7.2 5.4 7.4 5.6

D 7343-31 7.3 4.3 7.9 4.5 8.5 6.7 8.7 6.9

E 7260-38 7.3 6.0 7.9 6.2 8.5 10.1 8.7 10.3

R 2012-12 2.0 1.3 2.6 1.5 3.5 2.2 3.7 2.4

S 3216-12 3.2 1.6 3.8 1.8 4.3 2.8 4.5 3.0

T 3528-12 3.5 2.8 4.1 3.0 4.6 5.0 4.8 5.2

U 6032-15 6.0 3.2 6.6 3.4 7.2 5.4 7.4 5.6

V 7343-20 7.3 4.3 7.9 4.5 8.5 6.7 8.7 6.9

X 7343-43 7.3 4.3 7.9 4.5 8.5 6.7 8.7 6.9

B 3528-21 3.5 2.8 4.1 3.0 4.6 5.0 4.8 5.2

Most of the time this package is a polarized part. Make sure to set the test for polarity and to train
the model sufficiently to differentiate between the two directions

Template Properties
● Test for polarity = Yes
● Angle tolerance = 8
● Search angle = +/- 10
● Probability threshold = 1e-12

CyberOptics Corporation 365

Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

SOTs

Table 26. SOT Component Settings

SOT-23 SOT-323 SOT-223
(TO-236AB) (SC-70)

Task Size 2.9 x 1.3 2.0 x 1.25 6.5 x 3.5

Active Areas Size 0.90 x 0.65 0.75 x 0.55 1.3 x 1.5

Single lead side n/a n/a 3.2 x 1.5

Locations

X -1.15 -1.05 -2.3

Y 0 0 -3.5

X 1.15 1.05 0
Y 0.95 0.65 -3.5

X 1.15 1.05 2.3

Y -.095 -0.65 -3.5

X (single lead) n/a n/a 0

Y (single lead) n/a n/a 3.5

Properties
Table 27. SOT Component Properties
SOT-23 SOT-323 SOT-223
(TO-236AB) (SC-70)

Model

Discrimination high high high

Contrast correction enabled yes yes yes

Correct areas separately yes yes yes

Return worst probability yes yes yes

Template

Probability threshold 1e-12 1e-12 1e-12

Out of position width 1.6 1.55 7.5

Out of position height 3.4 2.5 4.5

Search area angle 8 8 8

Search area angle +/- 10 10 10

Search area width 1.8 1.75 7.7

Search area height 4.0 2.7 4.7

366 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Post-Wave Solder Joint Inspections

SOIC / TSOP / SSOP (SOPs in general)

When setting up SOPs, the body and the solder joints (pins) should be set up separately. Set up the
body for the SOPs with 2 active areas, one along each bank of leads. Table 28 and Table 28 provide
dimensions for many common SOPs.
Table 28. SOIC/TSOP/SSOP Settings – Bodies
Name Pitch Task Task Active Active Active Active Tol. X Tol. Y Search Search
Size Size Area Area Pos. X Pos. Y Area X Area Y
X Y X Y

SO-08 1.27 4.9 3.9 4.5 1.0 0.0 1.95 5.4 4.4 5.6 4.6

SO-14 1.27 8.7 3.9 8.3 1.0 0.0 1.95 9.2 4.4 9.4 4.6

SO-16 1.27 9.9 3.9 9.6 1.0 0.0 1.95 10.4 4.4 10.6 4.6

SOP-08 1.27 5.4 5.3 4.5 1.0 0.0 2.65 5.9 5.8 6.1 6.0

SOP-14 1.27 9.1 5.3 8.3 1.0 0.0 2.65 9.6 5.8 9.8 6.0

SOP-16 1.27 10.2 5.3 9.6 1.0 0.0 2.65 10.7 5.8 10.9 6.0

SOM-14 1.27 9.9 5.6 8.3 1.0 0.0 2.8 10.4 6.1 10.6 6.3

SOM-16 1.27 11.2 5.6 9.6 1.0 0.0 2.8 11.7 6.1 11.9 6.3

SOL-16 1.27 10.3 7.5 9.6 1.0 0.0 3.75 10.8 8.0 11.0 8.2

SOL-18 1.27 11.6 7.5 10.9 1.0 0.0 3.75 12.1 8.0 12.3 8.2

SOL-20 1.27 12.8 7.5 12.2 1.0 0.0 3.75 13.3 8.0 13.5 8.2

SOL-24 1.27 15.4 7.5 14.7 1.0 0.0 3.75 15.9 8.0 16.1 8.2

SOL-28 1.27 17.9 7.5 17.2 1.0 0.0 3.75 18.4 8.0 18.6 8.2

SOL-32 1.27 20.8 7.5 19.8 1.0 0.0 3.75 21.3 8.0 21.5 8.2

SOL-40 1.27 26 7.5 24.8 1.0 0.0 3.75 26.5 8.0 26.7 8.2

TSOP-28 0.55 8 11.8 7.9 1.0 0.0 6.7 8.28 12.3 8.48 12.5

TSOP-32 0.5 8 12.4 8.0 1.0 0.0 7.0 8.25 12.9 8.45 13.1

TSOP-32 0.5 8 18.4 8.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 8.25 18.9 8.45 19.1

TSOP-40 0.5 10 12.4 10.0 1.0 0.0 7.0 10.25 12.9 10.45 13.1

TSOP-40 0.5 10 18.4 10.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 10.25 18.9 10.45 19.1

TSOP-48 0.5 12 18.4 12.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 12.25 18.9 12.45 19.1

TSOP-56 0.5 14 18.4 14.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 14.25 18.9 14.45 19.1

SSOP-08 0.65 3.0 5.3 2.8 1.0 0.0 2.65 3.3 5.8 3.5 6.0

SSOP-14 0.65 6.2 5.3 4.75 1.0 0.0 2.65 6.5 5.8 6.7 6.0

SSOP-16 0.65 6.2 5.3 5.4 1.0 0.0 2.65 6.5 5.8 6.7 6.0

SSOP-20 0.65 7.2 5.3 6.7 1.0 0.0 2.65 7.5 5.8 7.7 6.0

SSOP-24 0.65 8.2 5.3 8.0 1.0 0.0 2.65 8.5 5.8 8.7 6.0

SSOP-28 0.65 10.2 5.3 9.3 1.0 0.0 2.65 10.5 5.8 10.7 6.0

CyberOptics Corporation 367

 Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

Table 28. SOIC/TSOP/SSOP Settings – Bodies (Continued)

Name Pitch Task Task Active Active Active Active Tol. X Tol. Y Search Search
Size Size Area Area Pos. X Pos. Y Area X Area Y
X Y X Y

SSOP-34 1.0 17.9 7.5 17.2 1.0 0.0 3.75 18.25 8.0 18.45 8.2

SSOP-36 0.8 15.4 7.5 14.4 1.0 0.0 3.75 15.75 8.0 15.95 8.2

SSOP-44 0.8 17.9 7.5 17.8 1.0 0.0 3.75 18.25 8.0 18.45 8.2

SSOP-48 0.635 15.9 7.5 15.45 1.0 0.0 3.75 16.2 8.0 16.4 8.2

SSOP-48 1.0 25.0 7.5 24.2 1.0 0.0 3.75 25.35 8.0 25.55 8.2

SSOP-56 0.635 18.4 7.5 18.0 1.0 0.0 3.75 18.7 8.0 18.9 8.2

SSOP-64 0.8 25.6 10.1 25.8 1.0 0.0 3.75 25.95 10.6 26.15 10.8

SSOP-64 0.8 26.3 12.0 25.8 1.0 0.0 6.0 26.65 12.5 26.85 12.7

Template Properties
● Angle tolerance = 3
● Search angle = +/- 5
● Probability threshold = 1e-12

If the component you are working on is not listed, create a task with active areas as shown and
described on page 348.

368 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Post-Wave Solder Joint Inspections

Solder Joints
When setting up the solder joint inspections for these devices, use Table 29 for pin task size, pins
composite size and component composite size. Do not set up the corner pins as locators or box
locators. Within each type, if the pin size for the task is the same, you may use the same model. This
will significantly speed up programming and the time that it takes to reduce false call rates.

Table 29. SOIC/TSOP/SSOP Settings – Solder Joints

Pkg. Pitch Pins/ Comp. Comp. Pins Pins Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin Pin
Side Task X Task Y Task X Task Y Loc. X Loc. Y Task Task
Size X Size Y

SO-08 1.27 4 5.9 7.8 5.4 7.3 1.905 3 0.6 1.3

SO-14 1.27 7 9.7 7.8 9.2 7.3 3.81 3 0.6 1.3

SO-16 1.27 8 10.9 7.8 10.4 7.3 4.445 3 0.6 1.3

SOP-08 1.27 4 6.4 9.7 5.9 9.2 1.905 3.95 0.6 1.3

SOP-14 1.27 7 10.1 9.7 9.6 9.2 3.81 3.95 0.6 1.3

SOP-16 1.27 8 11.2 9.7 10.7 9.2 4.445 3.95 0.6 1.3

SOM-14 1.27 7 10.9 9.4 10.4 8.9 3.81 3.8 0.6 1.3

SOM-16 1.27 8 12.2 9.4 11.7 8.9 4.445 3.8 0.6 1.3

SOL-16 1.27 8 11.3 12.1 10.8 11.6 4.445 5.15 0.6 1.3

SOL-18 1.27 9 12.6 12.1 12.1 11.6 5.08 5.15 0.6 1.3

SOL-20 1.27 10 13.8 12.1 13.3 11.6 5.715 5.15 0.6 1.3

SOL-24 1.27 12 16.4 12.1 15.9 11.6 6.985 5.15 0.6 1.3

SOL-28 1.27 14 18.9 12.1 18.4 11.6 8.255 5.15 0.6 1.3

SOL-32 1.27 16 21.8 12.1 21.3 11.6 9.525 5.15 0.6 1.3

SOL-40 1.27 20 27 12.1 26.5 11.6 12.065 5.15 0.6 1.3

TSOP- 0.55 24 9 14.7 8.5 14.2 6.325 6.7 0.25 0.8

28

TSOP- 0.5 16 9 15.5 8.5 15 3.75 7 0.25 1

32

TSOP- 0.5 16 9 21.5 8.5 21 3.75 10 0.25 1

32

TSOP- 0.5 20 11 15.5 10.5 15 4.75 7 0.25 1

40

TSOP- 0.5 20 11 21.5 10.5 21 4.75 10 0.25 1

40

TSOP- 0.5 24 13 21.5 12.5 21 5.75 10 0.25 1

48

TSOP- 0.5 28 15 21.5 14.5 21 6.75 10 0.25 1

56

SSOP- 0.65 4 4 9.8 3.5 9.3 0.975 3.9 0.33 1.5

08

CyberOptics Corporation 369

Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

Table 29. SOIC/TSOP/SSOP Settings – Solder Joints (Continued)

Pkg. Pitch Pins/ Comp. Comp. Pins Pins Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin Pin
Side Task X Task Y Task X Task Y Loc. X Loc. Y Task Task
Size X Size Y

SSOP- 0.65 7 7.2 9.8 6.7 9.3 1.95 3.9 0.33 1.5
14

SSOP- 0.65 8 7.2 9.8 6.7 9.3 2.275 3.9 0.33 1.5
16

SSOP- 0.65 10 8.2 9.8 7.7 9.3 2.925 3.9 0.33 1.5
20

SSOP- 0.65 12 9.2 9.8 8.7 9.3 3.575 3.9 0.33 1.5
24

SSOP- 0.65 14 11.2 9.8 10.7 9.3 4.225 3.9 0.33 1.5
28

SSOP- 1 17 18.9 12.2 18.4 11.7 8 5.15 0.4 1.4

34

SSOP- 0.8 18 16.4 12.2 15.9 11.7 6.8 5.15 0.35 1.4
36

SSOP- 0.8 22 18.9 12.2 18.4 11.7 8.4 5.15 0.35 1.4
44

SSOP- 0.635 24 16.9 12.2 16.4 11.7 7.3025 5.15 0.33 1.4
48

SSOP- 1 24 26 12.2 25.5 11.7 11.5 5.15 0.4 1.4

48

SSOP- 0.635 28 19.4 12.2 18.9 11.7 8.5725 5.15 0.33 1.4
56

SSOP- 0.8 32 26.6 15.4 26.1 14.9 12.4 6.85 0.35 1.2
64

Template Properties
● Probability threshold = 1e-8
● Out of position = off

For the models, make the active area 0.1 mm larger than the task size on all sides. Set
discrimination to high.

370 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Post-Wave Solder Joint Inspections

SOJs
SOJs are not recommended for wave solder applications and there is no way to perform an adequate
inspection for a customer who tries to wave-solder these components.

QFP Bodies
Only larger pitch QFPs can be wave soldered. These should be mounted at a 45 degree angle on the
board (or the board rotated when soldered).
● Corner pads will look different and must be modeled separately.
● There should be solder thieves designed on the board. Shorts to these thieves are acceptable.
● Bridging will be the most common defect presented.

When setting up QFPs, set up separate tasks for the body and the solder joints (pins). Set up the
body with 4 active areas, one along each bank of leads.
● The active areas should be 1.0 mm tall and fall half on the body and half on the leads.
● To calculate the length of the active area on any side, take the number of leads times the pitch
and add 0.2 mm.
● Table 30 provides dimensions body inspections, Table 31 provides dimensions for joint
inspections.
● Watch the inspection times on these components as they are large and may need to have min./
max level adjusted.
Table 30. QFP Settings – Bodies
Pkg Pitch Task Task Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Vert. Vert. Vert. Vert.
Size Size Active Active Pos. X Pos.Y Active Active Pos. Pos.
X Y Area X Area Y Area Area X Y
X Y

QFP44 0.8 10.0 10.0 9.0 1.0 0.0 5.0 1.0 9.0 5.0 0.0

QFP44 1.0 14.0 14.0 11.2 1.0 0.0 7.0 1.0 11.2 7.0 0.0

QFP52 1.0 14.0 14.0 13.2 1.0 0.0 7.0 1.0 13.2 7.0 0.0

QFP64 0.8 14.0 14.0 12.8 1.0 0.0 7.0 1.0 12.8 7.0 0.0

QFP64 1.0 14.0 20.0 13.2 1.0 0.0 10.0 1.0 19.2 7.0 0.0

QFP80 0.8 14.0 20.0 13.0 1.0 0.0 10.0 1.0 19.4 7.0 0.0

QFP 120 0.8 28.0 28.0 24.22 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 24.2 14.0 0.0

QFP 128 0.8 28.0 28.0 25.8 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 25.8 14.0 0.0

QFP 136 0.8 28.0 28.0 27.4 1.0 0.0 14.0 1.0 27.4 14.0 0.0

Template Properties
● Tolerance box = task size + half of the lead pitch
● Search area= 0.2 mm larger than the tolerance box
● Angle tolerance = 3
● Search angle = +/- 5
● Probability threshold = 1e-12

CyberOptics Corporation 371

Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

QFP Joints
When setting up the solder joint inspections (pins) for QFPs:
● The corner leads should be set up as box locators.
● The composite task for the pins should include all of the pins inside of it.
● The component task should be the largest of all the boxes.
● If the size of the lead, the pitch of the leads and the pad design is the same, models may be
shared between components for the joints (pin).
● Also if there is no difference in the design of the corner pads, they may share the same model as
the middle leads. The more sharing that can take place the quicker the program will stabilize
and false call rate drop.

Table 31 provides information for setting up the inspection tasks.

Table 31. QFP Settings – Joint Inspection
Pkg. Pitch # Pins # Pins Comp. Comp. Pins Pins Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin Pin
Horiz. Vert. Task X Task Y Task Task Loc. Loc. Task Task
X Y X Y Size Size
X Y

QFP44 0.8 11 11 17.22 13.70 16.72 13.20 4.00 6.16 0.35 0.88

QFP44 1 11 11 17.70 17.70 17.20 17.20 5.00 8.16 0.35 0.88

QFP52 1 13 13 17.70 17.70 17.20 17.20 6.00 8.16 0.35 0.88

QFP64 0.8 16 16 17.70 17.70 17.20 17.20 6.00 8.16 0.35 0.88

QFP64 1 13 19 19.20 25.20 18.70 24.70 -8.91 9.00 0.4 0.88

QFP80 0.8 16 24 19.46 25.46 18.96 24.96 -8.16 9.20 0.35 0.88

QFP120 0.8 30 30 31.70 31.70 31.20 31.20 11.60 15.16 0.35 0.88

QFP128 0.8 32 32 31.70 31.70 31.20 31.20 12.40 15.16 0.35 0.88

QFP136 0.8 34 34 31.70 31.70 31.20 31.20 13.20 15.16 0.35 0.88

Template Properties
● Probability threshold = 1e-8
● Out of position = off
● Turn on Outlier reject at 5000.

For the models, make the active area 0.1 mm larger than the task size on all sides. Set
discrimination to high.

PLCC/CLCC
PLCCs and CLCCs are not recommended for wave solder applications and there is no way to
perform an adequate inspection for a customer who tries to wave-solder these components.

372 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Post-Wave Solder Joint Inspections

Through-Hole Joints
The best way to get location information for all of the solder joints is to use the drill layer of the
Gerber data. With some small manipulations in Microsoft Excel, this can be imported into the QX
Series software.
● Start by separating each different hole size into different templates.
● Once the data is imported, you will have to further separate the templates so that each template
will only have either clinched or unclinched leads and the same pad size and shape. Trying to
group by part number is likely to result in poor performance.
● Make sure to rotate tasks so that the clinched leads are always facing the same way in the model.
● Try to build the models with only one active area. The active area should not extend past the end
of the pad.
● It is important to test the models against a bare board, a populated board that is un-soldered,
and a soldered bare board. Try to avoid setting up bad models, as you may need at least 3 bad
models to cover all situations.

Template Properties
● Angle tolerance = 10
● Search angle = +/- 5
● Probability threshold = 1e-8
● Out of position = off

CyberOptics Corporation 373

Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

Through Hole Component Inspections (Top Side)

When setting up through-hole component inspections, it is important to separate the markings from
the body. In general these parts are cheaply made with a significant amount of variation within the
parts and so the out of position setting should be turned off. Markings can be somewhat
inconsistent and must always be treated separately from the body.

The data for through-hole components is not always the center of the part. The datum point varies
based on the CAD and generally falls into one of two cases. The first situation is everything is
called out by pin 1. The case depends on the component type:
● The center for axial components.
● Midway between the first and last pin on DIPs.
● The middle of 5 mm Radial components.
● One end lead of 2.5 mm Radial components.
● The middle of most other parts.

It is often necessary to modify the CAD output to make the QX Series System read it. Make sure to
use some features on the board as fiducials.

Axial Components
Axial leaded components should not look at the leads going into the board. The same part number
may be inserted with different “Z spans”. If the model includes the lead going though the board,
every different “Z span” will require a different model. The best solution is to model the body
where it connects with the leads. The example on the left shows the correct setup of the active areas
for a resistor body.

Template Properties
● (Model) Symmetry = 2-way
● Probability threshold = 1e-12
● Out of position = off

Set up a composite OR task that contains the same composite template dropped at 180 degrees from
each other.

For checking color codes, use a composite template with each band having its own model and
template. The bands can move around significantly on the body and with relation to each other so it
is not recommended to try to group more than one band in a model. Once a library of the color
bands is built, setting up the value inspection is then a matter of selecting the correct templates in
the correct order. Depending on the customer needs, it may not be necessary to check the tolerance
band (silver, gold) on the resistors.

Color codes:
Black = 0 Green = 5
Brown = 1 Blue = 6
Red = 2 Violet = 7
Orange = 3 Grey = 8
Yellow = 4 White = 9

374 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Post-Wave Solder Joint Inspections

Radial Lead Components

When setting up inspections for radial lead components, take care to model only the top of these
components. The components can tilt one way or another and some of the side may be present, but
this cannot be relied upon for inspection. Avoid doing text inspections on the top of the parts as the
top is rarely in focus. These components need a very large search area and out of position should be
turned off.

Default conveyor speed for SIM120/QX600

The following is the default conveyor speed parameter and advanced settings.

Default parameter with installer

● Load speed = 225
● Unload speed = 225
● Acc = 200
● DeAcc = 200
● Index speed = 168

Advance setting
● Load speed = 225
● Unload speed = 225
● Acc = 200
● DeAcc = 200
● Index speed = xxx (refer to table)

Table 32. Default conveyor speed

Overlap (mm) Conveyor speed (mm/s)

15 125

14 133

13 140

12 147

11 154

10 161

9 168

8 175

CyberOptics Corporation 375

Appendix A: Detailed Component Settings

Camera lighting calibration settings

To remove the roundels shadow and to obtain a good mean and standard on raise target, set the
QX600 System camera lighting calibration settings to BF: 0 and DF:30.

376 QX Series System Software User Guide

 B
Appendix

Glossary

active area

The area of a model that the software uses to locate a feature or component during a search. Define
active areas in a model to ensure that inspections capture all of the edge data of a feature or
component, to place more focus on important data in the model (such as polarity marks), to exclude
irrelevant data in the model, to define unique features on components to help with discrimination,
and to reduce the amount of data required to process the model

AND logic

A type of inspection that determines the conditions under which a composite task passes
inspection. With AND logic, all child tasks must pass inspection for the composite task to pass
inspection.

assembly

A collection of the image acquisition and stitching information, fiducial definitions, inspection tasks,
templates, and models needed to inspect a single, specific, printed circuit board.

bad models

A classification of models; if a feature being inspected matches a bad model within specified
margins, then the feature fails inspection. Bad models represent what the component or feature
should not look like.

bad training sets

Bad training sets contain tasks that should fail inspection: blank pads from a bare board, skewed
components, or anything that has been found in production that is a genuine failure. Use bad
training sets to test changes to a template or model; for example if you add a new model example to
stop false acceptances, you would want to test whether that model impairs performance against
other test data. If you load the bad training set for a template and inspect it, all the tasks should fail.

board

A board is situated in the panel and contains numerous components, marks and features.

CyberOptics Corporation
Appendix B: Glossary

box locators

Specially designated tasks within a composite template that group individual unit locators into lines
that define the left, right, top, and bottom of a component. The QX series System uses the box
locators to rotate, translate, and scale the image of the component to help locate its precise position on
the board. Box locators are especially useful for performing solder joint inspections on QFPs.

CAD frame

The frame of reference defined by the uncorrected CAD data. In this frame of reference, the origin is
defined by whoever created the CAD file, and it could be located anywhere: in the center of the
board, the lower left corner of the board, or outside the board entirely. In the CAD file, the location of
the origin is of less interest than the relative positions of the components within the assembly.

composite task

An instance of a composite template. A composite task is comprised of other composite or unit tasks.

composite template

Containers for other composite or unit tasks, so that large or complicated features can be
programmed in smaller, more manageable parts. Composite templates are not physically inspected
and therefore do not contain any inspection properties such as tolerance boxes or search areas.
Instead, the composite template contains information such as the number, type, and location of child
tasks within the composite, and inspection logic that determines in what circumstances the
composite task passes inspection, based on the inspection results of its child tasks.

conveyor frame

The frame of reference relative to the conveyor. In this frame of reference, the origin is defined
during calibration.

extent

The boundaries, or dimensions, of an area.

examples

Part of a model definition. Examples consist of image patches that represent legitimate variations of
the feature being modeled; when searching for a component during an inspection, the system
compares the image of the current board with the model examples to determine whether it has
located the feature.

feature

A board contains numerous individual components and marks, each of which can be inspected. An
individual unit such as a component or mark on a PCB is known as a feature.

378 QX Series System Software User Guide

 fiducial

A board-level feature used to define the coordinate system.

fiducial stitch patch

Stitch patches located in one of the first two image groups that identify board-level features, and that
the QX Series-X System uses for locating the leading edge of the board in the plane of calibration.

good models

A classification of models; if a feature being inspected matches a good model within specified
margins, then the feature passes inspection. Good models represent what the component or feature
should look like.

good training sets

Good training sets contain tasks that should pass inspection: any example found in production that
represents a legitimate variation of the component. Use good training sets to test changes to a
template or model; for example if you add a new model example to stop false acceptances, you would
want to test whether that model impairs performance against other test data. If you load the good
training set for a template and inspect it, all the tasks should pass.

image group

A single row of image tiles that is acquired each time the board moves along the conveyor under the
row of cameras in the QX Series System.

image patch

A portion of the board image, typically large enough to encompass a single feature or component,
that is used to inspect the component. Model examples are represented by image patches, as are
items within a training set. If the board feature looks sufficiently like the image during an
inspection, the feature will pass.

image sequence

An image sequence is a list of multiple stored images that you can automatically open and inspect
in sequence. Image sequences are typically used during repeatability studies on QX Series
Measurement systems or to test discrimination on a range of boards using any QX Series System.

image tiles

When the image of the PCB is acquired within the QX Series System, the image is made up of a
number of overlapping image tiles; each tile is acquired by one of the cameras in the system. A
complete image of the PCB is created by indexing the PCB under the cameras on the conveyor and
capturing images at each stage. The image acquisition process produces a mosaic image of the PCB
consisting of multiple image tiles captured by the multiple cameras within the system.

CyberOptics Corporation 379

Appendix B: Glossary

inactive area

An optional area within a model that excludes data from a model. During an inspection, the
software does not use the part of the image that falls within an inactive area to locate a feature or
component during a search. Inactive areas can improve performance by eliminating changeable and
unnecessary data from the model, thus speeding up the inspection process. For example, an inactive
area can exclude text from resistors or the black body of a large QFP.

initial training set

A training set that consists of all instances of a template, as they appear in the currently loaded
image of the board.

library

A storage area (directory or folder) in which associated assemblies, tasks, and models are saved.

load position

At the rear of the half-meter access conveyor is a sensor. The QX Series System uses this sensor to
determine whether a board or calibration target is on the outrigger. For the object to be in the load
position, it must cover this sensor. However, when a system is in-line, this sensor becomes the exit
sensor.

model

A model describes what a component or board feature should look like. The model is comprised of a
geometry definition and a series of examples that define the legitimate variations of the feature.

mosaic image

An image of a PCB captured in the QX Series System. A mosaic image consists of many overlapping
image tiles.

motion correction

The process of adjusting the PCB image to compensate for any movement as the PCB travels along
the QX Series System conveyor belts. Motion correction is defined in the Stitcher Editor.

OR logic

A type of inspection that determines the conditions under which a composite task passes
inspection. With OR logic, the composite task may pass its inspection even though some of the child
tasks fail their inspections.

380 QX Series System Software User Guide

 P

panel

A panel contains one or more circuit boards to be inspected.

parallax

When the same object is observed by two cameras set at different angles, the QX Series System finds
the object in two different places. The change in the perceived position of the object creates a
parallax. The QX Series System can account for parallax using the stitching process.

PCB

Printed Circuit Board.

plane of calibration

A flat surface in 3D space that runs at right angles to the cameras and that is defined when the QX
Series System hardware is calibrated. Ideally, the surface of a board being inspected will be parallel
to the plane of calibration. Measurement systems judge the height of objects on a board relative to the
plane of calibration and, during stitching, compensate for warped boards by flattening the board
image back into the plane of calibration.

production training sets

Production training sets contain tasks that have failed inspection in the production line; they may
contain all failed tasks, or only those failed tasks that the operator disagreed with (false failures).
Production training sets are useful for calling attention to problems in the production line; templates
and models can be updated based on the production training set data.

projection

See tilt.

R&R study

Repeatability and Reproducibility study. A method of determining that an assembly inspected on

the QX Series System hardware produces consistent, repeatable results.

root task

The highest-level task for the assembly, such as aboard or panel. In a multi-board panel, the root task
may be one board that is programmed and then replicated for all instances on the panel.

resolution levels

Resolution levels are automatically created to explain and organize the data in the model. The
number of levels generated depends on the data contained in the model. The resolution levels and
the amount of data in at each level are displayed in the Model Editor.

CyberOptics Corporation 381

Appendix B: Glossary

The QX Series System uses the data contained in each resolution level to search for and inspect
components on a PCB.

rotation

The process of adjusting the PCB image to compensate for any skew in the alignment of the PCB
with the conveyor rails by rotating the root task over the image.

SAM

Statistical Appearance Model. See model.

scale

The process of adjusting the PCB image to compensate for fiducials that are not located precisely
where the model expects them. The Scale feature allows the system to stretch the root task over the
PCB in an attempt to accurately fit the fiducials in the root task over the fiducials on the board.

search area

An area identified in a model or in a stitch patch as the area in which the system searches for the
specified fiducial or component.

search level

A method of controlling the type of search performed on the tasks. The search levels relate to the
resolution levels contained in the model (see resolution levels).

Statistical Appearance Model

See model.

stitch patch

Areas defined within the stitching task that specify which features on a PCB the QX Series System
can use to align overlapping tiles to form a single, seamless image. A stitch patch consists of a stitch
point and a search area.

stitch point

The portion of a stitch patch that identifies the size and location of a board feature that will be used
for stitching image tiles together. The stitch point is contained within a search area, which identifies
the allowable area in which the software should look for the feature.

382 QX Series System Software User Guide

 stitching

The process of combining individual images tiles captured by the multiple cameras on the QX Series
System into a single, seamless image. The QX Series System takes images of PCBs one row at a time
until the entire board surface has been collected. These image tiles overlap each other to create a
mosaic image. To make one single image from the mosaic, it is necessary to stitch the image tiles
together using unique, board level features that are present within the overlaps. To stitch an image,
you must define the stitching task, which instructs the system how to combine the individual tiles
into a single image.

stitching task

The instructions used by the QX Series System to stitch the individual image tiles captured by the
system's multiple cameras into a single image. The stitching task includes information about board-
level fiducials, which the system uses to find the leading edge of the board, and information about
how the system should stitch together individual overlapped image tiles. Before capturing images for
an assembly, you must program the stitching task for the assembly.

stretch

The process of adjusting the PCB image to compensate for any board stretch during inspections.

surface correction (Measurement Machines only)

The process of adjusting the PCB image to compensate for any surface warp or stretch.

task

An instance of a template. When importing CAD data, a task is placed in the assembly for each
reference designator in the CAD file; when manually programming an assembly, place a task on
each feature you wish to be inspected.

template

A pattern or guide that the QX Series System uses to look for an item on the PCB. It contains
information such as tolerance, search area and associated model.

tiles

See image tiles.

tilt

The process of adjusting the PCB image to compensate for any tilt in the alignment of the PCB with
the conveyor rails by rotating the root task over the image.

tolerance

The set of parameters defining the amount of leeway the system will allow for the correct placement
of a particular component.

CyberOptics Corporation 383

Appendix B: Glossary

training set

Training sets are sets of tasks (shown as image patches with SAM icons) collected during
inspections that you can separately inspect, analyze, edit, and optionally add as examples in a
model. Each training set is associated with a composite or unit template.

Translation

An action taken by the QX Series software that slides the image of PCB to the correct alignment
with the root task.

unit task

An instance of a unit template.

unit template

A pattern or guide that the QX Series System uses to look for a specific item on the PCB. It contains
information such as tolerance, search area and associated model.

voting composite

A composite template that passes inspection only if a specified percentage of its child tasks pass
inspection.

384 QX Series System Software User Guide

 C
Appendix

For More Information

Technical Support 386

Copyright and Terms of Use 387

CyberOptics Corporation
Technical Support
If you have problems operating the QX Series System, first check the product documentation for
more information.

If you still need assistance, or you discover problems with the documentation, please telephone, send
e-mail, or fax CyberOptics Service and Support.
● Include your serial numbers in all e-mail messages and faxes.
● Have the product serial numbers ready when you telephone CyberOptics.

International Technical Support Center

+1 800 526 2540
Fax +1 763 542 5100
Email [email protected]
Website www.cyberoptics.com/support

If the toll free access number (+1 800 526 2540) is unavailable in your area, please contact the
regional office closest to you:

North America
CyberOptics Corporation
Minneapolis, Minnesota USA
+1 763 542 5000

Asia-Pacific
CyberOptics Singapore, Ltd.
Singapore
+65 6744 3021

Europe
CyberOptics Ltd.
United Kingdom
+44 1756 700 330
Fax +44 1756 700 440 (Attn: Service)

China
CyberOptics China Company Ltd.
Shanghai
+86-21-6375-6777

Corporate Headquarters
CyberOptics Corporation
5900 Golden Hills Drive
Minneapolis, Minnesota 55416 USA
+1 763 542 5000
Fax +1 763 542 5100

Visit our home page on the Web:

http://www.cyberoptics.com

E-mail:
[email protected]

386 QX Series System Software User Guide

 Copyright and Terms of Use

Copyright and Terms of Use

Notice

CYBEROPTICS DISCLAIMS LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

ARISING FROM THE USE OR MISUSE OF ANY OF ITS PRODUCTS. THE CUSTOMER IS
RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY OPERATION OF THIS PRODUCT NOT RECOMMENDED BY THIS
DOCUMENTATION.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice. CyberOptics Corporation may
make improvements or changes in the products described in this publication at any time.

Trademarks

The following are trademarks or registered trademarks in the United States: CyberOptics, Statistical
Appearance Modeling (SAM), QX500 are owned by CyberOptics Corporation; Microsoft® and
Windows are owned by Microsoft Corporation; MicroLYNX is owned by Intelligent Motion Systems,
Inc.; FireWire is owned by Apple Corporation, Inc.

Warranty, License, and Terms of Sale

The warranty, software license and other terms and conditions of sale covering CyberOptics
products are set forth in CyberOptics Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale and License available at
www.cyberoptics.com or by calling CyberOptics at 1-800-746-6315 and requesting a copy.

CyberOptics® Corporation
5900 Golden Hills Drive
Minneapolis, Minnesota 55416 USA
USA +1 763 542 5000

©2013 CyberOptics Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

CyberOptics Corporation 387

388 QX Series System Software User Guide
Index
A creating 119 saving image in 324
Active areas AssemblyVariants folder 6 using 321
default size 180 Assigning part types to layers 148 Camera images
defined 377 Associating models with templates 208 loading 306
defining for components 176 Auto-align examples 193 saving 306
defining for fiducials 142 Automatically load results in Defect Cameras
for D-Packs 177 Review 38 explicit selection 216
for multiple lines of text 230 Automatically seeding a component focusing 320
for QFPs 178 model 186 properties 308
for SOICs 178 Automatically seeding a fiducial model set up wizard 320
for SOTs 176 132 using to read barcodes 231
for text tasks 179 Capturing
Grid 230 image sequence 75
sizing 180
B images 72
Bad models 205 single image 76
Adding
composite tasks 60 defined 377 Changing grid settings 183
Bad training sets, defined 377 Changing passwords 12
examples from training sets 200
Barcode Changing user names 13
missing tasks 61
new users 11 adding tasks for 231 Child tasks 38
filters 32, 35 CLCCs
pin tasks 60
mandatory 32 detailed settings (post-reflow) 363
tasks manually 222
text tasks 61 mapping table 36 detailed settings (post-wave solder)
mapping to assembly name 36 372
Agree All button, showing 38
opening assembly by 34 detailed settings (pre-reflow) 351
Alarm for failed panel 22
Aligning properties 32 Cloning templates 165
Barcode Reader Collection folder 6
examples 191
testing 328 Color Edges 16
examples automatically 193
root task 113 BarcodeToAssembly folder 6 Colour 196
Basic programming flowchart 42 COM port parameters 31
Analyzing inspection results 250, 288
Black & White Edges 16 Committing templates and models 279
AND logic 206
defined 377 Black buttons 3 Common component sizes 169
Black spot in user interface 3 Common model settings 169
Angle +/- 158
Blank board studies Component bodies
Assemblies
componentizing 121 running 285 manually adding tasks for 223
running a sequence of boards 286 Component Library
copying 117
running on one board 285 adding tasks 234
creating new 67
deleting 117 Board image defining components 54
aligning with root task 113 Component sizes, common 169
loading mounter information 69
Board, defined 377 Componentizing
mapping to barcode 36
moving 117 Box locators, defined 378 assembly 121
Brightness and Contrast 15 Components
open existing 68
Buttons obscured 3 defining for repeatability studies 270
opening by barcode 34
saving 117 Buttons, common 3 defining using component library 54
synchronizing with system database D-Packs 176, 177
276 QFPs 176, 177
C SOICs 176, 177
understanding data 66
variations of 119
CAD SOTs 176, 177
files required 44 Composite tasks
Assemblies folder 6
folder 6 defined 378
Assembly
import data 47, 48 inspecting 241
creating (basic steps) 45
importing data 100, 106 reporting inspection results 245
defined 377
CAD Formats folder 6 resizing icons 237
information contained in 66
CAD frame, defined 378 Composite templates
setting dimensions 73
CAD Import Wizard 103 centering around task icon 236
Assembly Editor
Calibrating the QX500 system 321 centering around tasks 236
inspecting image sequences in 249
Calibration 6 cloning 165
inspecting live images in 249
Calibration target creating manually 220
inspecting stored images in 248
saving image 324 defined 378
loading image sequence file into 77
Calibrator defining 220
Assembly Variants
changing task visibility 326 defining inspection logic for 242

CyberOptics Corporation
Index

definition of 150 Disagree option, disabling 243 overview 126

loading properties for 237 Discrimination 195 properties 53
overview 218 analysis 288 search angles and tolerances 129
uncloning 166 testing changed templates for 284 seeding model 131
understanding 218 Display panel barcode for training sets 32 verifying location 295
unit template conversion to 221 Display properties 15 verifying stitch patch location 292
Compressed 196 Display theme 3 Files needed for programming 44
Concatenate all barcode into the panel Documentation 2 Filter
barcode 32 D-Pack, defining 176, 177 barcodes 32, 35
Config folder 6 Dual in-line packages, adding tasks for Finding tasks 123
Configuring 224 Fine Tuning 195
alarm patterns for hardware events Dual-stage Rework Station 37 Firmware, uploading 309
24 FirmwareConfiguration.xml 314, 315, 316
responses to system events 23 Fit components to layers 63
Configuring, system environment 17 E Focusing cameras 320
Contacting CyberOptics 386 Editing Force barcodes to be upper case 32
Conveyor templates to improve discrimination FullResults folder 6
direction 315 300
motion compensation 96 unit templates for fiducials 138
speed, setting 314 Enable hardware reader 231 G
Conveyor frame, defined 378 Enabled 196 Gamma Correction 15
Copy Model 202 Enabling a model 209 Gap tasks 227
Copying assemblies 117 Enhancement 196 Gaussian interpolation 15
Correct Areas Separately 196 Enhancement mode 16 Good models
Creating an assembly, basic steps 45 Error Reports folder 6 defined 379
Creating models 168 Events and Responses 23 Good training sets, defined 379
Custom XSLT data 30 adding 23 Gradient interpolation 15
CyberOptics folder 6 deleting 23 Grayscale image generated by 32, 232
Examples Grid arrays
adding failed to model 144 adding tasks for 225
D adding from training sets 200 manually adding tasks for 225
da 6 aligning 191 Grid settings
Data automatically aligning 193 changing 183
Process Insight 3.0 29 creating from Unit Template editor
RS 232 31 201
saving 28 defined 378 H
XML 29 deleting from a model 190, 299 Hardware signals
XSLT 30 editing for model 141 testing 328
Deblurring 15 editing in model 197 Height correction 160
Default folders, setting 19 not enough 55 Height map 290
Defect Review settings 38 Explicit camera selection 216 History folder 6
Defining Extent, defined 378 Holding a failed panel 22
active areas 142
components using component library
54 F I
D-Pack 176, 177 Failed examples, adding to model 144 Image
fiducials 52 Failed panel options 22 enhancement 16
model symmetry 203 Failed Task Files folder 6 information contained in 66
QFP 176, 177 Feature, defined 378 overlaps 72, 73
search areas for unit templates 157 Fiducial errors Image group, defined 379
SOIC 176, 177 reducing 146 Image patch
SOT 176, 177 reinspecting 146 explicit selection 216
tolerances for unit templates 157 Fiducial stitch patch, defined 379 Image patch, defined 379
Defining components Fiducial stitch patches Image positions, defining 72
hints 56 overview 126 Image sequence
Deleting verifying correct placement 292, 295 capturing 75
assemblies 117 Fiducials creating manually 76
examples from a model 190, 299 active areas for 142 defined 379
tasks 240 creating unit template for 128 inspecting 249
training sets 201 defined 379 loading 77
users 14 defining 128 Image sequence file
Dimensions, panel 73 defining for repeatability studies 267 creating 76
DIPs defining models for 128 loading into Assembly Editor 77
manually adding tasks for 224 editing model 139 Image tiles, defined 379
Disabling a model 209 editing template 138 Images
Disabling tasks 243 geometry recommendations 126 capturing 71, 72
Disagree All button, showing 38 hints 52 capturing single 76
Disagree Enabled option 243 identifying 52 creating image sequence file 76

390 QX Series System Software User Guide

 defining positions 72 Loading images in Model Editor 171 Multiple lines of text 230
enhancing 16 Location of system repository 20
folder 6 Locators
inspecting live 249 inspecting 135 N
inspecting sequences in Assembly Log file 31 New users 11
Editor 249 Log on as a different user 8 Not enough examples 55
inspecting stored 248 LotInfo folder 6
loading 77 LumEval 15
selecting from specific camera 216 O
viewing in the Inspection Cell editor Omitting tasks 119
307 M Online Help, viewing 10
Importing CAD data 47, 48, 100, 106 Making barcodes mandatory 32 Opening an inspection cell 305
Importing SRFF data 50 Malvar interpolation 15 Opening assembly by barcode 34
Inactive areas Manual height correction 160 operator_log.txt 8
defined 380 Marking templates defined 62 Optimisation 195
defining for components 181 Max Iteration 195 OR logic 205
defining for fiducials 143 Min rotation angle (degree) 194 defined 380
Information button 9 Minimum Movement (µm) 195 OUI Framework folder 6
Initial training set, defined 380 Model Outliers, rejecting 245
Inspecting seeding (component) 186 Output data
composite tasks 241 seeding (fiducial) 132 Process Insight 3.0 29
image sequences 249 Model Editor RS 232 31
live images 249 loading images in 171 XML 29
locators only 135 Model symmetry, defining 203 XSLT 30
stored images 248 Model type 196 OutputObjects folder 6
Inspection Cell Editor 305 Models
setting conveyor direction 315 adding failed examples to 144
setting conveyor speed 314 associating with templates 208 P
setting SMEMA signal polarity 316 bad 205 Panel
Inspection Cell, testing 327 committing individually 279 adjusting dimensions 74
Inspection Cells folder 6 creating for component 168 defined 381
Inspection interval 22 creating manually 170 setting dimensions 73
Inspection logic creating training set from Unit Panel size 72
defining for composite templates 242 Template editor 201 Panelize a board 115
Inspection results defaults 21 Panelize assembly 51
analyzing 250 defined 380 Parallax, defined 381
analyzing for discrimination 288 defining Parts not found 54
reporting for composite inspections symmetry 203 Passive components
245 defining for fiducials 128 detailed settings (post-reflow) 352
Inspection station definition of 150 detailed settings (post-wave solder)
customizing 17 deleting 173 364
Inspection, stopping 241 deleting examples from 299 detailed settings (pre-reflow) 344
Inverse Video 16 diagnostics 296 Passwords, changing 12
Invert Color for Second Try 32, 232 disabling 209 Pixel Grouping 15
IPC Class 344 editing examples for 197 Plane of calibration, defined 381
editing examples in 141, 197 Plastic two-pin devices
editing fiducials 139 detailed settings (post-reflow) 353
J enabling 209 detailed settings (post-wave solder)
JA 6 improving discrimination 296 365
Joint inspections Opening existing 171 detailed settings (pre-reflow) 345
detailed settings 357, 361, 369, 372 overview 167 PLCCs
randomly removing examples 190 detailed settings (post-reflow) 363
removing from templates 208 detailed settings (post-wave solder)
K resetting in Stitcher Editor 294 372
KO 6 reusing geometry 182 detailed settings (pre-reflow) 351
saving 172 Poor discrimination 288
setting default properties 21 Position errors 54
L settings 169 Probability per Active Area 196
Launch Pad 9 sub-sampling 190 Probability threshold 158
Launch Pad labels 9 synchronizing individually 279 Process Insight 3.0
Layers, assigning part types to 148 viewing diagnostics 296 data output 29
Left-to-right 315 viewing unsynchronized 277 Production training sets, creating 198
Library, defined 380 Models folder 6 Production training sets, defined 381
Load position, defined 380 Mosaic image, defined 380 Programming
Load speed 314 Motion error 95 files needed for 44
Loading MounterData folder 6 hints 56
camera images 306 Moving assemblies 117 steps 42
image sequence 77 Moving stitch patches 93

CyberOptics Corporation 391

Index

Q full results 28 367

QFPs image of calibration target 324 detailed settings (pre-reflow) 347
adding gap tasks for 227 inspection cell 305 Standard polarity 316
adding tasks for 226 models 172 Stereo height correction 160
defining 176, 177 Scale, defined 382 Stitch patch results 92, 292
detailed settings (post-reflow) 360 Search angle range 194 Stitch patches
detailed settings (post-wave solder) Search Angles for fiducials 129 creating for fiducials 80
371 Search areas creating for overlaps 83
detailed settings (pre-reflow) 350 defined 157, 382 defined 382
Quad Flat Packs. See QFPs defining for unit templates 157 moving 93
QX series application buttons 3 Search levels recommendations 91
QX series System defined 159, 382 resizing 93
directory structure 5 for models 213 resizing search area 94
Launch Pad 9 for unit templates 159 Stitch points
QX500 System timeout 159 defined 382
calibrating 321 Searching for tasks 123 results 92, 292
Searching for templates 123 Stitcher errors
Seeding reducing 96
R component model 186 reinspecting 96
R&R study, defined 381 fiducial model 132 Stitcher fail
Radial lead components Selecting camera image 216 continue inspection 97
detailed settings (post-wave solder) Server Logs folder 6 Stitching
375 Setting defined 383
Randomly removing examples 190 conveyor direction 315 motion limits 95
Read-On-The-Fly 32 conveyor speed 314 suppress failure warning 80
Recommended stitch patch features 91 default folders 19 while inspecting 97
Reducing fiducial errors 146 Inspection & Rework properties 17 Stitching tasks
Reducing stitcher errors 96 repository location 20 continue inspecting after failure 97
Reflection along X 194 SMEMA signal polarity 316 defined 383
Reinspecting after fiducial error 146 system properties 17 editing to improve discrimination 290
Reinspecting after stitcher error 96 Setting up new users 11 populating 294
Rejecting outliers 245 Show Agree/Disagree All buttons 38 Stopping inspection 241
Relay barcode to COM 2 on commit 32 Show child tasks 38 Stretch, defined 383
Removing models from templates 208 Show Labels 9 Sub-sample 22, 190
Repair Station, setting up 37 Showing/Hiding labels 9 Suppress the stitcher fail warning 80
Repeatability studies 266 Single tasks, adding 228 Surface correction, defined 383
analyzing data 272 Sizing active areas 180 Surface models 98
Residuals 195 Skip marks Surface plot 290
Resize tools 157 adding tasks for 233 Surface plots
Resizing stitch patches 93 SMEMA creating 99
Resolution levels, defined 381 signal polarity 316 Switching templates 207
Result storage options 28 Smooth Resampling 15 Symmetrical models 203
Results folder 6, 37 SOICs Synchronizing
Results, stitch point 92 adding gap tasks for 227 assemblies 276
Reusing model geometry 182 defining 176, 177 individual models and templates 279
Reverse polarity 316 detailed settings (post-reflow) 355 System configuration 17
Review Station 37 detailed settings (post-wave solder) System database
Rework Station 367 synchronizing assemblies with 276
customizing 17 detailed settings (pre-reflow) 347 System properties
dual-stage 37 SOJs barcode properties 32
Right-to-left 315 detailed settings (post-reflow) 359 custom XML output 30
Root task detailed settings (pre-reflow) 349 data output options 28
aligning with board image 113 Solder joints default model properties 21
aligning with image 113 detailed settings 357, 361, 369, 372 dual-stage rework stations 37
defined 381 SOPs failed panel options 22
information contained in 66 detailed settings (post-reflow) 355 loading assemblies by barcode 34
Rotational Symmetry 194 detailed settings (post-wave solder) overview 17
Round body 194 367 RS 232 output 31
RS 232 detailed settings (pre-reflow) 347 sampling inspections 22
data output 31 SOTs setting 17
defining 176, 177 setting default folder locations 19
Sound alarm on barcode failure 32 setting inspection intervals 22
S Sounding alarm for failed panel 22 setting system repository location 20
SAM, defined 382 SRFF setting up alarm patterns 24
Sampling 22 import data 50 setting up events 23
Saving SSOPs setting up system events 23
assemblies 117 detailed settings (post-reflow) 355 XML output 29
camera images 306 detailed settings (post-wave solder) System repository 276

392 QX Series System Software User Guide

 location 20 adding examples from 200 Viewing inspection results 250
bad, defined 377 Viewing model diagnostics 296
creating 198 Voting composite, defined 384
T creating from Unit Template editor
Task icons 201
centering templates around 236 defined 384 W
resizing composite task icons 237 definition of 150 Wavelet transform 195
Task visibility in the Calibrator 326 deleting 201 Weighted 195
Tasks good, defined 379
adding barcode tasks 231 production, defined 381
adding component library 234 Translation, defined 384 X
adding for component bodies 223 TSOPs XML output 29
adding for dual in-line packages 224 detailed settings (post-reflow) 355 XSLT output 30
adding for grid arrays 225 detailed settings (post-wave solder)
adding for quad flat packs 226 367
adding gap tasks 227 detailed settings (pre-reflow) 347 Z
adding single tasks 228 ZH 7
adding skip marks 233
adding text for 229 U
defined 383 Uncloning templates 149, 166
deleting 240 Unit tasks
disabling 243 defined 384
disabling operator disagree option deleting 240
243 positioning 239
omitting 119 rotating 239
searching for 123 Unit templates
Technical support 386 AND logic 206
Template properties centering around task icon 236
loading from existing template 237 cloning 165
Templates converting to composite 221
centering around tasks 236 defined 384
cloning 165 defining search areas for 157
committing individually 279 defining tolerances for 157
composite 218 definition of 150
creating composite 220 deleting 153
defined 383 editing 238
deleting 153 fiducial properties 53
editing fiducial 138 fiducials, editing 138
editing to improve discrimination 300 loading stored images 153
marking defined 62 opening 151
searching for 123 OR logic 205
switching 207 overview 150
synchronizing individually 279 saving 152
testing changes for discrimination uncloning 166
284 Unsynchronized models, viewing 277
uncloning 149, 166 Unsynchronized templates, viewing 277
viewing unsynchronized 277 Use Grayscale for Decoding 32
Templates folder 6 Use Is a component flag 38
Tester pane, adding examples from 187 User accounts
Text deleting 14
adding tasks for 229 setting up 11
defining multiple lines of 230 User names, changing 13
manually adding tasks for 229 User password 12
Through-hole components Using cameras to read barcodes 231
detailed settings (post-wave solder) Utils folder 6
374
Through-hole joints
detailed settings (post-wave solder) V
373 Variant
Tilt, defined 383 create by omitting tasks 119
Timeout, search levels 159 create for a different part position
Tolerance areas 120
defined 157 create for a different part type 120
defining for unit templates 157 duplicate 120
Tolerances load existing 120
defined 383 Variation of an assembly 119
defining for unit templates 157 Viewing images in the Inspection Cell
Training sets editor 307

CyberOptics Corporation 393

Index

394 QX Series System Software User Guide